Drypro 832 SM

LASER IMAGER
CODE NO.0921(UL)
0922(CE)
0921YG220C Service Manual

Konica Minolta Medical Imaging U.S.A., Inc. Konica Minolta Business Solutions
411 Newark Pompton Turnpike, Wayne, NJ 07470, U.S.A. (Canada) Ltd.
TEL. 973-633-1500 369 Britannia Road East, Mississauga,
Ontario, L4Z 2H5, Canada
TEL. 905-890-6600
EU Authorized Representative: Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic

Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic Imaging (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Europe B.V. 11F-C1 Junyao International Plaza, No.789 Manufacturer:
Frankfurtstraat 40, 1175 RH Lijnden, ZhaojiabangRoad, Shanghai, China Postcode 200032
The Netherlands TEL. 021-6422-2626
TEL. 31-20659-0260 2970 Ishikawa-machi, Hachioji-shi Tokyo 192-8505 Japan
070914YM
Introduction
DRYPRO 832 is a totally dry processing laser imager. This product is easy to use and environmentally friendly
while maintaining sophisticated features and high image quality.
This manual provides repair precautions and a series of steps for service engineers who repair this machine (or
system including this machine).
This manual should be kept in a place handy for quick reference.
Cautions
1. Unauthorized reproduction of any part of this manual is prohibited.
2. The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
3. Any discrepancies, errors or omissions noted should be communicated to the manufacturer.
4. Notwithstanding item 3. above, the manufacturer accepts no responsibility whatsoever for any loss or
decrease in profits arising from usage of the product.
Trademark
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Windows 2000/XP stands for Microsoft Windows 2000/XP Professional operating system.
• Other company names and product names in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
i
How to Read This Manual
Structure of This Manual

This manual provides prior representations for safety and the method for repairing this machine in eighteen chapters
below:
Chapter 1: Safety Precautions and Warnings
This chapter provides basic precautions which should be followed when repairing or using DRYPRO 832.
Thoroughly read this chapter before starting work and instruct users to familiarize with these precautions.
Chapter 2: Before Starting Repair Work
This chapter provides basic knowledge about the product before starting repair work on DRYPRO 832.
Chapter 3: Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic operations when repairing DRYPRO 832, including the procedures for installing or
removing a supply tray and exterior cover, opening or closing covers, and wearing a grounding strap.
Chapter 4: Replacing Supply Unit Loading Parts
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the supply unit when they fail and how to adjust after
replacing the loading parts.
Chapter 5: Replacing Tray Unit Loading Parts
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the tray unit when they fail and how to adjust after replacing
the loading parts.
Chapter 6: Replacing Lispl-832 (Optional) Loading Parts
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in Lispl-832 (optional) when they fail and how to adjust after
Chapter 7: Replacing Sub Scan Unit Loading Parts
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the sub scan unit when they fail and how to adjust after
Chapter 8: Replacing Loading Parts in Exposure Unit
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the exposure unit when they fail and how to adjust after
Chapter 9: Replacing Loading Parts in Heat Process Unit
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the heat process unit when they fail and how to adjust after
Chapter 10: Replacing Ejection Unit
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the ejection unit when they fail and how to adjust after
Chapter 11: Replacing Loading Parts in Main Unit
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the main unit when they fail and how to adjust after replacing
the loading parts.
Chapter 12: Replacing Loading Parts in the Exterior of Main Unit
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the exterior section of the main unit when they fail and how to
adjust after replacing the loading parts.
Chapter 13: Replacing and Cleaning Loading Parts on a Regular Basis
This chapter describes the procedures for replacing and cleaning loading parts on a regular basis.
Chapter 14: Setting and Adjustment
This chapter describes various setting and adjustment procedures for DRYPRO 832.
Chapter 15: DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool
This chapter describes each item of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
ii
Chapter 16: MainteTool
This chapter describes various maintenance using the service PC.
Chapter 17: Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions for errors that may occur.
Chapter 18: Technical Information
This chapter describes the technical information on block diagrams, wiring diagrams, board drawings, and function
timing charts for the DRYPRO 832.
iii
Alert Symbol Marks
Alert symbols alert the person(s) who installs this machine (or system including this machine) and other people to
matters and/or operation potentially hazardous to them when installing it.
Read these messages and follow instructions carefully.
Be sure to read all instructions and safety standards and become thoroughly familiar with the product before
installing this machine.
Description of Safety Signage
• Symbols indicating that care (including danger and warnings) should be taken:
General Danger of Danger of Danger of Danger of

Precautions Fire Electric High Rotation
Shocks Temperature
• Prohibition signs (indicating prohibited acts):
Prohibited Do not Do not Do not Do not No mobile Star-burst

touch disassemble touch with expose to phones connection
a wet hand moisture prohibited
• Symbols indicating compulsory or required acts:
Ground Remove plug from electrical outlet
Signal Words
Signal words designate a degree or level of hazard seriousness inherent in products.
Signal words include the following three types, which are used according to risk of damage caused by danger and
the severity of damage:
DANGER
Used to indicate an immediate and imminent danger that, if not avoided, is likely to cause death or serious injury,
serious property damage such as total loss of equipment and fire.
WARNING
Used to indicate a consequential (potential) danger that, if not avoided, is likely to cause death or serious injury,
serious property damage such as total loss of equipment and fire.
CAUTION
Used to indicate hazards that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury or cause partial loss of
equipment and computer data loss.
Risk of damage
High Low
Bodily injury Death or serious injury
DANGER WARNING
(or property damage) (serious damage)
Minor or moderate injury WARNING or
CAUTION
(minor damage) CAUTION
Property damage only CAUTION
iv
Contents
Contents
Introduction ......................................................................................... i
How to Read This Manual ................................................................. ii
Structure of This Manual..................................................................ii
Alert Symbol Marks .......................................................................... iv
Signal Words .................................................................................... iv
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions and Warnings...................................1-1

1.1 Warning Labels ........................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Positions and Types of Warning Labels................................ 1-2
1.2 Safety Precautions ...................................................................1-4
1.2.1 Precautions Following Requirements of
Laws and Regulations .......................................................... 1-4
1.2.2 General Precautions ............................................................. 1-7
1.2.3 Handling Precautions ........................................................... 1-8
1.2.4 Servicing Precautions ........................................................... 1-9
1.2.5 Disposing of Parts................................................................. 1-9
Chapter 2 Before Starting Repair Work ...........................................2-1

2.1 Names of Parts ........................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Unit Exterior .......................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Unit Interior ........................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Supply Tray........................................................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Lispl-832 (optional) ............................................................... 2-4
2.2 Structure...................................................................................2-4
2.3 Tools, Measuring Instruments, and Jigs Necessary
for Servicing .............................................................................2-5
Chapter 3 Basic Operations.............................................................3-1

3.1 Removing/Installing Supply Tray..............................................3-2
3.2 Opening/Closing Cover ............................................................3-4
3.2.1 Opening/Closing Front Cover ............................................... 3-4
3.2.2 Opening/Closing Right Cover ............................................... 3-5
3.3 Removing/Installing Exterior Cover..........................................3-6
3.3.1 Removing/Installing Lower Right Cover................................ 3-6
3.3.2 Removing/Installing Film Ejection Tray............................... 3-10
3.3.3 Removing/Installing Upper Right Cover.............................. 3-12
3.3.4 Removing/Installing Rear Cover ......................................... 3-18
3.3.5 Removing/Installing Rear Cover (Lispl-832) ....................... 3-20
3.3.6 Removing/Installing Left Cover........................................... 3-22
3.4 Installing a Grounding Strap...................................................3-24
3.5 Manually Unlocking the Tray ..................................................3-24
Chapter 4 Replacing Supply Unit Loading Parts..............................4-1

4.1 Light Shield Unit .......................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Placing Loading Parts........................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Removing/Installing Light Shield Assembly .......................... 4-3
4.1.3 Replacing Barrier Bag Detection Sensor .............................. 4-6
4.1.4 Replacing Film Height Detection Sensor .............................. 4-8
4.2 Pickup Unit .............................................................................4-10
4.2.1 Placing Loading Parts......................................................... 4-10
4.2.2 Removing/Installing Pickup Unit Assembly......................... 4-11
4.2.3 Replacing Pickup Transport Motor ..................................... 4-15
4.2.4 Replacing Pickup HP Motor................................................ 4-18
4.2.5 Replacing Pickup HP Sensor ............................................. 4-20
1
Contents
Chapter 5 Replacing Tray Unit Loading Parts .................................5-1

5.1 Placing Loading Parts ..............................................................5-2
5.2 Replacing Supply Elevating Motor ...........................................5-3
5.3 Replacing Elevating Plate HP Sensor......................................5-6
5.4 Replacing Tray Lock Solenoid ...............................................5-10
5.5 Replacing Tray Detection Sensor ..........................................5-15
5.6 Replacing Outlet Light Shield Unit Assembly.........................5-20
Chapter 6 Replacing Lispl-832 (Optional) Loading Parts.................6-1

6.1 Light Shield Unit .......................................................................6-2
6.2 Pickup Unit ...............................................................................6-3
6.3 Supply Unit...............................................................................6-4
6.3.2 Replacing Elevating Transport Motor ................................... 6-5
6.4 Elevating Transport Unit...........................................................6-8
6.4.1 Removing/Installing Elevating Transport Unit ....................... 6-9
6.4.2 Replacing Elevating Transport Nip
Opening/Closing Motor ....................................................... 6-13
Opening/Closing HP Sensor............................................... 6-15
6.4.4 Replacing Supply Outlet Sensor......................................... 6-18
Chapter 7 Replacing Sub Scan Unit Loading Parts .........................7-1

7.1 Placing Loading Parts ..............................................................7-2
7.2 Removing/Installing Sub Scan Unit (Including
the Exposure Unit and Position Regulation Unit) .....................7-4
7.3 Replacing Sub Scan Unit (Including the
Position Regulation Unit)........................................................7-10
7.4 Replacing Right Cover Detection Sensor...............................7-12
7.5 Replacing Position Regulation Inlet Sensor ...........................7-15
7.6 Replacing Position Regulation Transport Motor.....................7-19
7.7 Replacing Moderation belt .....................................................7-23
7.8 Replacing Transfer belt ..........................................................7-25
7.9 Replacing Sub Scan Transport Motor ....................................7-27
7.10 Replacing Sub Scan Nip Motor ..............................................7-30
7.11 Replacing Sub Scan Inlet Sensor ..........................................7-34
7.12 Replacing Sub Scan Nip HP Sensor......................................7-38
7.13 Replacing V-sync Sensor .......................................................7-40
7.14 Replacing Reference Guide ...................................................7-44
Chapter 8 Replacing Exposure Unit ................................................8-1

8.1 Placing Exposure Unit..............................................................8-2
8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit..........................................................8-3
Chapter 9 Replacing Loading Parts in Heat Process Unit ...............9-1

9.1 Heat Process Unit Side ............................................................9-2
9.1.1 Removing/Installing Heat Process Unit ................................ 9-3
9.1.2 Replacing Heater .................................................................. 9-7
9.1.3 Replacing Heat Process Temperature Sensor ..................... 9-8
9.1.4 Replacing Supply Cooling Fan ............................................. 9-9
9.2 Main Unit Side........................................................................ 9-11
9.2.1 Replacing Heat Process Motor ........................................... 9-12
9.2.2 Replacing Heat Process Cooling Fans 1 and 2 .................. 9-14
9.2.3 Replacing Deodorant Filter Detection Sensor .................... 9-16
9.2.4 Replacing Insulation Unit Fan............................................. 9-18
9.2.5 Replacing Deodorant Fan................................................... 9-20
2
Contents
9.2.6 Replacing Internal Temperature Sensor ............................. 9-22
Chapter 10 Replacing Ejection Unit.................................................10-1

10.1 Placing Ejection Unit ..............................................................10-2
10.2 Replacing Ejection Unit ..........................................................10-3
Chapter 11 Replacing Loading Parts in Main Unit ........................... 11-1

11.1 Placing Loading Parts ............................................................ 11-2
11.2 Replacing Front Cover Sensor............................................... 11-3
11.3 Replacing Main Board............................................................ 11-7
11.4 Replacing Compact Flash .................................................... 11-11
11.5 Replacing MEC Board.......................................................... 11-14
11.6 Replacing Multiple Power Supply......................................... 11-17
11.7 Replacing H-DRV Board ...................................................... 11-20
11.8 Replacing Noise Filter .......................................................... 11-22
11.9 Replacing Control Cooling Fan ............................................ 11-25
Chapter 12 Replacing Loading Parts in the Exterior of Main Unit....12-1

12.1 Placing Loading Parts ............................................................12-2
12.2 Removing/Installing Exterior of Operation Panel ...................12-3
12.3 Replacing LCD Board ............................................................12-6
12.4 Replacing Status Lamp ..........................................................12-8
12.5 Replacing Operation Switch Board ...................................... 12-11
Chapter 13 Replacing and Cleaning Loading Parts on a Regular Basis...13-1

13.1 Periodic Maintenance Tasks ..................................................13-2
13.2 Replacing Pickup Roller .........................................................13-3
13.3 Replacing Opposed Roller .....................................................13-7
13.4 Cleaning Guide .................................................................... 13-11
13.5 Cleaning Control Box Intake Air Filter ..................................13-13
13.6 Power Supply Unit Intake Air Filter Cleaning .......................13-14
Chapter 14 Setting and Adjustment.................................................14-1

14.1 Image Unevenness Correction...............................................14-2
14.1.1 Density Correction .............................................................. 14-3
14.2 Checking and Adjusting Image Data Writing Position..........14-13
14.2.1 Checking Image Data Writing Position ............................. 14-13
14.2.2 Adjusting Main Scan OFFSET (Lateral)
Writing Position................................................................. 14-15
14.2.3 Adjusting Sub Scan OFFSET (Vertical)
Writing Position................................................................. 14-16
14.3 Checking and Fine Tuning the Print Size .............................14-17
14.3.1 Checking Print Size .......................................................... 14-17
14.3.2 Main Scan OFFSET Adjustment ...................................... 14-19
14.3.3 Sub Scan OFFSET Adjustment ........................................ 14-20
Chapter 15 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool ..............................................15-1

15.1 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Start ...............................................15-2
15.2 Print Queue/Delete.................................................................15-7
15.3 Print Condition........................................................................15-9
15.4 Test Print ..............................................................................15-12
15.5 Custom Border Setup...........................................................15-14
15.6 QC Pattern ...........................................................................15-15
15.7 Logo Setup...........................................................................15-16
15.8 Film Data..............................................................................15-18
15.9 Film Setup ............................................................................15-20
15.10 Calibration Setup..................................................................15-23
3
Contents
15.11 System Setup.......................................................................15-25

15.12 Time Layout .........................................................................15-28
15.13 System Reset.......................................................................15-30
15.14 Maintenance Schedule.........................................................15-31
15.15 HPRO Setup ........................................................................15-33
15.16 MEC Setup...........................................................................15-36
15.17 Product Setup ......................................................................15-37
15.18 Image Adjust ........................................................................15-39
15.19 Error History .........................................................................15-41
15.20 Densitometer........................................................................15-42
15.20.1 Built-in Densitometer Calibration ...................................... 15-42
15.20.2 Confirming After Density Calibration................................. 15-49
15.20.3 Creating QC PATTERN BASE.......................................... 15-51
15.21 Data Initialize........................................................................15-54
Chapter 16 MainteTool.....................................................................16-1
16.1 MainteTool Outline .................................................................16-2
16.2 Setting up Network.................................................................16-3
16.2.1 Connecting Service PC ...................................................... 16-3
16.2.2 Setting up Network for Service PC ..................................... 16-4
16.2.3 Sharing the Mainte_Tool Folder.......................................... 16-6
16.3 How to Start the MainteTool ...................................................16-9
16.4 Upgrade Information ............................................................16-12
16.5 Backing up Setup .................................................................16-15
16.5.1 Backup Method up to V1.01 ............................................. 16-15
16.5.2 Backup Method for V1.02 and Later ................................. 16-18
16.5.3 Backing Up To MECH EEPROM ...................................... 16-25
16.6 Restoring Settings................................................................16-26
16.6.1 Restore Method up to V1.01............................................. 16-26
16.6.2 Restore Method for V1.02 and Later ................................ 16-29
16.7 Collecting Logs.....................................................................16-33
16.8 Collecting Job Data ..............................................................16-37
16.9 IMAGER MEC I/O TEST ......................................................16-39
16.10 IMAGER PRINT I/O TEST ...................................................16-49
16.10.1 Measuring Laser Beam Intensity ...................................... 16-51
Chapter 17 Troubleshooting ............................................................17-1

17.1 Solutions When Trouble Occurs ............................................17-2
17.1.1 The DRYPRO 832 main unit will not start........................... 17-2
17.1.2 The DRYPRO 832 stops during startup.............................. 17-3
17.1.3 An error message is displayed ........................................... 17-4
17.1.4 Film Jam ............................................................................. 17-4
17.1.5 Trouble while using DRYPRO 832 ..................................... 17-4
17.1.6 Does not exit (shutdown) .................................................... 17-5
17.1.7 Pickup malfunction trouble ................................................. 17-6
17.1.8 Print Image Trouble ............................................................ 17-7
17.2 Error display and solutions...................................................17-14
17.2.1 Operating panel display and solutions.............................. 17-14
17.2.2 Display and solutions for MainteTool ................................ 17-58
17.3 DRYPRO 832 Unit Replacement Procedure........................17-62
17.3.1 Replacing Main Board ...................................................... 17-63
17.3.2 Replacing the Compact Flash (CF) .................................. 17-64
17.3.3 Replacing the DRYPRO 832 ............................................ 17-82
17.3.4 Replacing Printlink5-IN ..................................................... 17-95
17.3.5 Replacing the MEC Board .............................................. 17-106
4
Contents
Chapter 18 Technical Information ...................................................18-1

18.1 Placing Electronic Parts .........................................................18-2
18.1.1 Supply Unit ......................................................................... 18-2
18.1.2 Lispl-832 (Optional) ............................................................ 18-3
18.1.3 Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit ........................................ 18-4
18.1.4 Heat Process Unit............................................................... 18-5
18.1.5 Ejection Unit ....................................................................... 18-6
18.1.6 Main Unit ............................................................................ 18-6
18.1.7 Exterior of Main Unit ........................................................... 18-7
18.2 Placing Mechanical Parts.......................................................18-8
18.2.1 Supply Unit ......................................................................... 18-8
18.2.2 Lispl-832 ............................................................................. 18-9
18.2.3 Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit ...................................... 18-10
18.2.4 Exposure Unit ................................................................... 18-11
18.2.5 Heat Process Unit............................................................. 18-12
18.2.6 Ejection Unit ..................................................................... 18-13
18.2.7 Main Unit .......................................................................... 18-13
18.3 Board Diagram .....................................................................18-14
18.3.1 Main Board ....................................................................... 18-14
18.3.2 Main ScanRV, EEP Board Diagram.................................. 18-15
18.3.3 LCD Unit Board Diagram .................................................. 18-16
18.3.4 Operation SW Board Diagram .......................................... 18-16
18.3.5 STATUS LED Board Diagram........................................... 18-17
18.3.6 Multiple Power Supply ...................................................... 18-17
18.3.7 Noise Filter ....................................................................... 18-18
18.3.8 MEC Board Drawing ......................................................... 18-19
18.4 Film Management Information .............................................18-21
18.4.1 Management Information Print Specifications .................. 18-21
18.5 Block Diagram......................................................................18-23
18.6 Writing Diagram ...................................................................18-24
18.7 Printing Operation Load Timing Chart (Standard 1 ch) ........18-29
18.8 Printing Operation Load Timing Chart (Standard 2 ch) ........18-30
5
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions and
Warnings
This chapter presents safety precautions you need to know prior to
starting repair work on the product.
1.1 Warning Labels ..................................................1-2

1.1.1 Positions and Types of Warning Labels ....... 1-2
1.2 Safety Precautions.............................................1-4
1.2.1 Precautions Following Requirements of
Laws and Regulations.................................. 1-4
1.2.2 General Precautions .................................... 1-7
1.2.3 Handling Precautions ................................... 1-8
1.2.4 Servicing Precautions .................................. 1-9
1.2.5 Disposing of Parts ........................................ 1-9
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions and Warnings
1.1 Warning Labels

Various warning labels are attached to DRYPRO 832 on locations shown below:
When performing installation or maintenance work such as repairs, understand the meaning of warning labels and
be very careful in handling locations where warning labels are affixed to.
To avoid an accident during servicing work, do not remove or contaminate the label attached to. If the
information on the label is unreadable as it came unstuck or was contaminated, replace the label with a new one.
Caution
1.1.1 Positions and Types of Warning Labels
No. Precautions/Warning Labels

1 Laser Warning
2 Class 1 Laser Product
3 Caution Hot Label
4 Caution Hot (130 ℃ ) Label
1-2
No. Precautions/Warning Labels

5 Laser Power Label
1-3
1.2 Safety Precautions

Read all safety precautions thoroughly before using the product.
Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this section.
1.2.1 Precautions Following Requirements of Laws and Regulations
Caution as to laser control

To prevent danger, make sure that only service engineers who received proper formal
training will remove the exterior cover or touch the inside of the equipment.
DRYPRO 832 Laser Unit Specifications

Item Specifications
Wavelength 784nm
Maximum output 260mW
(1) EMC Statement - DRYPRO 832 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices to the
IEC 60601-1-2: 2001, Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC or the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/
336/EEC (use applicable directive). These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a typical medical installation. DRYPRO 832 generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to other
devices in the vicinity. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If DRYPRO 832 does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving device.
- Increase the separation between the equipment.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the other device(s) are connected.
- Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.
(2) EMC Statement - Take precautions against DRYPRO MODEL 832 especially regarding EMC. Install and put
into service according to the EMC information provided in the manual.
(3) EMC Statement - Do not use mobile phones or pocket pagers in the vicinity of the DRYPRO MODEL 832. Use
of mobile phones or pocket pagers near the DRYPRO MODEL 832 can cause errors in operation due to
electromagnetic wave interference : such devices should be turned off in the vicinity of the unit.
(4) EMC Statement - Cable List
- AC Power Cable (3m)
(5) EMC Statement - The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the exception of
transducers and cables sold by KONICA MINOLTA MEDICAL & GLAPHIC, INC. as for internal components,
may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of DRYPRO 832.
(6) EMC Statement - Do not use adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary,
confirm normal operation in the configuration in which DRYPRO 832 will be used.
1-4
(7) EMC Statement
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions

The DRYPRO 832 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the DRYPRO 832 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
The DRYPRO 832 uses RF energy only for its internal
RF emissions function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are
Group 1
CISPR 11 not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic
equipment.
RF emissions
Class B
CISPR 11
The DRYPRO 832 is suitable for use in all establishments
Harmonic emissions other than domestic and those directly connected to the
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2 public low-voltage power supply network that supplies
buildings used for domestic purposes.
Voltage fluctuations/flic
Applicable
IEC 61000-3-3
(8) EMC Statement

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The customer or the user or the DRYPRO 832 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IEC 60601
Immunity test Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test level
Electrostatic ±6kV contact ±6kV contact
discharge (ESD)
Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile.
IEC 61000-4-2 ±8kV air ±8kV air If floors are covered with synthetic material, the
relative humidity should be at least 30%. Mains
Electrical fast ±2kV for power ±2kV for power
power quality should be that of a typical
transient/burst supply lines supply lines
commercial or hospital environment.
±1kV for input/ ±1kV for input/
IEC 61000-4-4 output lines output lines
±1kV ±1kV
Surge differential mode differential mode Mains power quality should be that of a typical
±2kV ±2kV commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-5
common mode common mode
<5% UT (>95% dip <5% UT (>95% dip
Voltage dips, short in UT) for 0.5 cycle in UT) for 0.5 cycle
Mains power quality should be that of a typical
interruptions and 40% UT (60% dip 40% UT (60% dip commercial or hospital environment. If the user
voltage variations in UT) for 5 cycles in UT) for 5 cycles of the DRYPRO 832 requires continued
on power supply operation during power mains interruptions, it is
input lines 70% UT (30% dip 70% UT (30% dip recommended that the DRYPRO 832 be
in UT) for 25 cycles in UT) for 25 cycles powered from an uninterruptible power supply
IEC 61000-4-11 <5% UT> (<95% <5% UT> (<95% or a battery.
dip in UT) for 5 sec dip in UT) for 5 sec
Power frequency
(50/60Hz) Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
magnetic field 3A/m 3A/m levels characteristic of a typical location in a
typical commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
[NOTE] UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
1-5
(9) EMC Statement
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity

The customer or the user or the DRYPRO 832 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IEC 60601 Compliance
Immunity test Electromagnetic environment - guidance
test level level
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of the DRYPRO
832, including cables, than the recommended
separation distance calculated from the equation
applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance

d=[1.2] P
d=[1.2] P 80 MHz to 800 MHz
Conducted RF 3Vrms [3]V d=[2.3] P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the
Radiated RF 3V/m [3]V/m transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in metres (m)
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey,a
should be less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:
[NOTE] At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
[NOTE] These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically
with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site
survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the DRYPRO 832 is used
exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the DRYPRO 832 should be observed to verify normal
operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re- orienting or
relocation the DRYPRO 832.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than [3]V/m.
1-6
(10) EMC Statement
Recommended separation distances between

portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the DRYPRO 832
The DRYPRO 832 is intended for use in and electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are
controlled. The customer or the user of the DRYPRO 832 can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and
the DRYPRO 832 as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
Rated maximum output m
power of transmitter
W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 kHz to 800 MHz 800 kHz to 2.5 GHz
d=[1.2] P d=[1.2] P d=[2.3] P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 8
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in
metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the
maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
[NOTE] At 80 MHz and 800MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
[NOTE] These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
1.2.2 General Precautions
Do not perform work or operation not contained in this manual.

If you accidentally conduct work, you may burn yourself or get an electric shock due to a
hot section and high voltage point contained in this machine.
Make sure to follow safety precautions on warning labels.
Make sure to follow safety precautions contained in this manual and on warning labels
attached to this machine. Failure to observe this caution can cause personal injury or
damage to this machine.
This product is equipped with a laser generator (class 3B).
Avoid eye or skin exposure to direct laser, as it could cause serious injury.
Wear special safety glasses whenever you perform operation check or the like with the
power turned on.
This machine can handle Class 1 laser products with the safety interlock not released.
Anyone with a cardiac pacemaker should keep away from this machine.
There is the danger of causing electromagnetic interference with cardiac pacemakers.
Removing exterior covers

To prevent danger, make sure that only service engineers who received proper formal
training will remove the exterior cover or touch the inside of the product.
1-7
1.2.3 Handling Precautions
If unusual noise, odor, or smoke comes from this product, stop operation.
If unusual noise, odor, or smoke coming from this product is detected, immediately stop
operation. If you continue to operate it with abnormal condition left as it is, it could cause
an electric shock, fire, or damage to the product.
Be careful not to trip over or trample on the power cable.
If you continue to use the damaged cable, it could cause an electric shock, heat
generation or fire.
Do not remove the power plug by pulling on the power cable.

This could cause a break in the power cable, resulting in heat generation or fire.
Do not put drink or foreign object on the product.

Do not put drink such as juice or foreign objects such as clips and pins on this machine. If
you use this product with water or foreign object such as metals entered in this machine,
it can cause a short in the internal circuit, resulting in fire.
Do not block air intakes or outlets of the product.

If air intakes or outlets of the product are blocked, it can cause failure of the product or
reduce the accuracy of reading images.
Do not leave objects standing on the product or do not step on it.
Failure to observe this caution can cause damage to the product.
Do not use equipment such as mobile phone that emits electromagnetic

waves.
If you use equipment such as mobile phone that emits electromagnetic waves near the
product, it can have negative effect on the product.
1-8
1.2.4 Servicing Precautions
Do not insert a piece of wire or metal.

Do not insert foreign objects such as metal strip or wire through vent or gap in the main
unit. Failure to observe this could cause an electric shock.
Be sure to turn OFF when servicing.
If you pull out the circuit board in this machine or remove connectors and cables with the
power turned on, it can cause serious accident.
Make sure to turn OFF the main power supply before starting these operations.
Do not remove lithium batteries carelessly.
The product contains lithium batteries. If you bring a lithium battery near fire or immerse it
in water, it could cause an explosion.
When handling internal electronic components of the product, wear a

wristband.
When handling internal electronic components, wear an antistatic wristband.
If you touch an energized electronic component such as circuit board, it can cause
damage.
Unplug the unit or turn OFF the main power supply before cleaning.
Be sure to unplug the unit or turn OFF the main power supply before cleaning this
machine.
You could get your finger caught in sliding or rotating parts.
1.2.5 Disposing of Parts
This DRYPRO 832 product (including lithium batteries), accessories,

optional accessories, consumables, and media are designated as
industrial waste.
When disposing of these, be sure to have them disposed of by authorized industrial
waste disposal firm in accordance with the applicable ordinances and regulations of the
local government.
1-9
Chapter 2
Chapter 2 Before Starting Repair
Work
This chapter provides basic knowledge about the product before
starting repair work on DRYPRO 832.
2.1 Names of Parts ..................................................2-2

2.1.1 Unit Exterior ................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 Unit Interior................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Supply Tray .................................................. 2-3
2.1.4 Lispl-832 (optional)....................................... 2-4
2.2 Structure ............................................................2-4
2.3 Tools, Measuring Instruments, and Jigs
Necessary for Servicing .....................................2-5
Chapter 2 Before Starting Repair Work
2.1 Names of Parts

Names of the parts that you need to know when installing the DRYPRO 832 unit are shown below.
2.1.1 Unit Exterior
No. Name No. Name

1 Front Cover 2 Lower Front Cover
3 Right Cover 4 Supply Tray
5 Tray Shutter 6 Lower Right Cover
7 Film Ejection Tray 8 Upper Right Cover
9 LAN Cover 10 Rear Cover
11 Left Cover 12 Operation Panel
13 Operation Switch 14 Main Power Supply
15 Cutter Pocket/Cutter 16 Operation Sheet Box
17 Exhaust Ducts
2-2
2.1.2 Unit Interior
No. Name No. Name

1 Lever A 2 Lever B
3 Deodorant Filter Case 4 Stabilizer
(Internal: deodorant filter)
5 External Guide Unit Assembly
2.1.3 Supply Tray
No. Name No. Name

1 Film Regulation Pin 2 Cutter Guide
3 Intermediate Plate
2-3
2.1.4 Lispl-832 (optional)
1 2
No. Name No. Name

1 Right Cover 2 Rear Cover
2.2 Structure
The structure of DRYPRO 832 is shown below.
Film is fed in the order from No. 1 to No. 5 during the printing process.
However, if the Lispl-832 option is installed and film is loaded into the Lispl-832, film is fed in order from No.7 to
No.2.
No. Name Function

1 Supply Unit Picks up film in the supply tray one by one and transports to the justification
unit.
2 Justification Unit Regulates the horizontal position of the film transported from the supply unit
and transports it to the exposure unit.
3 Exposure Unit Scans laser beam in synchronization with the film transportation and writes
images on the film.
4 Heat Process Unit Processes the exposed film by heating.
5 Cooling Transport Unit Cools and discharges the heat processed film.
6 Deodorant Filter Removes odors emitted during the heat process. Periodic change is needed.
7 Lispl-832 (optional) Picks up film in Lispl-832 one by one and transports to the justification unit.
2-4
2.3 Tools, Measuring Instruments, and Jigs Necessary for

Servicing
In addition to the standard tools, the following tools, measuring instruments, and jigs are necessary for servicing
DRYPRO 832.
Name Remarks
Allen wrench
Stubby screwdriver
Cutter
Tape such as packaging tape
Laser goggles Those that block the laser wavelength of 784 nm.
Optical power meter The meter that can measure the laser wavelength of 784 nm.
IR card
Densitometer
Ethanol (ethyl alcohol)
Lens cleaner
Melamine foam Used to clean the heat process unit and cool transport unit.
Waste cloth (paper towel)
Vacuum cleaner
Cotton work gloves
Marking-off pin
2-5
Chapter 3
Chapter 3 Basic Operations
This chapter describes basic operations when repairing DRYPRO
832, including the procedures for installing or removing a supply tray
and exterior cover, opening or closing covers, and wearing a
grounding strap.
3.1 Removing/Installing Supply Tray........................3-2

3.2 Opening/Closing Cover......................................3-4
3.2.1 Opening/Closing Front Cover....................... 3-4
3.2.2 Opening/Closing Right Cover....................... 3-5
3.3 Removing/Installing Exterior Cover....................3-6
3.3.1 Removing/Installing Lower Right Cover ....... 3-6
3.3.2 Removing/Installing Film Ejection Tray ...... 3-10
3.3.3 Removing/Installing Upper Right Cover ..... 3-12
3.3.4 Removing/Installing Rear Cover ................ 3-18
3.3.5 Removing/Installing Rear Cover
(Lispl-832) .................................................. 3-20
3.3.6 Removing/Installing Left Cover .................. 3-22
3.4 Installing a Grounding Strap.............................3-24
3.5 Manually Unlocking the Tray............................3-24
3.1 Removing/Installing Supply Tray

This section describes how to remove/install a supply tray.
Use the procedure for removing a supply tray provided here with power turned OFF when
installing or repairing DRYPRO 832. For information about how to remove a supply tray with
Caution DRYPRO 832 turned ON, see the operation manual.
• Use the same procedure when removing Lispl-832 tray.

• When removing Lispl-832 tray, pull out the tray shutter on the lower part of Lispl-832.
Note
Removal Procedure
1 Pull the tray shutter out of the lower part of the
supply tray.
2 Insert the tray shutter into the slot in the upper

part of the supply tray with the tray shutter's UP
mark on the top surface toward you.
Inserting the tray shutter as far as it will go unlocks and
causes the supply tray to pop out several centimeters.
• When replacing loading parts, be sure to

replace with the tray shutter attached.
Caution If some of the film remains on the tray, the
film may be exposed.
• Take sufficient care when handling the
tray shutter, as it may be impossible to
insert if it becomes deformed due to
rough handling.
• If you feel any resistance when inserting
the tray shutter, stop the procedure and
refer to “17.1.7 Pickup malfunction
trouble (Page 17-6)” to fix the problem.
3 Slowly pull out the supply tray fully.
4 Remove the tray from the rails.

Since the tray unit is held in by pins on both sides of the
rails, apply light pressure to remove.
5 Put the rails in the frame.
If you leave the rails protruded, workers or other

people near by may come into contact with the
Caution rails, resulting in personal injury or damage to the
equipment. Make sure to put the rails with the
tray unit removed in the frame.
This is the end of the process of removing the supply tray.
3-2
Installation Procedure
1 Pull out the rails.
2 Install the tray on the rails.

Place the supply tray so that the pinhole in the rails aligns
with the pin position on the back of the supply tray. Push in
the supply tray until it clicks into place.
• Be careful not to push the supply tray

excessively, as it can distort the rails.
Caution
• If the tray unit is not positioned properly, it
may interfere with the main unit and it
may become impossible to insert into the
unit.
3 Put the supply tray back into the main unit.
4 Remove the tray shutter and return it to the

previous position.
Take sufficient care when handling the tray

shutter, as it may be impossible to insert if it
Caution becomes deformed due to rough handling.
This is the end of the process of installing the supply tray.
3-3
3.2 Opening/Closing Cover

This section describes how to open or close the front cover and right cover.
3.2.1 Opening/Closing Front Cover

This section describes how to open or close the front cover.
How to open the front cover

1 Open the front cover.
The front cover will open by pulling its upper part on both
sides.
Do not push down or place objects on the

opened front cover. Failure to observe this
Caution caution can cause the breakdown.
This is the end of the process of opening the front cover.
How to close the front cover

1 Close the front cover.
When closing the front cover, check that the two magnets at
the top edge of the front cover are in the correct position on
the main unit.
This is the end of the process of closing the front cover.
3-4
3.2.2 Opening/Closing Right Cover

This section describes how to open or close the right cover.
How to open the right cover

sides.

2 Open the right cover by rotating the lever B in the

direction of an arrow.
This is the end of the process of opening the right cover.
How to close the cover

1 Close the right and front covers.
This is the end of the process of closing the cover.
3-5
3.3 Removing/Installing Exterior Cover

3.3.1 Removing/Installing Lower Right Cover
This section describes how to remove/install the lower right cover.
Be sure to turn off power and remove the power cable from the electrical outlet before removing
or installing the exterior cover or replacing loading parts.
Caution
Removal Procedure
supply tray.

causes it to pop out several centimeters.

rough handling.
3 Remove the right cover screws.

・ Two screws (M4×8)

sides.

3-6

6 Remove the right cover from the external guide

unit assembly.
Slide the right cover upward, so that the tabs (four places)
inside the right cover are detached from the external guide
assembly, and then remove the cover.
7 Close the front cover and external guide unit

assembly.
8 Remove the lower right cover.

• Four screws (M4×8)
Slide the lower right cover downward so that the tabs (two
locations) on the lower right cover are detached from the
main unit, and then remove the cover.
This is the end of the process of removing the lower right cover.
3-7
Cover Installation Procedure

1 Install the lower right cover.
Slide the lower right cover upward so that the tabs (two
locations) on the lower right cover hook onto the main unit
to install the cover.

sides.


4 Install the right cover.

Hook the tabs (four locations) on the inside of the right cover
onto the external guide assembly, and slide the right cover
downward to install.
3-8
6 Fit the right cover with screws.

• Two screws (M4×8)
8 Remove the tray shutter and return it to its

original position.

This is the end of the process of installing the lower right cover.
3-9
3.3.2 Removing/Installing Film Ejection Tray

This section describes how to remove/install the film ejection tray.
Caution
Removal Procedure
1 Remove the LAN cover.
2 Remove the LAN cable from the connector cover

slots.
3 Disconnect the LAN cable.
4 Remove the film ejection tray.

This is the end of the process of removing the film ejection tray.
3-10
1 Install the film ejection tray.
2 Connect the LAN cable to the ethernet port.
3 Insert the LAN cable into the connector cover

slots.
4 Install the LAN cover.

First insert the tabs (two places) on the top side of the LAN
cover and then insert the tabs on the bottom side (two
places).
This is the end of the process of installing the film ejection tray.
3-11
3.3.3 Removing/Installing Upper Right Cover

This section describes how to remove/install the upper right cover.
Caution
Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.
3 Remove the right cover screws.


sides.

3-12


unit assembly.
7 Close the front cover and external guide unit

assembly.
8 Remove the lower right cover.

Slide the lower right cover downward so that the tabs (two
locations) on the lower right cover are detached from the
main unit, and then remove the cover.
9 Remove the LAN cover.
3-13
10 Remove the LAN cable from the connector cover

slots.
11 Disconnect the LAN cable.
12 Remove the film ejection tray.

13 Remove the connector cover.
14 Remove the upper right cover.

Slide the upper right cover upward so that the tab (one
location) on the upper right cover is detached from the main
unit, and then remove the cover.
This is the end of the process of removing the upper right cover.
3-14
1 Install the upper right cover.
Slide the upper right cover downward so that the tab (one
location) on the upper right cover hooks onto the main unit
2 Install the connector cover.
3 Install the film ejection tray.

4 Connect the LAN cable to the ethernet port.
3-15
5 Insert the LAN cable into the connector cover

slots.
6 Install the LAN cover.

First insert the tabs (two places) on the top side of the LAN
cover and then insert the tabs on the bottom side (two
places).
7 Install the lower right cover.

Slide the lower right cover upward so that the tabs (two
locations) on the lower right cover hook onto the main unit

sides.


3-16

Hook the tabs (four locations) on the inside of the right cover
11 Close the front and right covers.
12 Fit the right cover with screws.


original position.

This is the end of the process of installing the upper right cover.
3-17
3.3.4 Removing/Installing Rear Cover

This section describes how to remove/install the rear cover.
Caution
Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.
3 Remove the rear cover.

• Six screws (M4×8)
Remove the upper two screws and the one screw

in the center from the rear cover and loosen the
Note bottom three.
This is the end of the process of removing the rear cover.
3-18
1 Install the rear cover.

original position.

This is the end of the process of installing the rear cover.
3-19
3.3.5 Removing/Installing Rear Cover (Lispl-832)

This section describes how to remove/install Lispl-832 tray rear cover.
Caution
Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.

This is the end of the process of removing the rear cover.
3-20

original position.

3-21
3.3.6 Removing/Installing Left Cover

This section describes how to remove/install the left cover.
Caution
Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.
3 Remove the left cover.

Slide the left cover upward so that the tabs (two locations)
on the inside of the left cover detach from the main unit, and
remove the cover.
Remove two screws on the upper part of the left

cover and loosen two screws on the lower part.
Note
This is the end of the process of removing the left cover.
3-22
1 Install the left cover.
Slide the left cover downward so that the tabs (two
locations) inside the left cover hook onto the main unit to
install the cover.

original position.

3-23
3.4 Installing a Grounding Strap

To avoid damage to the system board caused by electrostatic discharge, wear a wrist
grounding strap when accessing the system board for work.
Caution
1 Ground yourself by using a wrist grounding strap

and put the other clip in a metal part of the main
unit that makes a good ground.
3.5 Manually Unlocking the Tray

• Manually unlocking the tray is a method of releasing the tray lock when you can not insert
the tray shutter and/or can not pull out the supply tray due to some type of resistance within
Caution the supply unit.
• Because the film inside the supply tray will be exposed when the tray is pulled out by
manually operating the tray lock lever, that film will no longer be usable.
1 Refer to step 3 of “3.3.4 Removing/Installing Rear

Cover (Page 3-18)” and remove the rear cover.
With the Lispl-832, refer to step 3 of “3.3.5

Removing/Installing Rear Cover (Lispl-832)
Note (Page 3-20)” and remove the rear cover.
2 Pull the tray lock lever towards you.

The tray lock will be released.
3-24
Chapter 4
Chapter 4 Replacing Supply Unit
Loading Parts
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the supply unit
when they fail and how to adjust after replacing the loading parts.
4.1 Light Shield Unit.................................................4-2

4.1.1 Placing Loading Parts .................................. 4-2
4.1.2 Removing/Installing Light Shield Assembly ... 4-3
4.1.3 Replacing Barrier Bag Detection Sensor ..... 4-6
4.1.4 Replacing Film Height Detection Sensor ..... 4-8
4.2 Pickup Unit.......................................................4-10
4.2.1 Placing Loading Parts ................................ 4-10
4.2.2 Removing/Installing Pickup Unit Assembly ... 4-11
4.2.3 Replacing Pickup Transport Motor ............. 4-15
4.2.4 Replacing Pickup HP Motor ....................... 4-18
4.2.5 Replacing Pickup HP Sensor ..................... 4-20
Chapter 4 Replacing Supply Unit Loading Parts
4.1 Light Shield Unit
4.1.1 Placing Loading Parts

The light shield unit in the supply unit includes the following loading parts.
No. Name Functions and Reference Sections

1 Barrier bag detection This photo sensor detects the presence or absence of the barrier bag.
sensor For more information, see “4.1.3 Replacing Barrier Bag Detection Sensor
(Page 4-6)”.
2 Film height detection This photo sensor detects the height of film loaded in the supply tray.
sensor For more information, see “4.1.4 Replacing Film Height Detection Sensor
(Page 4-8)”.
4-2
4.1.2 Removing/Installing Light Shield Assembly

This section describes the procedure for removing or installing the light shield unit assembly when replacing loading
parts in the light shield unit.
or installing the exterior cover or replacing load parts.
Caution
Work outline
The number of personnel and the estimated work hours required to replace load parts is as follows:
Number of Work Hours

Personnel
1 3 minutes each
Requirements
The procedure for replacing loading parts requires the following tools:
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Various types of screwdrivers 2 Tray (container for screws and parts removed)
Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.
Do not place objects on, lean on, or apply

loads on the pulled out supply tray.
Caution
4-3
4 Remove the lower front cover.

5 Remove the connector (JJ48).

For Lispl-832, remove the Lispl-832 side connector (JJ48).
When removing the connector, do not pull by

the wires, but hold the tab on the connector
Caution with your fingers.
Pulling by the wires too tightly can cause a
break.
6 Remove the light shield unit assembly.

When removing the light shield unit

assembly, be careful not to cause the sensor
Caution to come into contact with the parts inside the
main unit.
This is the end of the process of removing light shield unit assembly.
• When replacing the barrier bag sensor, go to “4.1.3 Replacing Barrier Bag Detection Sensor (Page 4-6)”.
• When replacing the film height detection sensor, go to “4.1.4 Replacing Film Height Detection Sensor (Page
4-8)”.
1 Install the light shield unit assembly.
When installing the light shield unit

main unit.
4-4
2 Connect the connector (JJ48).

Be sure to push the connector all the way in

when connecting it.
Caution
If the connector is not connected properly,
an error will occur and, in some cases,
smoke and/or an odor may be generated.
3 Install the lower front cover.


previous position.

This is the end of the process of installing the light shield unit assembly.
4-5
4.1.3 Replacing Barrier Bag Detection Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects the presence or absence of the barrier bag.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Photo sensor (for replacement)
1 Remove the supply tray, lower front cover,

connector (JJ48), and light shield unit assembly
with reference to “ Removal Procedure (Page
4-3)” in “4.1.2 Removing/Installing Light Shield
Assembly”.
When replacing loading parts, be sure to

Caution If some of film remains in the tray, the film
may be exposed.
2 Remove the connector (JP30).

break.
3 Push the tab on the back of the sensor inward

and remove the photo sensor.
4 Insert a new photo sensor in the mounting hole.
4-6
5 Connect the connector (JP30) removed in step 2.
Be sure to push the connector all the way in when connecting it.
Caution If the connector is not connected properly, an error will occur and, in some cases, smoke and/or
an odor may be generated.
6 Install the light shield unit assembly, connector (JJ48), and lower front cover with reference to
“ Installation Procedure (Page 4-4)” in “4.1.2 Removing/Installing Light Shield Assembly”.
7 Return the supply tray and tray shutter to their original positions.
Take sufficient care when handling the tray shutter, as it may be impossible to insert if it
becomes deformed due to rough handling.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the barrier bag detection sensor.
4-7
4.1.4 Replacing Film Height Detection Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects the height of film loaded in the supply tray.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools


connector (JJ48), and light shield unit assembly
4-3)” in “4.1.2 Removing/Installing Light Shield
Assembly”.

Caution
If some of film remains in the tray, the film
may be exposed.

break.

4-8
6 Install the light shield unit assembly, connector (JJ48), and lower front cover with reference to
“ Installation Procedure (Page 4-4)” in “4.1.2 Removing/Installing Light Shield Assembly”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the film height detection sensor.
4-9
4.2 Pickup Unit

The pickup unit in the supply unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Pickup transport This motor drives the pickup roller.
motor For more information, see “4.2.3 Replacing Pickup Transport Motor (Page
4-15)”.
2 Pickup HP This drive motor saves the pickup roller.
motor For more information, see “4.2.4 Replacing Pickup HP Motor (Page 4-18)”.
3 Pickup HP This photo sensor detects the position where the pickup roller is saved.
sensor For more information, see “4.2.5 Replacing Pickup HP Sensor (Page 4-20)”.
4-10
4.2.2 Removing/Installing Pickup Unit Assembly

This section describes the procedure for removing or installing the pickup unit assembly when replacing the loading
parts in the pickup unit assembly.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 3 minutes each
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.

Caution
4-11



break.
6 Remove the light shield unit.


main unit.
7 Remove the pickup unit assembly.
When removing the pickup unit assembly,

be careful not to cause the sensor to come
Caution into contact with the parts inside the main
unit.
This is the end of the process of removing the pickup unit assembly.
• When replacing the pickup transport motor, go to “4.2.3 Replacing Pickup Transport Motor (Page 4-15)”.
• When replacing the pickup HP motor, go to “4.2.4 Replacing Pickup HP Motor (Page 4-18)”.
• When replacing the pickup HP sensor, go to “4.2.5 Replacing Pickup HP Sensor (Page 4-20)”.
4-12
1 Install the pickup unit assembly.
Insert the pickup unit assembly all the way in

along the guides while being careful not to
Caution cause any damage by coming into contact
with the parts inside the main unit.
If the pickup unit assembly is not installed
properly, it may be impossible to install the
light shield unit assembly.
2 Install the light shield unit assembly.

When installing the light shield unit

main unit.


when connecting it.
Caution

4-13

previous position.

This is the end of the process of installing the pickup unit assembly.
4-14
4.2.3 Replacing Pickup Transport Motor

Replace the motor that drives the pickup roller.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Replacing Pickup Transport Motor (for replacement) 4 Precision flat blade screwdriver

connector (JJ48), light shield unit assembly and
pickup unit assembly with reference to “
Removal Procedure (Page 4-11)” in “4.2.2
Removing/Installing Pickup Unit Assembly”.

Caution
may be exposed.
2 Remove the E ring with a precision screwdriver.
When removing the E ring, be sure not to

exert too much force. Doing so may cause
Caution you to stab your finger with the precision
screwdriver, or may cause the E ring to
spring out and become lost.
3 Remove the gear.
4 Disconnect the wire from the wire saddles.

• Wire saddles in three locations
4-15
5 Remove the bracket.


break.
7 Remove the pickup transport motor.

8 Install a new pickup transport motor.


when connecting it.
Caution

・ One screw (M3×6)
4-16
11 Install the bracket removed in step 5.

When a gear or collar comes off in removing the bracket, install by referring to the figure below.
When attaching a gear or collar, attention should be paid to the gear or collar orientation.
Caution After installing the gear back, move the neighboring gears with your hand to make sure that it
moves in response to the other gears.

・ One screw (M3×6)
13 Secure the wire removed in step 4 with the wire saddle.

• Wire saddles in three locations
14 Install the gear removed in step 3.
15 Install the E ring removed in step 2.
16 Install the pickup unit assembly, light shield unit assembly, connector (JJ48), and lower front
cover with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 4-13)” in “4.2.2 Removing/Installing
Pickup Unit Assembly”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the pickup transport motor.
4-17
4.2.4 Replacing Pickup HP Motor

Replace the drive motor that saves the pickup roller.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Pickup HP motor (for replacement)


Caution
may be exposed.


• Wire saddle in one location
4 Remove the relay connector (JP54).

break.
4-18
5 Remove the gear.
6 Remove the pickup HP motor.

7 Install a new pickup HP motor.


Push in the gear so that the notch on the gear aligns with the
notch on the shaft.

You can install it in the correct position by inserting the
notch on the bracket into the slot in the installation position.
10 Connect the relay connector (JP54) removed in step 4.

12 Install the pickup unit assembly, light shield unit assembly, connector (JJ48), and lower front cover
with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 4-13)” in “4.2.2 Removing/Installing Pickup
Unit Assembly”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the pickup HP motor.
4-19
4.2.5 Replacing Pickup HP Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects when the pickup roller is in its Home position.
Caution
Work outline

personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools



Caution
may be exposed.

break.

• One screw (M3×6)
4-20


Fix so that the positioning hole in the bracket aligns with the emboss on the mating part.
8 Install the pickup unit assembly, light shield unit assembly, connector (JJ48), and lower front
cover with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 4-13)” in “4.2.2 Removing/Installing
Pickup Unit Assembly”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the pickup HP sensor.
4-21
Chapter 5
Chapter 5 Replacing Tray Unit
Loading Parts
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the tray unit
5.1 Placing Loading Parts ........................................5-2

5.2 Replacing Supply Elevating Motor .....................5-3
5.3 Replacing Elevating Plate HP Sensor................5-6
5.4 Replacing Tray Lock Solenoid .........................5-10
5.5 Replacing Tray Detection Sensor ....................5-15
5.6 Replacing Outlet Light Shield Unit Assembly...5-20
Chapter 5 Replacing Tray Unit Loading Parts
5.1 Placing Loading Parts

The tray unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Supply elevating motor This motor drives the elevating plate that moves up when transporting film.
For more information, see “5.2 Replacing Supply Elevating Motor (Page 5-
3)”.
2 Elevating plate HP This photo sensor detects the position (Home Position) when the elevating
sensor plate is lowered.
For more information, see “5.3 Replacing Elevating Plate HP Sensor (Page
5-6)”.
3 Tray lock solenoid This solenoid valve locks or unlocks the supply tray in DRYPRO 832.
For more information, see “5.4 Replacing Tray Lock Solenoid (Page 5-10)”.
4 Tray detection sensor This photo sensor detects presence or absence of the supply tray.
For more information, see “5.5 Replacing Tray Detection Sensor (Page 5-
15)”.
5 Outlet light shield unit This guide unit assembly is for shading the film inside the supply tray when
assembly the right cover is opened.
For more information, see “5.6 Replacing Outlet Light Shield Unit
Assembly (Page 5-20)”.
5-2
5.2 Replacing Supply Elevating Motor

Replace the motor that drives the elevating plate that moves up when transporting film.
Caution
Work outline
The number of personnel and the estimated work hours required to replace loading parts is as follows:

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Various types of screwdrivers 2 Tray (container for screws and parts
removed)
3 Supply elevating motor (for replacement)

supply tray.


rough handling.
• To replace the tray unit supply elevating motor, proceed to step 3.

Note • To replace the Lispl-832 supply elevating motor, proceed to step 4.
5-3


Note bottom three.
Proceed to step 5.
4 Remove the rear cover of Lispl-832.

・ Six screws (M4×8)
5 Remove the connector.

• To replace the tray unit supply elevating motor, remove the
connector (JP56).
• To replace the Lispl-832 supply elevating motor, remove
the connector (JP64).

break.
6 Remove the supply elevating motor holding

bracket together with the motor.
The bracket is hooked on the notch in the main unit, but can
be unhooked by sliding slightly to the right and pulling back.
7 Remove the supply elevating motor.

8 Install a new supply elevating motor.

Align the emboss on the back of the motor with the emboss
on the bracket to determine the installation position.
5-4

Hook the notch of the bracket onto the notch of the main unit
to attach.
10 Connect the connector removed in step 5.

• If the tray unit supply elevating motor has been replaced, connect the connector (JP56).
• If the Lispl-832 supply elevating motor has been replaced, connect the connector (JP64).
If the connector is not connected properly, an error will occur and, in some cases, smoke and/or
Caution
11 Install the rear cover or the back cover.

• When replacing the tray unit supply elevating motor, refer to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-19)” in
“3.3.4 Removing/Installing Rear Cover” and then attach the rear cover.
• When replacing the Lispl-832 supply elevating motor, refer to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-21)” in
“3.3.5 Removing/Installing Rear Cover (Lispl-832)” and then attach the back cover.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the supply elevating motor.
5-5
5.3 Replacing Elevating Plate HP Sensor

Replace the photo sensor detects the position (Home Position) where the elevating plate is lowered.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)

supply tray.


rough handling.
• To replace the tray unit supply elevating motor, proceed to step 3.

Note • To replace the Lispl-832 supply elevating motor, proceed to step 4.
5-6


Note bottom three.
Proceed to step 5.


• To replace the tray unit elevating plate HP sensor, remove
• To replace the Lispl-832 elevating plate HP sensor, remove

break.


break.
5-7



Insert the bracket into the notch of the main unit, and then
remove after shifting slightly to the left.

to attach.
5-8

• If the tray unit elevating plate HP sensor has been replaced, connect the connector (JP56).
• If the Lispl-832 elevating plate HP sensor has been replaced, connect the connector (JP64).

• If the tray unit elevating plate HP sensor has been replaced, refer to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-19)”
in “3.3.4 Removing/Installing Rear Cover” and then attach the rear cover.
• If the Lispl-832 elevating plate HP sensor has been replaced, refer to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-21)”
in “3.3.5 Removing/Installing Rear Cover (Lispl-832)” and then attach the back cover.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the elevating plate HP sensor.
5-9
5.4 Replacing Tray Lock Solenoid

Replace the solenoid valve that locks or unlocks the supply tray.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)
3 Replacing Tray Lock Solenoid (for replacement)

supply tray.


rough handling.
• To replace the tray unit tray lock solenoid, proceed to step 3.

Note • To replace the Lispl-832 tray lock solenoid, proceed to step 4.
5-10


Note bottom three.
Proceed to step 5.


• To replace the tray unit tray lock solenoid, remove the
connector (JP56).
• To replace the Lispl-832 tray lock solenoid, remove the
connector (JP64).

break.

• To replace the tray unit tray lock solenoid, proceed to step 7.

Note • To replace the Lispl-832 tray lock solenoid, proceed to step 9.
5-11

If the Lispl-832 is connected, remove the

connector cover after removing the connector
Note (JP16, JP 26).
8 Remove the cover.

Proceed to step 10.
9 Remove the Lispl-832 connector cover.

・ Four screws (M3×6)
Remove the connectors (JP16, JP26) before

removing the connector cover.
Note
10 Remove the connectors.

• To replace the tray unit tray lock solenoid, remove the
connector (JP55, JP44).
• To replace the Lispl-832 tray lock solenoid, remove the

break.
5-12
11 Remove the tray lock solenoid unit assembly.

• Three screws (M3×6)
12 Remove the E ring with a precision screwdriver,

and extract the parallel pin.

13 Remove the tray lock solenoid.

14 Install a new tray lock solenoid.

15 Insert the parallel pin that you removed in step

12, and install the E ring.
16 Connect the tray lock solenoid unit assembly

removed in step 11.
After inserting the bracket notch into the notch groove of the
main unit ( in figure on left), align the position of the other
notches and attach.
17 Connect the connectors removed in step 10.

• If the tray unit tray lock solenoid has been replaced, connect the connector (JP55, JP44).
• If the Lispl-832 tray lock solenoid has been replaced, connect the connector (JP63, JP44).
5-13
18 Install the connector cover removed in step 7 or step 9.

If connecting the Lispl-832, connect connectors (JP16, JP 26).
Note
• If the tray unit tray lock solenoid has been replaced, proceed to step 19.
• If the Lispl-832 tray lock solenoid has been replaced, proceed to step 20.
Note
19 Install the cover removed in step 8.


to attach.

• If the tray unit tray lock solenoid has been replaced, connect the connector (JP56).
• If the Lispl-832 tray lock solenoid has been replaced, connect the connector (JP64).

• If the tray unit tray lock solenoid has been replaced, refer to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-19)” in “3.3.4
Removing/Installing Rear Cover” and attach the rear cover.
• If the Lispl-832 tray lock solenoid has been replaced, refer to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-21)” in
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the tray lock solenoid.
5-14
5.5 Replacing Tray Detection Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects the presence or absence of the supply tray.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools


supply tray.


rough handling.
• To replace the tray unit tray detection sensor, proceed to step 3.

Note • To replace the Lispl-832 tray detection sensor,, proceed to step 4.
5-15


Note bottom three.
Proceed to step 5.


• To replace the tray unit tray detection sensor, remove the
connector (JP56).
• To replace the Lispl-832 tray detection sensor, remove the
connector (JP64).

break.

The bracket is hooked on the notch in the main
unit, but can be unhooked by sliding slightly to the
right and pulling back.
• To replace the tray unit tray detection sensor, proceed to step 7.

Note • To replace the Lispl-832 tray detection sensor, proceed to step 9.
5-16

If the Lispl-832 is connected, remove the

connector cover after removing the connector
Note (JP16, JP 26).
8 Remove the cover.

Proceed to step 10.
9 Remove the Lispl-832 connector cover.

Remove the connectors (JP16, JP26) before

removing the connector cover.
Note
10 Remove the connectors.

• To replace the tray unit tray detection sensor, remove the
• To replace the Lispl-832 tray detection sensor, remove the

break.
5-17
11 Remove the tray lock solenoid unit assembly.


14 Install the tray lock solenoid unit assembly

removed in step 11.
After inserting the bracket notch into the notch groove of the
main unit ( in figure on left), align the position of the other
notches and attach.
15 Connect the connectors removed in step 10.

• If the tray unit tray detection sensor has been replaced, connect the connector (JP55, JP44).
• If the Lispl-832 tray detection sensor has been replaced, connect the connector (JP63, JP44).
16 Install the connector cover removed in step 7 or step 9.

If connecting the Lispl-832, connect connectors (JP16, JP 26).
Note
• If the tray unit tray detection sensor has been replaced, proceed to step 17.
Note • If the Lispl-832 tray detection sensor has been replaced, proceed to step 18.
5-18


to attach.

• If the tray unit tray detection sensor has been replaced, connect the connectors (JP56).
• If the Lispl-832 tray detection sensor has been replaced, connect the connector (JP64).

• If the tray unit tray detection sensor has been replaced, refer to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-19)” in
“3.3.4 Removing/Installing Rear Cover” and attach the rear cover.
• If the Lispl-832 tray detection sensor has been replaced, refer to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-21)” in
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the tray detection sensor.
5-19
5.6 Replacing Outlet Light Shield Unit Assembly

Replace the outlet light shield unit assembly that is used for shading the film inside the supply tray when the right
cover is opened.
• Be sure to turn OFF power and remove the power cable from the electrical outlet before
removing or installing the exterior cover or replacing loading parts.
Caution
• If the Lispl-832 is installed, start the procedure from step 7 after referring to “
Removal
Procedure (Page 6-9)” in “6.4.1 Removing/Installing Elevating Transport Unit” and removing
the elevating transport unit.
Work outline
The number of personnel and the estimated work hours required to replace loading parts is as follows.

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Outlet light shield unit assembly (for replacement)

supply tray.

part of the supply tray with the tray shutter’s UP

rough handling.
3 Remove the screws from the right cover.

・ Two screws (M4×8）
5-20

The front cover will open by pulling the upper part of both
sides.

Caution caution can cause the front cover to break.


unit assembly.
7 Open the external guide unit assembly after removing

the stop bands at two places.
• If the Lispl-832 is not installed, continue to step 8.

• If the Lispl-832 is installed, continue directly to step 10.
Note
5-21
8 Remove the outlet light shield unit assembly.

・ Four screws
9 Install the new outlet light shield unit assembly.

・ Four screws
Continue to step 13.
10 Remove the outlet light shield unit assembly.

・ Four screws
11 Install the new outlet light shield unit assembly.

・ Four screws
12 Install the elevating transport unit with reference

to “ Installation Procedure (Page 6-11)” in
“6.4.1 Removing/Installing Elevating Transport
Unit”.
13 Install the guide unit assembly by hooking the stop bands from step 7 in two locations on the
external guide unit assembly.
Hook the tabs (four locations) on the side of the right cover
16 Fit the right cover with removed screws in step 3.

・ Two screws （M4×8）

previous position.

This is the end of the process of installing the outlet light shield
unit assembly.
5-22
Chapter 6
Chapter 6 Replacing Lispl-832
(Optional) Loading Parts
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in Lispl-832
(optional) when they fail and how to adjust after replacing the loading
parts.
6.1 Light Shield Unit.................................................6-2

6.2 Pickup Unit.........................................................6-3
6.3 Supply Unit.........................................................6-4
6.3.2 Replacing Elevating Transport Motor ........... 6-5
6.4 Elevating Transport Unit ....................................6-8
6.4.1 Removing/Installing Elevating
Transport Unit............................................... 6-9
Opening/Closing Motor .............................. 6-13
Opening/Closing HP Sensor ...................... 6-15
6.4.4 Replacing Supply Outlet Sensor ................ 6-18
Chapter 6 Replacing Lispl-832 (Optional) Loading Parts
6.1 Light Shield Unit

The Lispl-832 light shield unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Barrier bag detection This photo sensor detects the presence or absence of the barrier bag.
sensor Use the same replacement procedure as that for replacing the supply unit.
For more information, see “4.1.3 Replacing Barrier Bag Detection Sensor
(Page 4-6)”.
2 Film height detection This photo sensor detects the height of film loaded in the supply tray.
For more information, see “4.1.4 Replacing Film Height Detection Sensor
(Page 4-8)”.
6-2
6.2 Pickup Unit

The Lispl-832 pickup unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Pickup transport This motor drives the pickup roller.
motor Use the same replacement procedure as that for replacing the supply unit.
For more information, see “4.2.3 Replacing Pickup Transport Motor (Page
4-15)”.
2 Pickup and Save This drive motor saves the pickup roller.
motor Use the same replacement procedure as that for replacing the supply unit.
For more information, see “4.2.4 Replacing Pickup HP Motor (Page 4-18)”.
3 Pickup and Save This photo sensor detects the position where the pickup roller is saved.
For more information, see “4.2.5 Replacing Pickup HP Sensor (Page 4-20)”.
6-3
6.3 Supply Unit

The Lispl-832 supply unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Supply elevating motor This motor drives the elevating plate that moves up when transporting film.
Use the same replacement procedure as that for replacing the tray unit.
For more information, see “5.2 Replacing Supply Elevating Motor (Page 5-
3)”.
2 Elevating plate HP This photo sensor detects the position (Home Position) when the elevating
sensor plate is lowered.
For more information, see “5.3 Replacing Elevating Plate HP Sensor (Page
5-6)”.
3 Tray lock solenoid This solenoid valve locks or unlocks the supply tray in DRYPRO 832.
For more information, see “5.4 Replacing Tray Lock Solenoid (Page 5-10)”.
4 Tray detection sensor This photo sensor detects presence or absence of the supply tray.
For more information, see “5.5 Replacing Tray Detection Sensor (Page 5-
15)”.
5 Elevating transport motor This motor transports film from the Lispl-832.
For more information, see “6.3.2 Replacing Elevating Transport Motor
(Page 6-5)”.
6-4
6.3.2 Replacing Elevating Transport Motor

Replace the motor that transports film from the Lispl-832 tray.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)
3 Elevating transport motor (for replacement) 4 Precision flat blade screwdriver

supply tray.


rough handling.

6-5

break.

・ One screw (M3×6）

break.

• Four screws (M3×6）

9 Remove the gear.

• Two gears
6-6
10 Remove the elevating transport motor.

11 Install a new elevating transport motor.

12 Install the gears removed in step 9.

• Two gears
When attaching gears, attention should be paid to the gear orientation. After assembly, move
the peripheral gears by hand and confirm that the assembled gear moves in conjunction.
Caution

to attach.
18 Install the rear cover with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-21)” in “3.3.5
Removing/Installing Rear Cover (Lispl-832)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the elevating transport motor.
6-7
6.4 Elevating Transport Unit

The elevating transport unit in the Lispl-832 (optional) includes the following loading parts:

1 Elevating transport nip This motor opens or closes the elevating transport nip.
opening/closing motor For more information, see “6.4.2 Replacing Elevating Transport Nip
Opening/Closing Motor (Page 6-13)”.
2 Elevating transport nip This photo sensor detects opening/closing Home Position of the elevating
opening/closing HP transport nip.
sensor For more information, see “6.4.3 Replacing Elevating Transport Nip
Opening/Closing HP Sensor (Page 6-15)”.
3 Supply outlet sensor This photo sensor detects film transfer at the outlet of the Lispl-832.
For more information, see “6.4.4 Replacing Supply Outlet Sensor (Page 6-
18)”.
6-8
6.4.1 Removing/Installing Elevating Transport Unit

This section describes the procedure for removing or installing the elevating transport unit when replacing loading
parts in the Lispl-832 (optional).
Caution
Work outline
Number of Personnel Work Hours

1 5 minutes each
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Precision flat blade screwdriver
Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.
3 Remove the access hole cover.
6-9
4 Remove the right cover and lower right with

reference to “3.3.1 Removing/Installing Lower
Right Cover (Page 3-6)”.
5 Remove the screws from the right cover.

6 Insert the long screwdriver through the access

hole and unlock the right cover.
7 Open the right cover and remove the connector

(JJ81).
When removing the connector, hold the tab

on the connector with your fingers and
Caution disconnect it.
break.
8 Remove the elevating transport unit.

Remove the elevating transport unit shaft on the side and
the shaft on the side shown in the figure to the left, from
the notch of the main unit frame.
• Either the shaft on the side or the side

may be removed first.
Note
• If the shaft is difficult to remove from the
notch in the frame, stand the elevating
transport unit as vertical as possible and the
shaft will be easier to remove.
6-10
This is the end of the process of removing the elevating transport unit.
• When replacing the elevating transport nip opening/closing motor, go to “6.4.2 Replacing Elevating Transport
Nip Opening/Closing Motor (Page 6-13)”.
• When replacing the elevating transport nip opening/closing sensor HP, go to “6.4.3 Replacing Elevating
Transport Nip Opening/Closing HP Sensor (Page 6-15)”.
• When replacing the supply outlet sensor, go to “6.4.4 Replacing Supply Outlet Sensor (Page 6-18)”.
1 Install the elevating transport unit.
Insert the elevating transport unit shaft on the side and the
shaft on the side shown in the figure to the left, into the
notch of the main unit frame.
• Either the shaft on the side or the side

may be inserted first.
Note • If the shaft is difficult to insert into the notch
in the frame, stand the elevating transport unit
as vertical as possible and the shaft will be
easier to insert.

when connecting it.
Caution
3 Close the elevating transport unit and tighten the

screws.
Confirm that the elevating transport section

locks when it is closed. If it is not properly
Caution locked, the elevating transport section will
be slightly raised, and it cannot be properly
fixed in place.
4 Install the access hole cover.
6-11
5 Install the lower right cover and right cover with

reference to “3.3.1 Removing/Installing Lower

previous position.

This is the end of the process of installing the elevating transport unit.
6-12
6.4.2 Replacing Elevating Transport Nip Opening/Closing Motor

Replace the motor opens or closes the elevating transport nip.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Elevating transport nip opening/closing 4 Precision flat blade screwdriver
motor (for replacement)
1 Install the elevating transportation unit with

reference to “ Removal Procedure (Page 6-9)”
in “6.4.1 Removing/Installing Elevating Transport
Unit”.
• When removing loading parts, be sure to

rough handling.

break.

4 Remove the gears.

• Two gears
6-13
5 Remove the elevating transport nip opening/

closing motor.
6 Install a new elevating transport nip opening/

closing motor.

• Two gears
When attaching gears, attention should be paid to the gear orientation.

After assembly, move the peripheral gears by hand and confirm that the assembled gear
Caution moves in conjunction.
10 Install the elevating transport unit, right cover, and rear cover with reference to “ Installation
Procedure (Page 6-11)” in “6.4.1 Removing/Installing Elevating Transport Unit”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the elevating transport nip opening/closing motor.
6-14
6.4.3 Replacing Elevating Transport Nip Opening/Closing HP Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects opening/closing HP of the elevating transport nip.
Caution
Work outline

1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Photo sensor (for replacement) 4 Precision flat blade screwdriver

Unit”.

rough handling.

break.
3 Remove the connector (JP80) wire from the slot

on the stop band and bracket.

5 Remove the gears.

• Two gears

6-15

The bracket shaped like a hook is inserted into the main
body. While sliding the bracket slightly, pull it out.


11 Install the two gears removed in step 5.
When attaching gears, attention should be paid to the gear orientation.
Caution After assembly, move the peripheral gears by hand and confirm that the assembled gear
moves in conjunction.

and attach it after determining the attachment position with
emboss at two places.
6-16
15 Put the wire removed in step 3 back into the slot on the bracket.
16 Install the elevating transport unit , right cover, and rear cover with reference to “ Installation
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the elevating transport nip opening/closing HP sensor.
6-17
6.4.4 Replacing Supply Outlet Sensor

This photo sensor detects film transfer at the outlet of Lispl-832.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools


Unit”.

rough handling.
2 Remove the face panel for the elevating transport

unit.
・ Three screws (M3×6)
Slide the face panel so as to unhook its tabs (4 places) from
the elevating transport unit and remove it from the unit.
3 Remove the actuator assembly.
6-18

・ One E ring

5 Remove the polyslider.

・ One polyslider

・ One E ring

7 Remove the gear.

・ One gear
8 Remove the side plate.

9 Take out the shaft.
10 Remove the guide.

6-19

break.

15 Install the guide removed in step 10.

16 Install the shaft removed in step 9.
17 Install the side plate removed in step 8.


・ One gear

・ One E ring
20 Install the bearing removed in step 5.

・ One bearing
6-20

・ One E ring
22 Install the actuator assembly removed in step 3.

23 Install the face panel removed in step 2.
Slide the face panel so as to unhook its tabs (4 places) from the elevating transport unit and remove it from the unit.
24 Install the elevating transport unit , right cover, and rear cover with reference to “ Installation
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the supply outlet sensor.
6-21
Chapter 7
Chapter 7 Replacing Sub Scan Unit
Loading Parts
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the sub scan
unit when they fail and how to adjust after replacing the loading parts.
7.1 Placing Loading Parts ........................................7-2

7.2 Removing/Installing Sub Scan Unit (Including
the Exposure Unit and Position Regulation Unit) ....7-4
7.3 Replacing Sub Scan Unit (Including the
Position Regulation Unit) .................................7-10
7.4 Replacing Right Cover Detection Sensor ........7-12
7.5 Replacing Position Regulation Inlet Sensor.....7-15
7.6 Replacing Position Regulation
Transport Motor ...............................................7-19
7.7 Replacing Moderation belt ...............................7-23
7.8 Replacing Transfer belt....................................7-25
7.9 Replacing Sub Scan Transport Motor..............7-27
7.10 Replacing Sub Scan Nip Motor........................7-30
7.11 Replacing Sub Scan Inlet Sensor ....................7-34
7.12 Replacing Sub Scan Nip HP Sensor................7-38
7.13 Replacing V-sync Sensor.................................7-40
7.14 Replacing Reference Guide.............................7-44
Chapter 7 Replacing Sub Scan Unit Loading Parts

Sub Scan Unit
The sub scan unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Right cover detection This photo sensor detects the opening/closing of the right cover.
sensor For more information, see “7.4 Replacing Right Cover Detection Sensor
(Page 7-12)”.
2 Position regulation inlet This photo sensor detects film transportation at the inlet of the justification
sensor unit.
For more information, see “7.5 Replacing Position Regulation Inlet Sensor
(Page 7-15)”.
3 Position regulation This drive motor is used to transport film in the justification unit.
transport motor For more information, see “7.6 Replacing Position Regulation Transport
Motor (Page 7-19)”.
4 Moderation belt This rubber belt transfers drive of the transport motor to the inlet roller.
For more information, see “7.7 Replacing Moderation belt (Page 7-23)”.
5 Transfer belt This steel belt transfers drive of the inlet roller to the outlet roller.
For more information, see “7.8 Replacing Transfer belt (Page 7-25)”.
6 Sub Scan transport motor This drive motor is used to transport film in the sub scan unit.
For more information, see “7.9 Replacing Sub Scan Transport Motor (Page
7-27)”.
7 Sub Scan nip motor This motor drives the nip in the sub scan unit.
For more information, see “7.10 Replacing Sub Scan Nip Motor (Page 7-
30)”.
8 Sub Scan inlet sensor This photo sensor detects film transportation at the inlet of the sub scan unit.
For more information, see “7.11 Replacing Sub Scan Inlet Sensor (Page 7-
34)”.
9 Sub Scan nip HP This photo sensor detects the home position of the nip in the sub scan unit.
sensor For more information, see “7.12 Replacing Sub Scan Nip HP Sensor (Page
7-38)”.
10 V-sync sensor This photo sensor detects film transportation in the sub scan unit.
For more information, see “7.13 Replacing V-sync Sensor (Page 7-40)”.
7-2
Position Regulation Unit

The position regulation unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Reference guide This guide regulates the film position during transport to align the image
position.
For more information, see “7.14 Replacing Reference Guide (Page 7-44)”.
7-3
7.2 Removing/Installing Sub Scan Unit (Including the Exposure

Unit and Position Regulation Unit)
This section describes the procedure for removing or installing the sub scan unit (including the exposure unit and
position regulation unit) when replacing loading parts in the sub scan unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes each
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.
3 Remove the right cover, lower right cover, LAN

cover, film ejection tray, connector cover, and the
upper right cover with reference to
“ Removal Procedure (Page 3-12)” in “3.3.3
Removing/Installing Upper Right Cover”.
7-4

sides.

5 Open the external guide assy by rotating the lever

B in the direction of an arrow.
6 Open the external guide unit assembly after

removing the stop band at two places.
7 Remove the guide unit assembly.

If the surface of the guide is scratched, it

could scratch film during transportation of
Caution film. When removing or installing the guide,
be careful not to scratch the surface of the
reference guide.
7-5
8 Remove the fixing screws of sub scan unit.

9 Remove the connectors (JJ15) and (JJ18).

break.
Turn the wire disconnected from the connector

toward the main unit to keep out of the way of
Note the sub scan unit when it is pulled out.
10 Remove wire from the locking wire saddle and

take off the connectors (CCN6) and (JJ25).

break.
Turn the wire disconnected from the connector

toward the main unit to keep out of the way of
Note the sub scan unit when it is pulled out.
11 Remove the ground wire.

• One screw (M4×8)×2
7-6
12 Pull out the sub scan unit toward you until it gets
caught and slightly lift it to remove.
• When pulling out the sub scan unit, be

careful not to get it hung up on a wire.
Caution
• The sub scan unit weighs approximately
16kg.
Carefully perform work when unloading
the sub scan unit from the main unit or
transporting it to work site.
• If you place the removed sub scan unit on
a table, it may become extremely
unstable. If you apply excessive
pressure, it can overturn the unit.
This is the end of the process of removing the sub scan unit.
• When replacing the right cover detection sensor, go to “7.4 Replacing Right Cover Detection Sensor (Page 7-
12)”.
• When replacing the position regulation transport motor, go to “7.6 Replacing Position Regulation Transport
Motor (Page 7-19)”.
• When replacing the position regulation inlet sensor, go to “7.5 Replacing Position Regulation Inlet Sensor
(Page 7-15)”.
• When replacing the Moderation belt, go to “7.7 Replacing Moderation belt (Page 7-23)”.
• When replacing the Transfer belt, go to “7.8 Replacing Transfer belt (Page 7-25)”.
• When replacing the Sub Scan transport motor, go to “7.9 Replacing Sub Scan Transport Motor (Page 7-27)”.
• When replacing the Sub Scan nip motor, go to “7.10 Replacing Sub Scan Nip Motor (Page 7-30)”.
• When replacing the Sub Scan inlet sensor, go to “7.11 Replacing Sub Scan Inlet Sensor (Page 7-34)”.
• When replacing the Sub Scan nip HP sensor, go to “7.12 Replacing Sub Scan Nip HP Sensor (Page 7-38)”.
• When replacing the V-sync sensor, go to “7.13 Replacing V-sync Sensor (Page 7-40)”.
1 Install the sub scan unit.
• Be careful not to get it hung on a wire.

Caution • The sub scan unit weighs approximately
16kg.
When putting the sub scan unit back to
the main unit, work should be performed
carefully.
2 Install the fixing screws of the sub scan unit.

7-7
3 Install the ground wire.

• One screw (M4×8)×2
4 Connect the connectors (CCN6) and (JJ25).

when connecting it.
Caution
5 Remove the connectors (JJ15) and (JJ18).

when connecting it.
Caution
6 Install the reference guide.

When installing the reference guide, be

careful not to come into contact with the
Caution position regulation sensor.
7 Install the guide unit assembly by hooking the

stop bands in two locations on the external guide
unit assembly.
7-8
8 Close the external guide unit assembly.
9 Install the upper right cover, connector cover, film ejection tray, LAN cover, lower right cover,
and right cover with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-15)” in “3.3.3 Removing/
Installing Upper Right Cover”.

previous position.

This is the end of the process of installing the sub scan unit.
7-9
7.3 Replacing Sub Scan Unit (Including the Position Regulation Unit)
This section describes the procedure for replacing the sub scan unit (including the position regulation unit).
Be sure to turn OFF the power and remove the power cable from the electrical outlet before
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 15 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Sub scan unit (for replacement)
1 Remove the sub scan unit with reference to

“ Removal Procedure (Page 7-4)” in “7.2
Removing/Installing Sub Scan Unit (Including the
Exposure Unit and Position Regulation Unit)”.

replace with the tray shutter attached. If
Caution some of the film remains on the tray, the
16kg.
Carefully perform work when unloading the
sub scan unit from the main unit or
transporting it to the work site.
• If you place the removed sub scan unit on a
table, it may be extremely unstable.
It should be kept in mind that applying
excessive pressure could overturn the unit.
2 Refer to step 2 and 3 in “8.2 Replacing Exposure

Unit (Page 8-3)” and remove the exposure unit.
The exposure unit includes optical parts.

Be careful not to subject to a strong impact.
Caution
7-10

Pulling by the wires too tightly can cause it
to break.
4 Remove the exposure unit mounting frame unit

assembly.
・ Four screws (M4×6）
5 Install the removed exposure unit mounting frame

unit assembly onto the new sub scan unit.
7 Refer to step 6 and 7 in “8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit (Page 8-3)” and install the exposure unit.
8 Install the sub scan unit with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 7-7)” in “7.2
Removing/Installing Sub Scan Unit (Including the Exposure Unit and Position Regulation
Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the sub scan unit (including the position regulation unit).
Work after replacing the sub scan unit (including the position
regulation unit)
After replacing the sub scan unit (including the position regulation unit), perform the following work.
• “14.2.3 Adjusting Sub Scan OFFSET (Vertical) Writing Position (Page 14-16)”
• “14.3.3 Sub Scan OFFSET Adjustment (Page 14-20)”
7-11
7.4 Replacing Right Cover Detection Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects the opening or closing of the right cover.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)

upper right cover with reference to
“ Removal Procedure (Page 3-12)” in “3.3.3
Removing/Installing Upper Right Cover”.

Caution
If some of the film remains on the tray, the

break.

sides.

7-12
4 Open the external guide unit assembly by rotating

the lever B in the direction of an arrow.
5 Remove the cover.




7-13

12 Close the external guide unit assembly opened in step 4.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the right cover detection sensor.
7-14
7.5 Replacing Position Regulation Inlet Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects film transportation at the inlet of the justification unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 15 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools



16kg.
the sub scan unit from the main unit or
table, it may become extremely unstable.


Caution
7-15

to break.

assembly.
5 Place the sub scan unit upside down and remove

the steel plate.

break.

break.
7-16

9 Remove the light shield bracket.




15 Install the steel plate removed in step 5.

7-17
16 Connect the connector (JJ51) removed in step 6.
17 Install the exposure unit mounting frame unit assembly removed in step 5.
19 Install the main scan unit with reference to the step 6 and 7 in “8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit (Page 8-3)”.
Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the position regulation inlet sensor.
7-18
7.6 Replacing Position Regulation Transport Motor

Replace the drive motor used to transport film in the justification unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 15 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Position regulation transport motor (for 4 Precision flat blade screwdriver
replacement)


16kg.
table, it may become extremely unstable.


Caution
7-19

break.

assembly.

the steel plate.

break.

to break.
7-20

9 Removing the gear fixing parallel pin.

• One parallel pin

・ E rings in two locations

11 Pull out the shaft.
12 Remove the position regulation transport motor.

13 Install a new position regulation transport motor.

14 Install the shaft, E rings, gear, and gear parallel pin removed in step 11, step 10 and step 9.
・ One parallel pin
・ E rings in two locations

7-21
19 Install the main scan unit with reference to the step 6 and 7 in “8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit
(Page 8-3)”.
Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the position regulation transport motor.
7-22
7.7 Replacing Moderation belt

Replace the Moderation belt that transfers drive of the transport motor to the inlet roller.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Moderation belt (for replacement) 4 Gloves


16kg.
table, it may become extremely unstable. It
should be kept in mind that applying
2 Remove the cover.

7-23
3 Remove the Moderation belt by loosening the belt

tension.
If you touch the belt with bare hands, it can

cause dust and dirt to adhere to the belt,
Caution resulting in pitch irregularity and image
inconsistencies.
When removing the belt, wear gloves.
4 Install a new Moderation belt.
5 Adjust the Moderation belt by rotating the pulley

several times so that the belt is placed in the
center of the pulley.
Since the groove in the pulley is gently tapered,

rotating the pulley several times moves the
Note Moderation belt to the center of the pulley.

Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the Moderation belt.
7-24
7.8 Replacing Transfer belt

Replace the Transfer belt that transfers drive of the inlet roller to the outlet roller.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Steel belt (for replacement) 4 Gloves


16kg.
2 Remove the cover.

7-25
3 Remove the Transfer belt by loosening the belt

tension.

inconsistencies.
4 Install a new Transfer belt.
5 Adjust the Transfer belt by rotating the pulley

several times so that the belt is placed in the
Since the groove in the pulley is gently tapered,

rotating the pulley several times moves the belt
Note to the center of the pulley.

Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the Transfer belt.
7-26
7.9 Replacing Sub Scan Transport Motor

Replace the drive motor used to transport film in the sub scan unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Sub Scan transport motor (for 4 Gloves
replacement)


16kg.


Caution
7-27
When removing the connector, do not pull by the

wires, but hold the tab on the connector with your
Caution fingers.
Pulling by the wires too tightly can cause it to
break.

assembly.
5 Remove the cover.

6 Remove the Moderation belt by loosening the belt

tension.

inconsistencies.
7 Loosen the set screw and remove the pulley.

• One set screw (M3×6)
7-28

wires but hold the tab on the connector with your
Caution fingers.
Pulling by the wires too tightly can cause a break.
9 Remove the Sub Scan transport motor.

10 Install a new Sub Scan transport motor.

12 Install the pulley removed in step 7.

13 Install Moderation belt removed in step 6.
Since the groove in the pulley is gently tapered, rotating the pulley several times moves the belt to the
Note

17 Refer to step 6 and 7 in “8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit (Page 8-3)” and install the exposure
unit.
Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the Sub Scan transport motor.
Work after replacing the Sub Scan transport motor

After replacing the Sub Scan transport motor, perform the following work.
• “14.3.3 Sub Scan OFFSET Adjustment (Page 14-20)”
7-29
7.10 Replacing Sub Scan Nip Motor

Replace the motor that drives the nip in the sub scan unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 15 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Sub Scan nip motor (for replacement)


16kg.


Caution
7-30

to break.

assembly.
5 Place the sub unit scan upside down and remove

the steel plate.

break.
7 Remove the connectors (JP58) and (JP35).

break.
7-31

9 Remove the set screw.

10 Remove the gears.
11 Remove the Sub Scan nip motor.

12 Install a new Sub Scan nip motor.

14 Install the set screw removed in step 9.


16 Connect the connectors (JP58) and (JP35) removed in step 7.

7-32
21 Refer to step 6 and 7 in “8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit (Page 8-3)” and install the exposure
unit.
Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the Sub Scan nip motor.
7-33
7.11 Replacing Sub Scan Inlet Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects film transportation at the inlet of the sub scan unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools



16kg.

The exposure unit includes optical parts. Be

careful not to subject to a strong impact.
Caution
7-34

to break.

assembly.

the steel plate.

break.

to break.
7-35
8 Remove the sensor cover.


11 Install the sensor cover removed in step 8.


7-36
Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the Sub Scan inlet sensor.
7-37
7.12 Replacing Sub Scan Nip HP Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects the home position of the nip in the sub scan unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools



16kg.


Caution
7-38

the connectors (JP58) and (JP35).

break.



8 Connect the connectors (JP58) and (JP35) removed in step 3.
10 Install the sub scan unit with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 7-7)” in “7.2 Removing/
Installing Sub Scan Unit (Including the Exposure Unit and Position Regulation Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the Sub Scan Nip HP sensor.
7-39
7.13 Replacing V-sync Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects film transportation in the sub scan unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools



16kg.


Caution
7-40

Caution
with your fingers.
to break.

assembly.

the steel plate.

break.

break.
7-41
8 Remove the cover.




7-42
Unit)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the V-sync sensor.
Work after replacing the V-sync sensor

After replacing the V-sync sensor, perform the following work.
• “14.2.3 Adjusting Sub Scan OFFSET (Vertical) Writing Position (Page 14-16)”
7-43
7.14 Replacing Reference Guide

The procedure for replacing the reference guide regulates the film position during transport to align the image
position.
Be sure to turn OFF the power and remove the power cable from the electrical outlet before
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes each
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Reference guide (for replacement)
Removal Procedure
supply tray.

part of the supply tray with the tray shutter’s UP

rough handling.

upper right cover with reference to “ Removal
Procedure (Page 3-12)” in“3.3.3 Removing/
7-44

The front cover will open by pulling the upper part of both
sides.

opened front cover.
Caution Failure to observe this caution can cause
the front cover to break.
5 Open the external guide assy by rotating the lever

B in the direction of an arrow.
6 Open the external guide unit assembly after

removing the stop bank at two places.
7 Remove the reference guide.

8 Install the new reference guide.

When installing the reference guide, be

careful not to come into contact with the
Caution position regulation sensor.
9 Install the guide unit assembly by hooking the

stop bands in two locations on the external guide
unit assembly.
7-45
10 Close the external guide unit assembly.

previous position.

This is the end of the process of replacing the reference guide.
7-46
Chapter 8
Chapter 8 Replacing Exposure Unit
This chapter describes how to replace the main scan unit.
8.1 Placing Exposure Unit........................................8-2

8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit ...................................8-3
8.1 Placing Exposure Unit

1 Exposure Unit This is an optical exposure.
For more information, see “8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit (Page 8-3)”.
8-2
8.2 Replacing Exposure Unit

Replace the main scan unit.
Caution
Work outline

1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Exposure Unit (for replacement)


16kg.
• If you place the removed sub scan unit on
a table, it may become extremely
unstable. It should be kept in mind that
applying excessive pressure could
overturn the unit.
2 Remove the ground wire.

8-3
3 Remove the exposure unit.


Caution
4 Remove the duct.

5 Install the duct removed in step 4 on the

exposure unit.
The values of the label attached to the exposure

unit will be set after replacing the unit, so write
Note down the numbers before performing the work.
6 Install the exposure unit on the sub scan unit.

7 Connect the ground wire disconnected in step 2.

• One screw (M4×8) × 2
Unit)”.
Caution
8-4
Work after replacing the exposure unit

After replacing the exposure unit, perform the following work.
1 Exposure light parameter settings

Set the values of the label attached to the exposure unit using the “Product Setup” screen.
Ex1) exposure unit label
Ex2) exposure unit label
Ex) “PRODACT SETUP” screen setup
• Set the magnification correction to “2”

• Set the frequency modulation data 1 to “0”
Refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)” concerning the setup method for the “Product Settings”
screen.
Note
2 Perform image unevenness correction.

For details, refer to “14.1 Image Unevenness Correction (Page 14-2)”.
3 Check and adjust the image writing position.

For details, refer to “14.2 Checking and Adjusting Image Data Writing Position (Page 14-13)”.
8-5
4 Check and fine tune the printing size.

For more information, see “14.3 Checking and Fine Tuning the Print Size (Page 14-17)”.
This is the end of the process of replacing the exposure unit.
8-6
Chapter 9
Chapter 9 Replacing Loading Parts
in Heat Process Unit
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the heat
process unit when they fail and how to adjust after replacing the
loading parts.
9.1 Heat Process Unit Side......................................9-2

9.1.1 Removing/Installing Heat Process Unit........ 9-3
9.1.2 Replacing Heater ......................................... 9-7
9.1.3 Replacing Heat Process
Temperature Sensor..................................... 9-8
9.1.4 Replacing Supply Cooling Fan..................... 9-9
9.2 Main Unit Side.................................................. 9-11
9.2.1 Replacing Heat Process Motor .................. 9-12
9.2.2 Replacing Heat Process Cooling
Fans 1 and 2 .............................................. 9-14
9.2.3 Replacing Deodorant Filter
Detection Sensor........................................ 9-16
9.2.4 Replacing Insulation Unit Fan .................... 9-18
9.2.5 Replacing Deodorant Fan .......................... 9-20
9.2.6 Replacing Internal Temperature Sensor..... 9-22
Chapter 9 Replacing Loading Parts in Heat Process Unit
9.1 Heat Process Unit Side

The heat process side of the heat process unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Heater The heater increases or decreases the temperature of the heat process unit.
For more information, see “9.1.2 Replacing Heater (Page 9-7)”.
2 Heat process This temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the heater.
temperature sensor For more information, see “9.1.3 Replacing Heat Process Temperature
Sensor (Page 9-8)”.
3 Supply cooling fan This fan unit cools the supply unit.
For more information, see “9.1.4 Replacing Supply Cooling Fan (Page 9-9)”.
9-2
9.1.1 Removing/Installing Heat Process Unit

This section describes the procedure for removing or installing the heat process unit when replacing loading parts in
the heat process unit.
• Be sure to turn off power and remove the power cable from the electrical outlet before
Caution
• The heat process unit and the area around it are hot immediately after turning off DRYPRO
832. The upper part of the rack is particularly hot. Touching it with bare hands may cause
burns. Therefore, use working gloves, and hold the grips on the side panels.
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes each
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Cotton work gloves
Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.
9-3

remove the cover.

Note
4 Remove the relay connectors (JJ60, JJ73, JJ74,

JJ75, JJ76, and JJ77).

break.

• Wire saddle in four locations
6 Remove the relay connectors (JP3, JP4, JP5,

JP6, and JP12).

break.

• Wire saddle in two locations
9-4
8 Pull out the heat process unit toward you until it

gets caught and slightly lift it to remove.
Since the upper left screw (in the left figure) is protected from
falling, it cannot be completely removed. (left figure ① )
• The heat process unit weighs

approximately 15kg.
Caution Carefully perform work when unloading
the heat process unit from the main unit
or transporting it to work site.
• Be very careful, the top of the rack is hot.
This is the end of the process of removing the heat process unit assembly.
• When replacing the heater, go to “9.1.2 Replacing Heater (Page 9-7)”.
• When replacing the heat process temperature sensor, go to “9.1.3 Replacing Heat Process Temperature Sensor
(Page 9-8)”.
• When replacing the supply cooling fan, go to “9.1.4 Replacing Supply Cooling Fan (Page 9-9)”.
1 Install the heat process unit on the main unit.
The heat process unit weighs approximately

15kg.
Caution Carefully perform work when unloading the
heat process unit from the main unit or
2 Fix the wire with the wire saddles.

• Wire saddle in two locations
9-5
3 Connect the relay connectors (JJ60, JJ73, JJ74,

JJ75, JJ76, and JJ77).

when connecting it.
Caution
4 Fix the wire with the wire saddles.

• Wire saddle in four locations
5 Install the left cover with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-23)” in “3.3.6
Removing/Installing Left Cover”.

previous position.

This is the end of the process of installing the heat process unit.
9-6
9.1.2 Replacing Heater

The heater used for increasing or decreasing the temperature of the heat process unit cannot be replaced singularly.
Replace the complete set of the heat process unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)
3 A complete set of heat process unit (for 4 Cotton work gloves
replacement)
1 Remove the left cover and heat process unit with

in “9.1.1 Removing/Installing Heat Process Unit”.

approximately 15kg.
2 Replace a complete set of heat process unit removed.
3 Install the heat process unit and left cover with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page
9-5)” in “9.1.1 Removing/Installing Heat Process Unit”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the heater.
9-7
9.1.3 Replacing Heat Process Temperature Sensor

The temperature sensor that monitors the temperature of the heater cannot be replaced singularly. Replace a
complete set of the heat process unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)
3 A complete set of heat process unit (for 4 Cotton work gloves
replacement)


approximately 15kg.
2 Replace a complete set of heat process unit removed.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the heat process temperature sensor.
9-8
9.1.4 Replacing Supply Cooling Fan

Replace the fan unit that cools the supply unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Fan unit (for replacement)

supply tray.


rough handling.

remove the cover.

Note
9-9
4 Remove the supply cooling fan.


break.
6 Install a new supply cooling fan.

Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the supply cooling fan.
9-10
9.2 Main Unit Side

The main unit side of the heat process unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Heat process motor This motor drives the opposed roller.
For more information, see “9.2.1 Replacing Heat Process Motor (Page 9-
12)”.
2 Heat process cooling This fan unit cools the heat process unit.
fans 1 and 2 For more information, see “9.2.2 Replacing Heat Process Cooling Fans 1
and 2 (Page 9-14)”.
3 Deodorant filter detection This photo sensor detects presence or absence of the Deodorant filter.
sensor For more information, see “9.2.3 Replacing Deodorant Filter Detection
Sensor (Page 9-16)”.
4 Insulation unit fan This fan unit cools the insulation unit.
For more information, see “9.2.4 Replacing Insulation Unit Fan (Page 9-
18)”.
5 Deodorant fan This fan unit is used to remove the odor from the inside of the main unit.
For more information, see “9.2.5 Replacing Deodorant Fan (Page 9-20)”.
6 Internal temperature This temperature sensor monitors the temperature inside the supply tray.
sensor For more information, see “9.2.6 Replacing Internal Temperature Sensor
(Page 9-22)”.
9-11
9.2.1 Replacing Heat Process Motor

Replace the motor that drives the opposed roller.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)
3 Heat process motor unit (for replacement)

supply tray.


rough handling.


Note bottom three screws.
9-12
4 Remove the entire unit of the heat process motor.

Remove the circuit board supports in two positions and take
off the entire unit of the heat process motor.

break.
6 Install the entire unit of a new heat process motor.

Removing/Installing Rear Cover”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the heat process motor.
9-13
9.2.2 Replacing Heat Process Cooling Fans 1 and 2

Replace the fan unit that cools the heat process unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes each
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools


supply tray.


rough handling.


9-14
4 Remove the connector on the side to be

replaced.
• Heat process cooling fan 1: connector (JP19)
• Heat process cooling fan 2: connector (JP20)

break.
5 Remove the heat process cooling fan on the side

to be replaced.
6 Install a new heat process cooling fan.

7 Connect the connector (JP19) or (JP20) removed in step 4.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the heat process cooling fans 1 and 2.
9-15
9.2.3 Replacing Deodorant Filter Detection Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects the presence or absence of the deodorant filter.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 15 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Photo sensor (for replacement) 4 Cotton work gloves


approximately 15kg.
9-16

break.
4 Remove the actuator.

7 Install the actuator removed in step 4.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the Deodorant filter detection sensor.
9-17
9.2.4 Replacing Insulation Unit Fan

Replace the fan unit that cools the insulation unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools


supply tray.


rough handling.


9-18

break.
5 Remove the insulation unit fan.

6 Install a new insulation unit fan.

Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the insulation unit fan.
9-19
9.2.5 Replacing Deodorant Fan

Replace the fan unit that removes the odor from the inside of the main unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools


supply tray.


rough handling.


9-20

break.
5 Remove the deodorant fan.

6 Install a new deodorant fan.

Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the deodorant fan.
9-21
9.2.6 Replacing Internal Temperature Sensor

Replace the temperature sensor that monitors the temperature inside the supply tray.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 20 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)
3 Internal temperature sensor (for 4 Nipper
replacement)
5 Snap band 6 Cotton work gloves


approximately 15kg.


9-22
3 Remove the lid from the box where the H-DRV

board is housed.
4 Cut the snap band that fixing the internal

temperature sensor with a nipper.
Pick up broken pieces of the cut snap band

from the back of the main unit or they will fall
Caution into the supply side.
5 Remove the MEC (mechanical control) box

cover.
6 Remove the duct.

7 Disconnect the connector (MCN22) from the

MEC (mechanical control) board.

MCN22 Caution with your fingers. Pulling by the wires too
tightly can cause a break.
9-23
8 Remove the internal temperature sensor.

The interconnection of the internal temperature sensor is
wired as in the left figure.
9 Connect a new internal temperature sensor

connector (MCN22) to the MEC board and pull
MCN22
the wire into the inside of the unit.

when connecting it.
To inside of Caution
the unit If the connector is not connected properly,
10 Adjust the internal temperature sensor to the

position shown in the left figure and fix it with the
snap band.
Approx. 30 mm
Approx. 10 mm
11 Install the duct removed in step 6.

12 Install the MEC box cover removed in step 5

13 Install the lid removed in step 3 to the box where the H-DRV board is housed.
14 Install the rear cover removed in step 2.

15 Install the heat process unit and the left cover with reference to “ Installation Procedure
(Page 9-5)” in “9.1.1 Removing/Installing Heat Process Unit”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the internal temperature sensor.
9-24
Chapter 10 Replacing Ejection Unit
Chapter 10
This chapter describes how to replace the ejection unit.
10.1 Placing Ejection Unit ........................................10-2

10.2 Replacing Ejection Unit....................................10-3
10.1 Placing Ejection Unit

1 Ejection unit This unit ejects film.
For more information, see “10.2 Replacing Ejection Unit (Page 10-3)”.
10-2
10.2 Replacing Ejection Unit

Replace the ejection unit that ejects film.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)
3 Ejection unit (for replacement)

supply tray.


rough handling.

Procedure (Page 3-12)” in “3.3.3 Removing/
10-3



remove the cover.
Remove the two screws on the upper part of the

left cover and loosen two screws on the lower
Note part.
6 Disconnect the connector (OCN1) connected to

the operation panel.

wires, but hold the tab on the connector with your
Caution fingers.
Pulling by the wires too tightly can cause a break.
To make it easy to disconnect the connector,

remove wire from the clamps and wire saddle.
Note
7 Remove the exterior of the operation panel.

8 Remove the relay connector (JJ27).

to break.
10-4
9 Remove the ejection unit cover.


break.

break.
12 Disconnect the connector (JP17) from the wire

saddle.
13 Remove the ejection unit.

14 Install a new ejection unit.

10-5

17 Connect the relay connector (JJ17) removed in step 10.
18 Install the ejection unit cover removed in step 9.

20 Install the exterior of the operation panel removed in step 7.

21 Connect the connector (OCN1) removed in step 6.

previous position.

27 Refer to the“15.20 Densitometer (Page 15-42)” to

perform the densitometer calibration.
This is the end of the process of replacing the ejection unit.
10-6
Chapter 11
in Main Unit
This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the main unit
11.1 Placing Loading Parts ...................................... 11-2

11.2 Replacing Front Cover Sensor......................... 11-3
11.3 Replacing Main Board...................................... 11-7
11.4 Replacing Compact Flash.............................. 11-11
11.5 Replacing MEC Board ................................... 11-14
11.6 Replacing Multiple Power Supply .................. 11-17
11.7 Replacing H-DRV Board ................................ 11-20
11.8 Replacing Noise Filter.................................... 11-22
11.9 Replacing Control Cooling Fan ...................... 11-25
Chapter 11 Replacing Loading Parts in Main Unit

The main unit includes the following loading parts.

1 Front cover sensor This photo sensor detects the opening/closing of the front cover.
For more information, see “11.2 Replacing Front Cover Sensor (Page 11-3)”.
2 Main board This main board controls DRYPRO 832.
For more information, see “11.3 Replacing Main Board (Page 11-7)”.
3 Compact flash This compact flash memory retains various setting data.
For more information, see “11.4 Replacing Compact Flash (Page 11-11)”.
4 MEC board This board controls a motor and sensors.
For more information, see “11.5 Replacing MEC Board (Page 11-14)”.
5 Multiple power supply This power supply unit supplies DC voltage.
For more information, see “11.6 Replacing Multiple Power Supply (Page 11-
17)”.
6 H-DRV board This board controls the heater in the heat process unit.
For more information, see “11.7 Replacing H-DRV Board (Page 11-20)”.
7 Noise filter This noise filter removes AC voltage noise.
For more information, see “11.8 Replacing Noise Filter (Page 11-22)”.
8 Control cooling fan This fan unit cools the control unit.
For more information, see “11.9 Replacing Control Cooling Fan (Page 11-
25)”.
11-2
11.2 Replacing Front Cover Sensor

Replace the photo sensor that detects the opening or closing of the front cover.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 20 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Remove the exterior of the operation panel with

reference to “12.2 Removing/Installing Exterior of
Operation Panel (Page 12-3)”.

Caution some of the film remains on the tray, the film
may be exposed.

You can open the front cover by pulling both side of the
upper part of the cover toward you.
Do not push down the open front cover or

put an object on it.
Caution
Failure to observe this caution can cause
the front cover failure.
3 Remove the front cover fixing band.

11-3
4 Loosen the two front cover fixing screws.
5 Remove the front cover from the hole by sliding to

the right.
6 Remove the lever B handle.


8 Remove the front panel.

• Five screws (M3×6)

break.
11-4



14 Connect the connector (JP) removed in step 9.
15 Install the front panel removed in step 8.

16 Install the loser front cover removed in step 7.

17 Install the lever B handle removed in step 6.

18 Install the front cover removed in step 5 and tighten the screw loosened in step 4.
19 Install the fixing band removed in step 3.

20 Close the front cover.

21 Install the exterior of the operation panel with reference to “12.2 Removing/Installing Exterior of
Operation Panel (Page 12-3)”.
11-5
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the front cover sensor.
11-6
11.3 Replacing Main Board

Replace the main board that controls DRYPRO 832.
• Be sure to turn off power and remove the power cable from the electrical outlet before removing or
installing the exterior cover or replacing loading parts.
Caution
• To avoid damage to the board caused by electrostatic discharge, wear a wrist grounding strap with
reference to “3.4 Installing a Grounding Strap (Page 3-24)” when accessing the board for work.
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Main board (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap
1 Remove the LAN cover and film ejection tray with

reference to “ Removal Procedure (Page 3-
10)” in “3.3.2 Removing/Installing Film Ejection
Tray”.
3 Remove connectors from MEC IF (CCN5),

exposure IF (CCN6), and power supply (JP52).

break.
11-7
4 Remove the connector (JP24) from the control

box DC fan.

break.
5 Remove the control board duct unit assembly.

6 Remove the control box assembly.

Loosen the screws and remove the control unit by sliding it
slightly.
7 Remove the lid from the control box.

• Nine screws (M3×6)
8 Remove the connector (CCN1) from the power

supply.

break.
11-8
9 Loosen the exposure connector grounding

hardware screw.
10 Remove hexagonal head screws from the UPS

connector and screws from the exposure
connector.
• Two hexagonal head screws (M3×6)
• Two screws (M2.6×6)
11 Remove the main board.

12 Install a new main board.

When installing the board, carefully perform

work not to bump the components on the
Caution back of the board against the stud and
damage them.
13 Install the hexagonal head screws on the UPS connector and the screws on the exposure
connector removed in step 10.
• Two hexagonal head screws (M3×6)
• Two screws (M2.6×6)
14 Tighten the screws while pressing the exposure connector grounding hardware loosened in
step 9 against the connector.
15 Connect the connector (CCN1) removed in step 8.
If the connector is not connected properly, an error will occur and, in some cases, smoke and/or
Caution an odor may be generated.
16 Install the lid removed in step 7 on the control box.

17 Install the control box assembly removed in step 6.

18 Install the control board duct unit assembly removed in step 5.

11-9
19 Connect the connector (JP24) removed in step 4 of the control box DC fan.
20 Connect the connectors removed in step 3 to MEC IF (CCN5), exposure IF (CCN6), and power
supply (JP52).
21 Install the connector cover removed in step 2.

22 Install the LAN cover and film ejection tray with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page
3-11)” in “3.3.2 Removing/Installing Film Ejection Tray”.
This is the end of the process of replacing the main board.
11-10
11.4 Replacing Compact Flash

Replace the compact flash memory that retains various setting data.
Caution
• To avoid damage to the board caused by electrostatic discharge, wear a wrist grounding
strap with reference to “3.4 Installing a Grounding Strap (Page 3-24)” when accessing the
board for work.
Work outline

1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Compact flash (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap

Tray”.


break.
11-11

box DC fan.

break.


slightly.
7 Remove the lid from the control box.

8 Remove the compact flash.
9 Install a new compact flash.
11-12
10 Install the lid removed in step 7 on the control box.



supply (JP52).
This is the end of the process of replacing the compact flash.
11-13
11.5 Replacing MEC Board

Replace the MEC board that controls a motor and sensor.
Caution
board for work.
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

removed)
3 MEC board (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap

supply tray.


rough handling.


11-14
4 Remove the MEC (mechanical control) box

cover.
5 Remove the connectors (MCN1, MCN2, MCN4, MCN5, MCN7, MCN8, MCN9, MCN11,
MCN13, MCN14, MCN15, MCN16, MCN22, MCN23, MCN24, MCN25, MCN26, and MCN28)
from the MEC board.
When removing the connector, do not pull by the wires, but hold the tab on the connector with
your fingers. Pulling by the wires too tightly can cause a break.
Caution
6 Remove the MEC board.

Remove the screws and the board supports in two positions
to remove the board.
7 Install a new MEC board.

8 Connect the connectors (MCN1, MCN2, MCN4, MCN5, MCN7, MCN8, MCN9, MCN11,
MCN13, MCN14, MCN15, MCN16, MCN22, MCN23, MCN24, MCN25, MCN26, and MCN28)
removed in step 5.
9 Install the MEC box cover removed in step 4.

11-15
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the MEC board.
11-16
11.6 Replacing Multiple Power Supply

Replace the multiple power supply unit that supplies DC voltage.
Caution
board for work.
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Multiple power supply (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap

supply tray.


rough handling.

11-17


5 Remove the duct.

6 Remove the duct.

7 Disconnect the connector (ACN1, ACN5, ACN6,

ACN7, and ACN8) from the multiple power
supply.

break.
8 Remove the multiple power supply.

Remove the screws and the board support in one position to
remove the multiple power supply.
9 Install a new multiple power supply.

11-18
10 Connect the connectors (ACN1, ACN5, ACN6, ACN7, and ACN8) removed in step 7.


Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the multiple power supply.
11-19
11.7 Replacing H-DRV Board

Replace the H-DRV board that controls the heater in the heat process unit.
Caution
832.
The upper part of the rack is particularly hot. Touching it with bare hands may cause burns.
Therefore, use working gloves, and hold the grips on the side panels.
board for work.
Work outline

Personnel
1 15 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 H-DRV board (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap
5 Cotton work gloves


approximately 15kg.
2 Remove the lid from the box where the H-DRV

board is housed.
11-20
3 Disconnect the connectors (HCN1, HCN2, HCN3, HCN4, HCN5, HCN6, and HCN7) from the
H-DRV board.
When removing the connector, do not pull by the wires, but hold the tab on the connector with
your fingers. Pulling by the wires too tightly can cause a break.
Caution
4 Remove the H-DRV board.

Remove the screws and the board supports in three positions
to remove the board.
5 Install a new H-DRV board.

6 Connect the connectors (HCN1, HCN2, HCN3, HCN4, HCN5, HCN6, and HCN7) removed in
step 3.
7 Install the lid removed in step 2 on the box where the H-DRV board is housed.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the H-DRV board.
11-21
11.8 Replacing Noise Filter

Replace the noise filter that removes AC voltage noise.
Caution
board for work.
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Noise filter (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap

supply tray.


rough handling.


11-22

remove the cover.

Note
5 Remove the lid from the noise filter.

6 Remove Faston terminals (NF1-1, NF1-2, NF1-3,

NF1-4, NF1-5, NF1-6, and NF1-7).
• The NF1-1 (black) and NF1-2 (white) are connected to the
to main power supply.
ground-fault circuit interrupter.
multiple power supply.
• The NF1-5 (green) is connected to FG.
7 Remove the noise filter.

8 Install a new noise filter.

9 Connect Faston terminals (NF1-1, NF1-2, NF1-3, NF1-4, NF1-5, NF1-6, and NF1-7) removed
in step 6.
10 Install the lid removed in step 5 on the noise filter.
11-23
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the noise filter.
11-24
11.9 Replacing Control Cooling Fan

Replace the fan unit that cools the control unit.
Caution
Work outline

1 10 minutes
Requirements
The procedure for replacing loading parts requires the following tools
No. Tools No. Tools


Tray”.


break.
11-25

box DC fan.

break.


slightly.
7 Remove the control cooling fan.

8 Install a new control cooling fan.



11-26
supply (JP52).
This is the end of the process of replacing the control cooling fan.
11-27
Chapter 12
in the Exterior of Main Unit

This chapter describes how to replace loading parts in the exterior of
the main unit when they fail and how to adjust after replacing the
loading parts.
12.1 Placing Loading Parts ......................................12-2

12.2 Removing/Installing Exterior
of Operation Panel ...........................................12-3
12.3 Replacing LCD Board ......................................12-6
12.4 Replacing Status Lamp ....................................12-8
12.5 Replacing Operation Switch Board ................ 12-11
Chapter 12 Replacing Loading Parts in the Exterior of Main Unit

The exterior of the main unit includes the following loading parts.

1 LCD board This is a message display LCD board on the operation panel.
For more information, see “12.3 Replacing LCD Board (Page 12-6)”.
2 Status lamp This status lamp indicates the operating status of DRYPRO 832.
For more information, see “12.4 Replacing Status Lamp (Page 12-8)”.
3 Operation switch board This is an operation switch board.
For more information, see “12.5 Replacing Operation Switch Board (Page
12-11)”.
12-2
12.2 Removing/Installing Exterior of Operation Panel

This section describes the procedure for removing or installing the operation panel when replacing loading parts in
the exterior of the main unit.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 5 minutes each
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

Removal Procedure
supply tray.


rough handling.

12-3
4 Disconnect the connector (OCN1) connected to

the operation panel.

break.
To make it easy to disconnect the connector,

remove wire from the clamps and wire saddle.
Note
5 Remove the exterior of the operation panel.

This is the end of the process of removing the exterior of the operation panel.
• When replacing the LCD board, go to “12.3 Replacing LCD Board (Page 12-6)”.
• When replacing the status lamp, go to “12.4 Replacing Status Lamp (Page 12-8)”.
• When replacing the operation switch board, go to “12.5 Replacing Operation Switch Board (Page 12-11)”.
12-4
1 Install the exterior of the operation panel.
2 Connect the connector (OCN1).

when connecting it.
Caution

previous position.

This is the end of the process of installing the exterior of the operation panel.
12-5
12.3 Replacing LCD Board

Replace the message display LCD board on the operation panel.
Caution
board for work.
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 LCD board (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap

3)” in “12.2 Removing/Installing Exterior of
Operation Panel”.

may be exposed.
2 Remove the operation panel.

Push out the operation panel by pressing down the tab on the
operation panel.
3 Remove the cover.

12-6
4 Remove the LCD board.

5 Install a new LCD board.

6 Confirm that the LCD board is properly installed

by pressing each button on the operation panel.

8 Install the operation panel removed in step 2.
9 Install the exterior of the operation panel with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page
12-5)” in “12.2 Removing/Installing Exterior of Operation Panel”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the LCD board.
12-7
12.4 Replacing Status Lamp

Replace the status lamp that indicates the operating status of DRYPRO 832.
Caution
board for work.
Work outline

1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Status lamp (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap

Operation Panel”.

may be exposed.
2 Remove the status lamp relay connector (JJ27).

break.

12-8
4 Remove the status lamp cover.

5 Remove the lamp cover.
6 Remove the connector (JP27) from the status

lamp cover.
7 Disconnect the fixed status lamp wire from the

status lamp cover.
8 Slide the status lamp board to remove the status

lamp from the status lamp cover.
9 Install a new status lamp board.
12-9
10 Fix the status lamp wire removed in step 6 to the status lamp cover.
11 Install the connector (JP27) removed in step 7 on the status lamp cover.
12 Install the lamp cover removed in step 5.
13 Remove the status lamp cover removed in step 4.
14 Remove the ejection unit cover removed in step 3.

Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the status lamp.
12-10
12.5 Replacing Operation Switch Board

Replace the operation switch board.
Caution
board for work.
Work outline

Personnel
1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Operation switch board (for replacement) 4 Grounding strap

Operation Panel”.

may be exposed.

break.

remove the cover.

Note
12-11

5 Remove the switch mounting plate.

6 Remove the connector (PSCN1).

to break.
7 Remove the switch cover.

Remove it by pressing down the tab on the cover.
8 Remove the operation switch board.

9 Install a new operation switch board.

12-12
10 Install the switch cover removed in step 7.
11 Connect the connector (PSCN1) removed in step 6.
12 Install the switch mounting plate removed in step 6.

14 Install the ejection unit cover removed in step 4.

Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the operation switch board.
12-13
Chapter 13 Replacing and Cleaning
Chapter 13
Loading Parts on a
Regular Basis
This chapter describes the procedures for replacing and cleaning
loading parts on a regular basis.
13.1 Periodic Maintenance Tasks ............................13-2

13.2 Replacing Pickup Roller...................................13-3
13.3 Replacing Opposed Roller ...............................13-7
13.4 Cleaning Guide .............................................. 13-11
13.5 Cleaning Control Box Intake Air Filter............13-13
13.6 Power Supply Unit Intake
Air Filter Cleaning ..........................................13-14
Chapter 13 Replacing and Cleaning Loading Parts on a Regular Basis
13.1 Periodic Maintenance Tasks

Maintenance tasks to be performed on DRYPRO 832 on a regular basis and maintenance interval schedule are as
follows:
No. Maintenance Tasks Maintenance Interval Schedule

1 Replacement of a pickup roller Every 50,000 sheets
2 Replacement of opposed roller Every 50,000 sheets
3 Guide cleaning Every 50,000 sheets
4 Control box intake air filter cleaning Semi-annually
5 Power supply unit intake air filter cleaning Semi-annually
13-2
13.2 Replacing Pickup Roller

Replace the pickup roller that transports film from the supply tray to the justification unit.
Caution
Work outline

1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Pickup rollers (for replacement)
Placing Loading Parts

The supply unit of Lispl-832 also includes the same loading parts.
Note

1 Pickup rollers This pickup rollers transport film from the supply tray to the justification unit.
13-3

supply tray.


rough handling.

Caution


break.
13-4
6 Remove the light shield unit assembly.


main unit.
7 Remove the pickup unit assembly.
When removing the pickup unit assembly,

be careful not to cause the sensor to come
Caution into contact with the parts inside the main
unit.
8 Remove the pickup rollers.

• Two pickup rollers
Push the tab on the shaft outward and remove the pickup
rollers.
When using 14-inch film, one end of the

pickup roller interferes with the bracket and
Caution cannot be removed. First remove the pickup
unit assembly, and then remove the pickup
roller.
9 Install new pickup rollers.

Check the hooks of the pickup rollers for a proper fit in the
groove in the shaft.
10 Install the pickup unit assembly removed in step 7.
Insert the pickup unit assembly all the way in along the guides while being careful not to cause
any damage by coming into contact with the parts inside the main unit.
Caution
If the pickup unit assembly is not installed properly, it may be impossible to install the light
shield unit assembly.
11 Install the light shield unit assembly removed in step 6.

13-5


previous position.

This is the end of the process of replacing the pickup rollers.
13-6
13.3 Replacing Opposed Roller

Replace the roller that transports film for exposure and heat processing and transports film to the cooling unit.
Caution
832.
• The heat process unit includes five racks from V1 to V5. You must remove or install them in
a predetermined order.
Be sure to perform work following the steps. Failure to follow these steps can cause the rack
to fall that could result in damage to the surface (through which film passes) of the guide.
Work outline

1 30 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Replacement kit (opposed roller and spring) 4 Cotton work gloves
Placing Loading Parts

1 Opposed roller This roller transports film for exposure and heat processing and transports
film to the cooling unit.
2 Spring This spring undergoes motion of transport roller.
13-7
1 Remove the left cover and the heat process unit

9-3)” in “9.1.1 Removing/Installing Heat Process
Unit”.

approximately 15kg.
2 Remove the V5 rack.

You cannot remove the screws completely.
3 Loosen the screw on the right side of frame on V4

rack.
• One screw
4 Turn the gear forward as shown in the diagram at

the left.
5 Remove the V4 rack.

13-8
Place the removed rack with the roller side

up at work site. If you place the rack with the
Caution roller side down, the roller and printed film
could get scratched.
6 Remove the cover.

• One screw (M3×6) ×2 positions
You can remove the cover by only loosening the screw.
7 Remove the rack retainer plate.

• Two screws (M3×6) ×2 positions
Slightly push in the rack retainer plate inward to make it
easy to remove.
8 Remove V1 rack.
9 Remove V2 rack.
10 Remove V3 rack.
You can remove these screws.
13-9
11 Replace the opposed rollers and springs according to the instructions included in the
replacement kit.
• Push the bearing part to install an opposed roller.

If excess pressure is applied around the center of the opposed roller to install, the opposed
Caution roller might be deformed which causes a 38mm pitch unevenness.
• After replacing opposed rollers, scratches may occur on the film BC surface due to the
surrounding dust. Let the films flow until the scratches disappear.
Usually the scratches will stop occurring after five to six films.
Opposed rollers and springs to be replaced are as follows:
rack
Opposed rollers to be replaced seven screws
rack
rack rack rack
Opposed Roller
Rack Spring Replacement
Name Type
V1 V1-1 －－ No
V1-2 －－ No
V1-3 －－ No
V1-4 －－ No
V2 V2-1 －－ No
V2-2 －－ No
V2-3 Roller 1B Gold spring Yes
V2-4 Roller 1B Gold spring Yes
V3 V3-1 Roller 12 Gold spring Yes
V3-2 Roller 1B’ Silver spring Yes
V4 V4-1 Roller 2B Silver spring Yes
V4-2 Roller 2B Silver spring Yes
V4-3 Roller 3B Silver spring Yes
V4-4 －－ No
V5 V5-1 －－ No
V5-2 －－ No
V5-3 －－ No
V5-4 －－ No
Work after replacing the opposed roller

After replacing the opposed roller, perform the following work.
• “13.4 Cleaning Guide (Page 13-11)”
13-10
13.4 Cleaning Guide

Clean the guide in the heat process unit through which film passes.
Caution
832.
• When cleaning the guide, first remove the rack and leave the guide to cool down before
starting work.
• When the heat process unit is hot, ethanol easily evaporates, which could make it harder to
remove contamination. Leave the guide removed for about 10 -15 minutes and check that it
cools down sufficiently before starting work.
Work outline

1 10 minutes
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Ethanol 4 Melamine sponge
5 Dust cloth 6 Cotton work gloves
1 Clean the surface of the guide with ethanol.

Cut the melamine sponge to the desired size, soak it in a
small amount of ethanol, and wipe the surface of the guide
clean.
Do not use anything other than melamine

sponge, or the guide could be scratched.
Caution
2 Wipe off irregular spots of ethanol with dust cloth.

Wring the water out of the dust cloth and wipe off spots.
You must install the five racks from V1 to V5

in a predetermined order. Be sure to install
Caution them, reversing the order of removal.
Failure to follow the order of installation can
cause the rack to fall that could result in
damage to the surface (through which film
passes) of the guide.
3 Install the V3 rack removed in step 10 in “13.3 Replacing Opposed Roller (Page 13-7)”.
13-11
6 Install the rack retainer plate removed in step 7 in “13.3 Replacing Opposed Roller (Page 13-
7)”.
• Two screws (M3×6) ×2 positions
7 Install the cover removed in step 6 in “13.3 Replacing Opposed Roller (Page 13-7)”.
• One screw (M3×6) ×2 positions
9 Return the position of the gear back turned forward in step 4 back in“13.3 Replacing Opposed
Roller (Page 13-7)” and tighten the screw.
• One screw
After the installation of the rack, confirm that the installed gear of the rack to operates properly
by moving the gear by hand.
Caution
Caution
This is the end of the process of replacing the opposed roller and cleaning the guide.
13-12
13.5 Cleaning Control Box Intake Air Filter

Clean the air intake filter in the control box.
Caution
Work outline

Personnel
1 1 minute
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Various types of screwdrivers 2 Vacuum cleaner
1 Remove the LAN cover with reference to “

Removing/Installing Film Ejection Tray”.
2 Take off the LAN cover and remove dust from the
outside of the air intake filter with a vacuum
cleaner.
3 Install the LAN cover with reference to “ Installation Procedure (Page 3-11)” in “3.3.2
Removing/Installing Film Ejection Tray”.
This is the end of the process of cleaning the control box air intake filter.
13-13
13.6 Power Supply Unit Intake Air Filter Cleaning

Clean the air intake filter in the power supply unit.
Caution
Work outline

1 1 minute
Requirements
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Vacuum cleaner
1 Remove dust from the outside of the air intake

filter with a vacuum cleaner.
This is the end of the process of cleaning the power supply unit air intake filter.
13-14
Chapter 14 Setting and Adjustment
Chapter 14
This chapter describes various setting and adjustment procedures for

DRYPRO 832.
14.1 Image Unevenness Correction ........................14-2

14.1.1 Density Correction...................................... 14-3
14.2 Checking and Adjusting Image Data
Writing Position ..............................................14-13
14.2.1 Checking Image Data Writing Position..... 14-13
14.2.2 Adjusting Main Scan OFFSET (Lateral)
Writing Position ........................................ 14-15
14.2.3 Adjusting Sub Scan OFFSET (Vertical)
Writing Position ........................................ 14-16
14.3 Checking and Fine Tuning the Print Size.......14-17
14.3.1 Checking Print Size.................................. 14-17
14.3.2 Main Scan OFFSET Adjustment .............. 14-19
14.3.3 Sub Scan OFFSET Adjustment ............... 14-20
14.1 Image Unevenness Correction

Image unevenness correction is made up of the following items:
Pitch unevenness correction
Density is corrected to minimize unevenness in the direction of pitch of an image (direction of transporting film).
Shading correction
Correction is made to minimize the difference in density of an image in horizontal direction.
㧿㨀㧭㧾㨀
㧖If an optional supply is added, Pitch unevenness correction

Select a tray ‫ޓ‬select the maximum ch film size
㧖Select a default value 㧖Mark the specified

Select a gain value
‫(ޓ‬all 3s) at first ‫ޓ‬row using a check box
To the next screen
Print ST13A
Reenter a gain value only for the Reenter a gain value
Observe the image with unspecified row (recommended only for the unspecified row
a magnifying glass value: previous value + 2)
To the previous To the previous

screen screen
Do correct
NO
phase/sub-phase values exist
for all six rows?
YES
Enter phase and sub-phase
values (6 points)
To the next screen
Print ST13B
Observe the image with

a magnifying glass
Do correct
NO
sub gain values exist
for all six rows? To the previous
screen
YES Check for an error

NO
Enter sub-gain values in typing phase and
(6 points) sub-phase values
To the next screen
YES
Shading correction
Print ST13C
Set the density of the image
Enter offset values

(5 points)
END
14-2
14.1.1 Density Correction

By determining ST13A and ST13B correction numbers, make a proper correction to pitch unevenness. By
determining ST13C correction number, make a proper correction to shading.
1 Start DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool with reference to the DRYPRO 832 Installation Manual.
The Maintenance Menu window appears.
2 Click the [CORRECTION] button under “SERVICE INFO.”.
The “CORRECTION (STEP1)” window appears.
3 Select a tray that contains film to which a correction will be made from the “TRAY” pull-down.
Select the tray that contains the largest film (recommended width of 14 inches).
Note
4 Determine an appropriate gain value (6 positions) and enter it in the “TEST GAIN” entry field.
5 Click the [NEXT(N)] button.
14-3
6 Click the [PRINT] button.
The ST13A PATTERN is printed.

Example: ST13A PATTERN
14-4
7 Observe the center of each patch in the <1> row of the printed ST13A PATTERN, using a
magnifying glass, and determine the number (PHASE) that has the least row-by-row horizontal
streak unevenness (0.16 mm pitch) of the patches from (01) to (13).
Write down the number (PHASE) determined on the film.
• The number to be determined here is the one that is attached to each density patch in the ST13A test
pattern.
Note
• When comparing patches, observe the center of each patch by scanning from the top or bottom with
the magnifying glass.
8 Observe the entire area in the patch with the number (PHASE) that has the least streak
unevenness determined in step 7 and determine the row-by-row position (SUB PHASE) that
has the least horizontal streak unevenness (0.16 mm pitch) of (-2) to (+2).
Write down the number (SUB PHASE) determined on the film.
• The number to be determined here is the one that is attached to each density patch in the ST13A test
pattern.
Note
• When observing the inside of the patch, observe the center of the patch by scanning from side to side
with the magnifying glass.
14-5
9 Repeat steps from 7 to step 8, and determine the number (PHASE) that has the least
horizontal streak unevenness of the <2> to the <6> rows, and the row-by-row position (SUB
PHASE) that has the least horizontal streak unevenness.
Write down the numbers (PHASE and SUB PHASE) determined on the film.
10 Specify the numbers (PHASE and SUB PHASE) determined in step 7 to step 9 in each entry
field.
11 Click [NEXT(N)].
14-6
The ST13B PATTERN is printed.

Example: ST13B PATTERN
14-7
13 Observe the center of each patch in the <1> to the <6> row of the printed ST13B PATTERN,
using a magnifying glass, and determine the number (SUB GAIN) that has the least row-by-row
horizontal streak unevenness (0.16 mm pitch) of the patches from (-6) to (+6).
Write down the number (SUB GAIN) determined on the film.
• The number to be determined here is the one that is attached to each density patch in the ST13B test
pattern.
Note
• When comparing patches, observe the center of each patch by scanning from the top or bottom with
the magnifying glass.
14 Specify the number (SUB GAIN) determined in step 13 in each entry field.
15 Click [NEXT(N)].
14-8
The ST13C PATTERN is printed.

Example: ST13C PATTERN
14-9
17 Measure the center of each patch in the <3> row of the printed ST13C PATTERN, using the
densitometer.
Write down the measurement result on the film as a base value.
18 Observe the center of each patch in the <1> row of the printed ST13C PATTERN, using the
densitometer, and determine the number (OFFSET) nearest to the base value measured in
step 17 of the patches from (01) to (13).
Write down the number (OFFSET) determined on the film.
• The number to be determined here is the one that is attached to each density patch in the ST13C test
pattern.
Note
• Compare the measured result of the <1> row with the standard value of the same number of the <3>
row.
14-10
19 Repeat the step 18 and measure the center of each patch in the <2>, <4>, and <5> rows, using
the densitometer, and determine the number (OFFSET) nearest to the base value measured in
step 17 of the patches from (01) to (13).
Write down the number (OFFSET) determined on the film.
20 Specify the number (OFFSET) determined in step 18 to step 19 in each entry field “OFFSET”.
21 Click the [END] button.
The window appears, confirming saving.
22 Click the [YES] button.
The “CORRECTION (STEP4)” window is closed. Then you will return to the maintenance menu window.
14-11
Work after setting

After setting each item, perform the following work.
• Print 1 sheet of flat pattern (D = 1.5) and hold it over light box to check the film for streak unevenness and
density unevenness.
• If the pitch unevenness of the image (0.16 mm) and the difference in density of the image in horizontal
direction are not corrected properly, make a correction again.
This is the end of the process of correcting unevenness.
14-12
14.2 Checking and Adjusting Image Data Writing Position

If the image data writing position deviates, you can adjust in the “PRODUCT SETUP” window of DRYPRO 832
Utility Tool.
Be sure to check and adjust the image data writing position after performing the following tasks:
Caution • When the exposure unit was replaced

• When the sub scan unit V-Sync sensor was replaced
14.2.1 Checking Image Data Writing Position

Check the image data for deviation by printing the frame pattern and measuring the difference between the
unexposed portions on both edges of the film.
1 Start DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool with reference to “15.1 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Start (Page 15-2)”.
2 Click the [TEST PRINT] button under “PRINT INFO.”.
The “TEST PRINT” window appears.
3 Select “FRAME” from “PRINT TYPE”.

The “FRAME” pallet appears.
4 Select the tray from which you want to print the frame pattern from the “TRAY SELECT” drop-
down list and specify “DENSITY” and “COPY COUNT”.
The FRAME pattern is printed from the selected tray.
14-13
6 Place film with the word “FRAME” is visible at the

lower left of the film and check the width of the
end of the film and the unexposed portions on
both sides.
• Check that the difference between unexposed
portions of the film on both sides is within ±0.5mm.
• Check that the unexposed portion at the end of the
film is 2mm.
This is the end of the process of checking the image data writing position.
• If the difference between unexposed portions of the film on both sides exceeds 0.5 mm, go to “14.2.2
Adjusting Main Scan OFFSET (Lateral) Writing Position (Page 14-15)” and adjust the Main Scan OFFSET
(lateral) writing position.
• If the unexposed portion at the end of the film is not within the range of 2mm ± 0.2mm, go to“14.2.3
Adjusting Sub Scan OFFSET (Vertical) Writing Position (Page 14-16)” and adjust the Sub Scan OFFSET
(vertical) writing position.
14-14
14.2.2 Adjusting Main Scan OFFSET (Lateral) Writing Position

If the difference between unexposed portions of the film on both sides exceeds 0.5mm, adjust the Main Scan
OFFSET (lateral) writing position.
1 Click the [PRODUCT SETUP] button under “SERVICE INFO.”.
The “PRODUCT SETUP” window appears.

2 Enter the serial number of this product in “SERIAL NO.”.
3 Enter the length of the unexposed portions measured in “14.2.1 Checking Image Data Writing Position
(Page 14-13)” in the “HD OFFSET” entry field after calculating using the following formula.
If the unexposed portion A is longer:
Example: A = 2.0mm, B = 0.4mm
• （B-A）/ 2 =（0.4 - 2.0）/ 2 = -0.8
Result: Enter a numeric value of HD OFFSET from which
“80” is subtracted.
If the unexposed portion A is shorter:
Example: A = 0.3mm, B = 1.5mm
• （B-A）/ 2 =（1.5 - 0.3）/ 2 = 0.6
Result: Enter a numeric value of HD OFFSET to which “60”
is added.
4 Click the [SAVE] button.
5 Click the [BACK] button.
The “PRODUCT SETUP” window is closed. Then you will return to the Maintenance Menu window.
6 Perform “14.2.1 Checking Image Data Writing Position (Page 14-13)” again and check that the
image writing position has been properly adjusted.
If it was not adjusted properly, perform “14.2.2 Adjusting Main Scan OFFSET (Lateral) Writing
Position (Page 14-15)” again.
Caution
This is the end of the process of adjusting the Main Scan OFFSET (lateral) writing position.
14-15
14.2.3 Adjusting Sub Scan OFFSET (Vertical) Writing Position

If the unexposed portion at the end of the film is not 2mm, adjust the Main Scan OFFSET (lateral) writing position.
3 Enter the length of the unexposed portions

measured in “14.2.1 Checking Image Data
Writing Position (Page 14-13)” in the “VD
OFFSET” entry field after calculating using the
following formula.
Example: C = 5.0 mm
• 2.0 - 5.0 = - 3.0
Result: Enter a numeric value of VD OFFSET from which
“300” is subtracted.
6 Perform “14.2.1 Checking Image Data Writing Position (Page 14-13)” again and check that the
image writing position has been properly adjusted.
If it was not adjusted properly, perform “14.2.3 Adjusting Sub Scan OFFSET (Vertical) Writing
Position (Page 14-16)” again.
Caution
This is the end of the process of adjusting the Sub Scan OFFSET (vertical) writing position.
14-16
14.3 Checking and Fine Tuning the Print Size

If there is variation between the Main Scan OFFSET and Sub Scan OFFSET, you can adjust in the “PRODUCT
SETUP” window of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
14.3.1 Checking Print Size

Print a FRAME pattern, and check the size.
1 Start DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool with reference to “15.1 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Start (Page 15-
2)”.
3 Select “FRAME” from “PRINT TYPE”.

The “FRAME” pallet appears.
4 Select the tray from which you want to print the frame pattern from the “TRAY SELECT”
dropdown list and specify “DENSITY” and “COPY COUNT”.
The FRAME pattern is printed from the selected tray.
14-17
6 Place the film so the word “FRAME” is visible at

the lower left of the film, and check the size.
• Check that the Main Scan OFFSET is 320±0.75mm.
• Check that the Sub Scan OFFSET is 400±0.75mm.
This is the end of the process of verifying the frame size.

• If the Main Scan OFFSET requires adjustment, proceed to“14.3.2 Main Scan OFFSET Adjustment (Page 14-
19)” and adjust the print size.
• If the Sub Scan OFFSET requires adjustment, proceed to “14.3.3 Sub Scan OFFSET Adjustment (Page 14-
20)” and adjust the print size.
14-18
14.3.2 Main Scan OFFSET Adjustment

If the Main Scan OFFSET requires adjustment, adjust it in the “PRODUCT SETUP” window of the DRYPRO 832
Utility Tool.
3 Change the settings in the “SIZE FINE TUNING (Horizontal)” entry field.
Example Calculation method Corresponds to
Example 1mm short “1” / 320 ×100 ×100 = 31.25 Add “31” to the value in “SIZE FINE TUNING
1 Round off to “31” (Horizontal)” and enter the new value.
Example 2mm long “2” / 320 ×100 ×100 = 62.5 Subtract “63” from the value in “SIZE FINE
2 Round off to “63” TUNING (Horizontal)” and enter the new value.

The “PRODUCT SETUP” window is closed. Then you will return to the “Maintenance Menu” window.
6 Perform “14.3.1 Checking Print Size (Page 14-17)” again, and check that the Main Scan
OFFSET has been adjusted correctly.
If it has not been adjusted correctly, perform “14.3.2 Main Scan OFFSET Adjustment (Page 14-
19)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of adjusting the Main Scan OFFSET.
14-19
14.3.3 Sub Scan OFFSET Adjustment

If the Sub Scan OFFSET requires adjustment, adjust it in the “PRODUCT SETUP” window of the DRYPRO 832
Utility Tool.
3 Change the settings in the “SIZE FINE TUNING (Vertical)” entry field.
Example Calculation method Corresponds to
Example Add “25” from the value in “SIZE FINE
1mm short “1” / 400 ×100 ×100 = 25
1 TUNING (Vertical)” and enter the new value.
Example Subtract “75” from the value in “SIZE FINE
3mm long “3” / 400 ×100 ×100 = 75
2 TUNING (Vertical)” and enter the new value.

6 Perform “14.3.1 Checking Print Size (Page 14-17)” again, and check that the Sub Scan
OFFSET has been adjusted correctly.
If it has not been adjusted correctly, perform “14.3.3 Sub Scan OFFSET Adjustment (Page 14-
20)”.
Caution
This is the end of the process of adjusting the Sub Scan OFFSET.
14-20
Chapter 15 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool
Chapter 15
Each item of the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool will be described below.
15.1 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Start.........................15-2

15.2 Print Queue/Delete ..........................................15-7
15.3 Print Condition .................................................15-9
15.4 Test Print ........................................................15-12
15.5 Custom Border Setup ....................................15-14
15.6 QC Pattern .....................................................15-15
15.7 Logo Setup.....................................................15-16
15.8 Film Data........................................................15-18
15.9 Film Setup......................................................15-20
15.10 Calibration Setup ...........................................15-23
15.11 System Setup.................................................15-25
15.12 Time Layout ...................................................15-28
15.13 System Reset.................................................15-30
15.14 Maintenance Schedule ..................................15-31
15.15 HPRO Setup ..................................................15-33
15.16 MEC Setup.....................................................15-36
15.17 Product Setup ................................................15-37
15.18 Image Adjust ..................................................15-39
15.19 Error History...................................................15-41
15.20 Densitometer..................................................15-42
15.20.1 Built-in Densitometer Calibration.............. 15-42
15.20.2 Confirming After Density Calibration ........ 15-49
15.20.3 Creating QC PATTERN BASE ................. 15-51
15.21 Data Initialize .................................................15-54
15.1 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Start

The method for starting up DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool will be described.
1 Select “Maintenance(M)” from the “Configuration” menu in the Printlink5 main window.
The “Password Input” window appears.
2 Enter “5678” in the “Password Input” window and

click the [OK] button.
The maintenance tool is started and the “Printlink5
Maintenance” main window is displayed.
15-2
3 Click on the “Imager” tab.

The “Imager” palette is displayed.
4 Double click the Ch line assigned to the DRYPRO 832 for which the settings are to be changed
in the Imager of the “Printlink5 Maintenance” main window.
The “Imager Output channel set screen” window appears.
5 Click the [Imager Setup] button.
The maintenance menu window of the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool is displayed under the service level authority.
15-3
DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool - Maintenance Menu Window (Service Level Authority)
1 3
4
7
5 9
6 10
8
11 13
12
14 16
15
20
17 23
18 24
19 25
21 22
26
The following items are shown in the Maintenance Menu window of the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
No. Item Description of Setting
1 DRYPRO 832 Click when an error occurs to view the “Countermeasures” window.
Icon
2 STATUS The currently status of the device is displayed.
3 TRAY INFO. The size and type of the packaged film will be displayed.
4 DRYPRO INFO. The name and IP address that are set will be displayed.
PRINT INFO
5 [PRINT QUEUE / When this button is clicked, the “PRINT QUEUE/DELETE” window will appear,
DELETE] button and the status and other information for each print job in the DRYPRO 832 can be
confirmed, or the print job may be deleted.
For more information, see “15.2 Print Queue/Delete (Page 15-7)”.
6 [PRINT When clicked, the “PRINT CONDITION” window will be displayed, and the
CONDITION] button print conditions for each connected diagnostic device can be set.
For more information, see “15.3 Print Condition (Page 15-9)”.
7 [TEST PRINT] When clicked, the “TEST PRINT” window opens, and various patterns can be
button printed.
For more information, see “15.4 Test Print (Page 15-12)”.
8 [CUSTOM BORDER When clicked, the “CUSTOM BORDER SETUP” window opens, and the border
SETUP] button size of the film can be set.
For more information, see “15.5 Custom Border Setup (Page 15-14)”.
9 [QC PATTERN] When clicked, the “QC PATTERN” window will open, and the standard values
button and results of the QC pattern can be confirmed.
For more information, see “15.6 QC Pattern (Page 15-15)”.
15-4
10 [LOGO SETUP] When clicked, the “LOGO SETUP” window opens, and the logo mark which is
button output to the film can be set.
For more information, see “15.7 Logo Setup (Page 15-16)”.
FILM INFO
11 [FILM DATA] button When clicked, the “FILM DATA” window opens, and the film data can be
confirmed by type.
For more information, see “15.8 Film Data (Page 15-18)”.
12 [FILM SETUP] When clicked, the “FILM SETUP” window opens, and settings can be made for
button the film loaded in the supply tray.
For more information, see “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)”.
13 [CALIBRATION When clicked, the “CALIBRATION SETUP” window opens, and the method for
SETUP] button automatically calibrating the density and the timing for calibration can be set.
For more information, see “15.10 Calibration Setup (Page 15-23)”.
IMAGER INFO
14 [SYSTEM SETUP] When clicked, the “SYSTEM SETUP” window opens, and the internal functions
button of the system can be set.
For more information, see “15.11 System Setup (Page 15-25)”.
15 [TIME LAYOUT] When clicked, the “TIME LAYOUT” window opens, and the display format of
button the date and time can be set.
For more information, see “15.12 Time Layout (Page 15-28)”.
16 [SYSTEM RESET] When clicked, the “SYSTEM RESET” window opens, and all jobs can be deleted.
button For more information, see “15.13 System Reset (Page 15-30)”.
SERVICE INFO
17 [MAINTENANCE When clicked, the “MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” window opens, and the
SCHEDULE] periodic inspection schedule can be initialized.
button For more information, see “15.14 Maintenance Schedule (Page 15-31)”.
18 [HPRO SETUP] When clicked, the “HPRO SETUP” window opens, and the constants for
button controlling the HPRO unit can be set.
For more information, see “15.15 HPRO Setup (Page 15-33)”.
19 [MEC SETUP] When clicked, the “MEC SETUP” window opens, and the MEC SETUP data can
button be set.
For more information, see “15.16 MEC Setup (Page 15-36)”.
20 [PRODUCT SETUP] When clicked, the “PRODUCT SETUP” window opens, and the constants for
button controlling all of the hardware can be set.
For more information, see “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)”.
21 [IMAGE ADJUST] When clicked, the “IMAGE ADJUST” window opens, and the constants for
button controlling the image quality unit can be set.
For more information, see “15.18 Image Adjust (Page 15-39)”.
22 [ERROR HISTORY] When clicked, the “ERROR HISTORY” window opens, and the history of errors
button which have occurred with DRYPRO 832 or Printlink5-IN can be confirmed.
For more information, see “15.19 Error History (Page 15-41)”.
23 [DENSITOMETER] When clicked, the “DENSITOMETER” window opens, and the built-in
button densitometer can be calibrated, and the setup density can be confirmed.
For more information, see “15.20 Densitometer (Page 15-42)”.
24 [CORRECTION] When clicked, the “CORRECTION” window opens, and calibration of the image
button variation can be performed.
For more information, see “14.1 Image Unevenness Correction (Page 14-2)”.
15-5
25 [DATA INITIALIZE] When clicked, the “DATA INITIALIZE” window opens, and the data such as the
button film data and the system setting total operating time can be returned to the factory
shipped condition.
For more information, see “15.21 Data Initialize (Page 15-54)”.
26 [BACK] button This completes the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
15-6
15.2 Print Queue/Delete

The status and information for print jobs in DRYPRO 832 can be confirmed, and print jobs can be deleted.
Set print parameters for each connected diagnostic device.
1 Refer to “15.1 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Start (Page 15-2)”, and open the maintenance menu
window of the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
2 Click the [PRINT QUEUE/DELETE] button in the “PRINT INFO”.
The “PRINT QUEUE/DELETE” window appears.

“PRINT QUEUE/DELETE” Window
The “PRINT QUEUE/DELETE” window contains the following items:
No. Setup Items Description of Setting

1 No. The print job number is shown.
2 RECEIVE TIME The date and time that the image was received is shown.
3 PAGE The page number of the output film attached to each diagnostic device is shown.
4 SIZE/TYPE The size and type of the film to be output will be displayed.
5 COPY The number of pages printed or copied will be shown.
6 FORMAT The number of frames is shown.
7 [DELETE] button The selected job is deleted.
15-7

8 [ALL DELETE] button All of the jobs displayed are deleted.
9 [BACK] button The “PRINT QUEUE/DELETE” window closes, returning to the Maintenance
Menu window of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
3 Click the [DELETE] button or the [ALL DELETE] button.

• When deleting jobs individually, select the job to be deleted from the job list, and click the [DELETE] button.
• To delete all of the jobs, click the [ALL DELETE] button.
The job will be deleted.

The “PRINT QUEUE/DELETE” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window of DRYPRO 832
Utility Tool.
15-8
15.3 Print Condition

Set print parameters for each connected diagnostic device.
2 Click the [PRINT CONDITION] button under “PRINT INFO”.
The “PRINT CONDITION” window appears.

“PRINT CONDITION” window
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
The “PRINT CONDITION” window contains the following setup items:

1 MANAGE INFO. Specify whether or not to print film management information on the upper part of
PRINT the film.
Default value: ON
ON Film management information is printed.
OFF Film management information is not printed.
2 REQUESTED Set the operation when image size is specified from the diagnostic device.
IMAGE SIZE Default value: ON
ON Print in the specified size.
OFF Print ignoring the specified size.
[Caution]:
If the image size specified from the diagnostic device exceeds the film size,
scale the image down and print.
The reduction ratio can be printed as stamp information by setting the
“REQUESTED IMAGE SIZE STAMP”.
15-9

3 REQUESTED Set the position of the stamp of the reduction ratio to be printed when image size
IMAGE SIZE specified from the diagnostic device exceeds the film size.
STAMP Default value: OFF
LEFT Stamp is printed on the left edge of the film.
RIGHT Stamp is printed on the right edge of the film.
OFF Stamp is not printed.
4 INTEGRAL Set the enlargement factor.
MULTIPLE RATIO Setting range: 1-15
Default value: 1
5 PATIENT INFO. Set the position for the patient information to be printed (position from the bottom
POSITION edge of the film).
Default value: 880
For more information, see “ Printing positions of logo, patient information, and
stamp characters (Page 15-11)”.
6 PATIENT INFO. Set the patient information print size (character height).
SIZE Default value: 330
7 STAMP Set the position of the stamp to be printed (position from the bottom edge of the
POSITION film).
Default value: 530
8 STAMP Set the stamp print size (character height).
SIZE Default value: 330
9 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “PRINT CONDITION” to return to the DRYPRO
832 Utility Tool Maintenance Menu window.
10 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “PRINT CONDITION” to return to the DRYPRO
3 Set each item according to the status of use in the facility.

Save the changes and close the “PRINT CONDITION” to return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance
Menu window.
15-10
Printing positions of logo, patient information, and stamp

characters
Details of the position of patient information to be printed, patient information print size, position of stamp to be
printed, and stamp printing size are as follows:
15-11
15.4 Test Print

Various patterns will be test printed.

“TEST PRINT” window
1 6
2
7
3
8,9
4
5
10 11
The “TEST PRINT” window contains the following items:

1 SMPTE Select when printing a SMPTE pattern.
2 FLAT Select when printing a FLAT pattern.
3 FRAME Select when printing a FRAME pattern.
4 PRODUCT Select when printing a PRODUCT pattern.
5 QC Select when printing a QC pattern.
6 TRAY SELECT Select the tray for test printing.
7 COPY COUNT Input the number of copies to be printed.
Default value: 1
8 FORMAT Select the number of frames for layout on a single film.
Default value: 1
Note, the number of frames setting is only shown when “SMPTE” is selected as
the print type.
9 DENSITY Input the density value.
Default value: 150
Note, the density setting is only shown when “FLAT”, “FRAME” or
“PRODUCT” is selected as the print type.
10 [PRINT] button Printing is performed at the set conditions.
15-12

11 [BACK] button The “TEST PRINT” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu
window of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
3 Set each of the print type and other items for test printing.

Printing will be performed according to the settings.

The “TEST PRINT” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
15-13
15.5 Custom Border Setup

Set the film border size.
This item must be set only if “CUSTOM” was selected under “Border size” in the “Input Channel set
screen” window of Printlink5-IN.
Note
2 Click the [CUSTOM BORDER SETUP] button under “PRINT INFO.”.
The “CUSTOM BORDER SETUP” window appears.

“CUSTOM BORDER SETUP” window
3 4
The “CUSTOM BORDER SETUP” window contains the following items:

1 TOP/BOTTOM SIZE Set the top and bottom margins of film.
Setting range: 0.1mm units
Default value: 200
2 LEFT/RIGHT SIZE Set the top and bottom margins of film.
Setting range: 0.1mm units
Default value: 0
3 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “CUSTOM BORDER SETUP” window, and
return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance Menu window.
4 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “CUSTOM BORDER SETUP” window to
return to DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance Menu window.

Save the changes and close the “CUSTOM BORDER SETUP” window, and return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool
Maintenance Menu window.
15-14
15.6 QC Pattern
The QC pattern will be displayed according to the value read by the DRYPRO 832 built-in densitometer.
2 Click the [QC PATTERN] button under “PRINT INFO”.
The “QC PATTERN” window is displayed.

“QC PATTERN” window
2
3
4
The “QC PATTERN” window contains the following items.

1 TRAY SELECT Select the desired supply tray.
2 BASE The reference value from STEP1-STEP4 and the reference value set date/time will
（STEP1-4） be displayed.
3 RANGE Displays the tolerance range of the reference value.
（STEP1-4）
4 [RESET] button Resets the reference value.
5 QC PATTERN Up to 60 QC patterns will be displayed, beginning at the most recent.
Values with “OK” results will be shown in blue, while values with “NG” results will
be shown in red.
6 [CSV FILE The QC pattern results will be output as a CSV formatted file.
OUTPUT] button
7 [BACK] button The “QC PATTERN” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window
of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
3 Verify the QC pattern results and output to a file if necessary.

The “QC PATTERN” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
15-15
15.7 Logo Setup

The logo mark output to the film can be set.
• Save the original logo data into the specified folder of the PC, in order to be backed up.
• The logo mark cannot be set from the maintenance tool.
Caution
• If the stamp area and logo mark output position overlap one another, the stamp area takes
precedence over the logo mark output position.
• Settings by CH cannot be made, so one setting is made for each system.
• To use the “OVERLAY” function of Printlink5-IN, use the Printlink5-IN logo settings, and set
the DRYPRO 832 logo data output to “OFF”.
Logo data
Logo data that meets the following requirements must be prepared beforehand and saved to Printlink5-IN.
Item Requirements
File format bmp format
File size (recommended • 86 × 86 pixels (maximum 110 pixels)　
value) • Any aspect ratio may be selected.
Tone Grayscale 8 bits
Logo output position

Logo mark is output to“15.3 Print Condition (Page 15-9)” in “ Printing positions of logo, patient information,
and stamp characters (Page 15-11)”.
2 Click the [LOGO SETUP] button under “PRINT INFO”.

The “LOGO SETUP” window appears.
15-16
“LOGO SETUP” window
4 5
The “LOGO SETUP” window contains the following items.
No. Setup Items Description of Settings

1 LOGO OUTPUT Select whether or not to output the logo mark to the film.
2 [LOGO FILE A window for selecting the logo mark will open. Select the logo mark to be output.
SETUP] button
3 Preview Display A preview of the selected logo mark appears.
Field
4 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “LOGO SETUP” window to return to the DRYPRO
5 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “LOGO SETUP” window to return to the
DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance Menu window.
3 Based on the use of the facility, turn the logo mark output ON/OFF and specify the logo mark.

Save the changes and close the “LOGO SETUP” window to return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance
Menu window.
15-17
15.8 Film Data

Display film data of DRYPRO 832 by film size type, CH, and a combination of film size type and CH.
The total count can be displayed daily, weekly or monthly.
Calibrations and test prints from DRYPRO 832 are not counted.
Note
2 Click the [FILM DATA] button under “FILM INFO.”.
The “FILM DATA” window appears.

“FILM DATA” window
3 4
The “FILM DATA” window contains the following items.

1 SELECT COUNT Select the counting units to display from the pull-down.
TYPE Initial setting: Daily
Daily Displays the daily count results.
Weekly Displays the weekly count results.
Monthly Displays the monthly count results.
2 Count data display The count data appears according to the selected counting unit.
field
3 [CSV FILE Download the count results to a PC as a CSV file.
OUTPUT] button
4 [BACK] button Close the “FILM DATA” window to return to the Maintenance Menu window.
15-18
3 Verify the counting data or output to a file as necessary.

The “FILM DATA” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
15-19
15.9 Film Setup

Set for the film loaded in the supply tray.
2 Click the [FILM SETUP] button under “FILM INFO”.

The “FILM SETUP” window appears.
“FILM” window
The following window shows the case where an optional Lispl-832 is not connected.
Note If Lispl-832 is not installed, set items under “Tray 1” on the left side of the window.
If Lispl-832 is installed, items on the right hand side of the window are enabled. Perform settings on
Lispl-832 in items under “Tray 2”.
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6
7 8
The “FILM SETUP” window contains the following items:

1 TRAY USE Set the supply tray to be used by DRYPRO 832.
Default value:
TRAY 1: ON
TRAY 2: OFF
ON Supply tray is used.
OFF Supply tray is not used.
If an optional Lispl-832 is used, set the radio button for “TRAY USE” under
“TRAY 2” to “ON”.
15-20

2 FILM SIZE Select the size of film loaded from pulldown and set for each supply tray.
Default value: 14 × 17
The following film sizes can be selected:

• “14 × 17” : 14 × 17 inch-film
• “14 × 14” : 14 × 14 inch-film
• “11 × 14” : 11 × 14inch-film
• “10 × 12” : 10 ×12 inch-film
• “ 8 ×10” : 8 × 10 inch-film
3 FILM TYPE Select the type of film loaded from the pulldown and set for each supply tray.
Default value :B
B Blue (Standard density film)
C Clear (Standard density film)
HB HBlue (High density film)
4 COUNT Set the number of sheets of film loaded for each supply tray.
Default value: 0
5 SHEETS OF Select the number of sheets in a package used in DRYPRO 832 from the pulldown
PACKAGE and set for each supply tray.
Default value: Standard package
125 PACK 125-sheet package
50 PACK 50-sheet package
6 TRAY SERIES Set operation if film of the same size and type is loaded in both Tray 1 (supply tray)
USE and Tray 2 (Lispl-832).
Default value: ON
ON Empty notice to the input device is not made when there is film of
the same size and type in Tray 2 (Lispl-832), when the film runs out
in Tray 1 (supply tray).
Same operation is executed when the film count is vice versa for
Tray 1 and Tray 2.
Empty notice is displayed in the operation panel of the DRYPRO
832.
OFF Empty notice to the input device is made even when there is film of
the same size and type in Tray 2 (Lispl-832), when the film runs out
in Tray 1 (supply tray).
Same operation is executed when the film count is vice versa for
Tray 1 and Tray 2.
7 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “FILM SETUP” window to return to the DRYPRO
8 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “FILM SETUP” window to return to the
Settings can be changed under the following conditions.
Caution • For a supply tray with [TRAY USE] set to [OFF]:

• Film size, film type, number of sheets of film, and number of sheets of package cannot
be changed.
• If an unprocessed job remains in DRYPRO 832:
• No change can be made to any setting.
15-21
If Lispl-832 is used, the [TRAY USE] setting must be changed.

Caution Change settings after adding Lispl-832 to DRYPRO 832.
If settings are changed first, an error may occur.
If the value entered is incorrect, the following message appears.

Note • The input range is not correct.
Enter the correct value again.

Save the changes and close the “FILM SETUP” window to return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance
Menu window.
15-22
15.10 Calibration Setup

Set the method for performing automatic density calibration and the calibration timing.
2 Click the [CALIBRATION SETUP] button under “FILM INFO”.

The “CALIBRATION SETUP” window appears.
“CALIBRATION SETUP” window
1
2
3
4
5 6
The “CALIBRATION SETUP” window contains the following items:

1 CALIBRATION Set the time at which calibration is performed after loading film.
UPON FILM SET Initial Setting: NORMAL
NORMAL Calibration is performed after registering the first queue.
AT ONCE Calibration is performed immediately after loading film.
2 SCHEDULED Set the method for automatically correcting density after a given period of time.
CALIBRATION Initial Setting: NONE
MESSAGE A message prompting to perform calibration after a given period of
time is displayed.
AUTO Calibration is automatically performed after a given period of time.
NONE Periodic calibration is not performed.
3 DEFAULT CALIB. Set the time intervals at which automatic calibration is carried out.
TIME Initial Setting: 2160
Setting range: 1-9999
4 ELAPSED HOURS Displays the elapsed time since last calibration.
5 [SAVE] Button Save the changes and close the “CALIBRATION SETUP” window to return to the
6 [BACK] Button Discard the changes and close the “CALIBRATION SETUP” window to return to
15-23
3 Set a constant value as necessary.

Save the changes and close the “CALIBRATION SETUP” window to return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool
15-24
15.11 System Setup

Perform setup for the operation of the internal system of DRYPRO 832.
2 Click the [SYSTEM SETUP] button under “IMAGER INFO”.
The “SYSTEM SETUP” window appears.

“SYSTEM SETUP” window
9
1
2 10
3 11
4 12
5
6
7
8
13 14
The “SYSTEM SETUP” window contains the following items:

1 NAME Set the name of DRYPRO 832.
When connecting two DRYPRO 832 units, do not set the same name.
Number of characters that can be set: within 16 one-byte alphanumeric characters
Default value: DRYPRO MODEL 832
2 IP ADDRESS Set the IP address of DRYPRO 832.
Default value: 192.168.20.161
3 SUBNET MASK Set the subnet mask of DRYPRO 832.
Default value: 255.255.255.0
4 DEFAULT Set the default gateway of DRYPRO 832.
GATEWAY Default value: 192.168.0.1
5 MAC ADDRESS The MAC address of DRYPRO 832 appears.
15-25

6 POWER OFF Set the power OFF mode interfaced with Printlink5-IN.
MODE Default value: OFF
OFF The power OFF mode is not used.
ON (with The power OFF mode is used.
temperature (Since the temperature inside the main unit is maintained even after
control) power is turned OFF, the warm-up period during the start-up
process will be approximately 3 minutes.)
ON (without The power OFF mode is used.
temperature (Since the temperature control inside the main unit is not performed
control) after power is turned OFF, the warm-up period during the start-up
process will be approximately 10 minutes.)
For more information, see “ About Power OFF Mode (Page 15-27)”.
7 SLEEP MODE Set the sleep mode timer to ON/OFF when the DRYPRO 832 is not used, and set
TIMER the period of time before shifting into sleep mode.
Default value: OFF
ON The sleep mode timer function is used.
OFF The sleep mode timer function is not used.
sec Enter the period of time before shifting into sleep mode. This value
can only be set when the sleep mode timer function is “ON”.
Default value: 120 min
8 BUZZER Set the operation unit buzzer sound ON/OFF when an error or empty occurs in
DRYPRO 832.
Default value: ON
ON The operation unit buzzer sounds for approximately 1 second.
OFF The operation unit buzzer does not sound.
9 LOG WRITE Set the log output status.
MODE Default value: NORMAL
NORMAL Output in normal mode.
DETAIL Output in detail mode.
10 TOTAL The total operating time of DRYPRO 832 is shown.
OPERATING TIME Default value: 0
(Display only)
11 TOTAL PRINTED The total number of sheets output to DRYPRO 832 is shown.
SHEETS The total number of printed sheets includes the number of sheets of film output
(Display only) during calibration performed when the machine was installed.
Default value: 0
12 VERSION The currently active software version is displayed.
(Display only) When the software is upgraded, confirm using this value.
Default value: Varies depending on shipment time.
13 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “SYSTEM SETUP” window to return to the
14 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “SYSTEM SETUP” window to return to

Save the changes and close the “SYSTEM SETUP” window to return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance
Menu window.
If the network settings of “IMAGER NAME” were changed, restart the DRYPRO 832.
15-26
Clicking the [BACK] button while changing the settings (including the case of resetting the settings
changed once) displays a window to confirm whether or not to save the settings.
Note
[Yes] button: Clicking this button saves the changed settings and returns to the main window.
[No] button: Clicking this button returns to the main window without saving the changed
settings.
About Power OFF Mode

When the power OFF mode is enabled (ON), DRYPRO 832 runs as shown below by operating Printlink5-IN.
• When Printlink5-IN is shut down, DRYPRO 832 interfaced with Printlink5-IN also shuts down.
• When Printlink5-IN is started, DRYPRO 832 which is interfaced with Printlink5-IN also starts up.
Even if the power OFF mode is set to “ON”, the power OFF mode will not operate immediately
after shutting down Windows without selecting [Shutdown] from [Operation] menu in the
Caution Printlink5-IN main window. In this case, DRYPRO 832 will be shutdown in about 10 minutes
after Printlink5-IN has been powered OFF.
15-27
15.12 Time Layout

Set the date/time layout of the stamp to be printed on a film.
2 Click the [TIME LAYOUT] button under “IMAGER INFO.”.
The “TIME LAYOUT” window appears.

“TIME LAYOUT” window
3
4
6 7
The “TIME LAYOUT” window contains the following items:

1 DATE LAYOUT The date format set under “DATE FORMAT” in No.3 and the date layout set in
(Display only) “DATE SEPARATOR” of No.4 appear.
2 TIME LAYOUT The time layout set under “TIME FORMAT” below appears.
(Display only)
3 DATE FORMAT Select and set the date display format from the pulldown.
This setting takes effect in the display of the DRYPRO 832 main unit and in the film
stamp characters.
Default value: YYYY-MMM-DD
The following formats can be selected:

YYYY MM DD Year + Month + Day (Month is written in numeric characters.)
MM DD YYYY Month + Day + Year (Month is written in numeric characters.)
DD MM YYYY Day + Month + Year (Month is written in numeric characters.)
YYYY MMM DD Year + Month + Day (Month is written in alphabetic characters)
MMM DD YYYY Month + Day + Year (Month is written in alphabetic characters.)
DD MMM YYYY Day + Month + Year (Month is written in alphabetic
characters.)
For information about month notation, see “ Month Notation (Page 15-29)”.
15-28

4 DATE Select and set the date separator from the pulldown.
SEPARATOR This setting takes effect in the display of the DRYPRO 832 main unit and in the film
stamp characters.
Default value: －（HYPHEN）
The following separators can be selected.

“/”: Slash Example: 2006/01/01
“-”: Hyphen Example: 2006-01-01
“.”: Period Example: 2006.01.01
“ ”: Space Example: 2006 01 01
5 TIME FORMAT Select and set the time display format from the pulldown.
This setting takes effect in the display of the DRYPRO 832 and in the film stamp
characters.
Default value: hh: mm
The following formats can be selected:
hh: mm Hour + Minute (24-hour notation)
tt hh: mm AM/PM +Hour + Minute (12-hour notation)
hh: mm tt Hour + Minute + AM/PM (12-hour notation)
6 [SAVE] Button Save the changes and close the “TIME LAYOUT” window to return to the
7 [BACK] Button Discard the changes and close the “TIME LAYOUT” window to return to the

Save the changes and close the “TIME LAYOUT” window to return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance
Menu window.
Month Notation
The month notation set in the date format is shown below.
Notation January February March April May June

Numeric notation (MM) 01 02 03 04 05 06
Alphabetic notation JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN
(MMM)
Notation July August September October November December

Numeric notation (MM) 07 08 09 10 11 12
Alphabetic notation JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
(MMM)
15-29
15.13 System Reset

Deletes all jobs in the DRYPRO 832.
2 Click the [SYSTEM RESET] button under “IMAGER INFO”.
The “SYSTEM RESET” window appears.

“SYSTEM RESET” window
1 2
The “SYSTEM RESET” window contains the following items.

1 [EXECUTE] Button All jobs will be deleted.
2 [BACK] Button The “SYSTEM RESET” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu
window of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
3 Click the [EXECUTE] button.

All of the jobs will be deleted, the “SYSTEM RESET” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window
of DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
15-30
15.14 Maintenance Schedule

This section provides information about how to initialize the periodic inspection schedule of DRYPRO 832.
2 Click the [MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE] button under “SERVICE INFO”.
The “MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” window appears.

“MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” window
1 2
3 4
5 6
8
7 9
The “MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” window contains the following items:

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
1 PRINTED The number of sheets of film printed to date since the last periodic inspection is displayed.
SHEETS Default value: 0
2 STANDARD The standard number of printed sheets of film before the next periodic inspection is displayed.
FILTER
3 ELAPSED DAYS The number of days elapsed since the date of last periodic inspection on which the
filter was changed.
Default value: 0
4 STANDARD DAYS The standard number of days that has elapsed will be displayed, based on when the
filter will be changed next.
Default value: 730
5 PRINTED The number of sheets of film printed since the date of the last periodic inspection
SHEETS when the filter was changed will be displayed.
Default value: 0
6 STANDARD The number of films output will be displayed as the basis for the next filter change.
7 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” window to return
to DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance Menu window.
8 [RESET] button All information about the elapse of the time is reset.
9 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” window to
return to the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance Menu window.
15-31
3 Click the [RESET] button.

All information about the elapse of the time is reset.
Save the changes and close the “MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” window to return to DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool
15-32
15.15 HPRO Setup

Check or change the constants for controlling the heat process unit.
Each constant for HPRO setup is set to an optimum value at the factory. Do not change unless
otherwise instructed.
Caution
2 Click the [HPRO SETUP] button under “SERVICE INFO”.
The “HPRO SETUP” window appears.

“HPRO SETUP” window - “HPRO” tab
The “HPRO” tab in the “HPRO SETUP” window contains the following items.

1 OFFSET (V1-V4) The offset value for each item of the heat process temperature control is displayed.
Display range: -250 - 250
2 HEAT BASE (V2, The temperature measured from each section of the heat process guide is displayed.
V4, V5 QC)
15-33

3 NORMAL The set temperature of the heat process guide (V1-V4) under normal conditions is
(V1-V4) displayed.
Display range: 900-1400（0.1 ℃ units）
Default: V1 1000（900 - 1100）
Default: V2 1265（1200- 1400）
Default: V3 1265（1200 - 1400）
Default: V4 1000（900 - 1100）
4 SLEEP MODE The set temperature of the heat process guide (V1-V4) in sleep mode is displayed.
(V1-V4) Display range: 1200-1300（0.1 ℃ units)
Default: V1 750（700 - 1100）
Default: V2 1250（1000 - 1250）
Default: V3 1250（1000 - 1250）
Default: V4 850（700 - 1000）
5 SETUP DATA The parameter used for density correction control is displayed.
Display range: 0-300
6 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “HPRO SETUP” to return to DRYPRO 832 Utility
Tool Maintenance Menu window.
7 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “HPRO SETUP” to return to DRYPRO 832
Utility Tool Maintenance Menu window.
“HPRO SETUP” window - “MEC” tab
The “MEC” tab in the “HPRO SETUP” window contains the following items.

1 OFFSET (V1-V4) The offset value for each item of the heat process temperature control is displayed.
Display range: -250 - 250
15-34

2 HEAT BASE (V2, The temperature measured from each section of the heat process guide is displayed.
V4, V5 QC)
3 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “HPRO SETUP” to return to DRYPRO 832 Utility
Tool Maintenance Menu window.
4 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “HPRO SETUP” to return to DRYPRO 832
3 Set each item as necessary.

Save the changes and close the “HPRO SETUP” to return to DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance Menu window.
15-35
15.16 MEC Setup

Checking or changing the settings can be done by mechanical control.
This function is currently not used.
Caution In the future, it may be used when the software is upgraded.

Do not change unless instructed to do so.
2 Click the [MEC SETUP] button under “SERVICE INFO”.

The “MEC SETUP” window appears.
“MEC SETUP” window
15-36
15.17 Product Setup

The constants can be checked or changed to control each hardware.
Each constant for product setup is set to an optimum value at the factory. Do not change unless
otherwise instructed.
Caution
2 Click the [PRODUCT SETUP] button under “SERVICE INFO”.

“PRODUCT SETUP” window
1
2
3
4
9
5
6
7
8
10 11
The “PRODUCT SETUP” window contains the following items.

1 SERIAL NO. Displays the serial number of each DRYPRO 832.
2 SIZE FINE Set the adjusted value of the image size in the H direction.
TUNING(Horizontal) Setting range: 9900-10100
3 SIZE FINE Set the adjusted value of the image size in the V direction.
TUNING (Vertical) Setting range: 9000-11000
4 SIZE FINE TUNING Set when the accuracy using an input device to specify the requested image size
(REQ. IMG) (Requested image size specification) results is insufficient.
Setting range: 9500 to 10500
Ex.) Even though the horizontal size was specified as 300 mm using an input
device, the imager outputs an image with a horizontal size of 303 mm.
• Set “SIZE FINE TUNING (REQ. IMG)” to 99% (setting: “9900”).
5 HD OFFSET Set the adjusted value of Main Scan OFFSET image writing position.
6 VD OFFSET Set the adjusted value of Sub Scan OFFSET image writing position.
15-37

7 LENS Set a combination of lenses with reference to the exposure unit.
Setting range: OFF, 1 - 4
8 MAGNIFICATION Set the adjusted value of the image size in the H direction with reference to the
ADJUST spacer size.
Setting range: 0.0-5.0
9 FREQUENCY Set the frequency modulation parameters (01- 06)
MODULATION Setting range: 0-7
1-6
10 [SAVE] Button Save the changes and close the “PRODUCT SET UP” to return to DRYPRO 832
11 [BACK] Button Discard the changes and close the “PRODUCT SET UP” window to return to
3 Set each item as necessary.

Save the changes and close the “PRODUCT SETUP” to return to DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance Menu
window.
15-38
15.18 Image Adjust

Set the constant for adjusting the image quality.
Each constant for image adjustment is set to an optimum value at the factory. Do not change
unless otherwise instructed.
Caution
2 Click the [IMAGE ADJUST] button under “SERVICE INFO”.
The “IMAGE ADJUST” window appears.

“IMAGE ADJUST” window
1
2
3
4
5 6
The “IMAGE ADJUST” window contains the following items.

1 PATCH DENSITY Specify whether or not to control density using the density patch.
CORRECTION Initial Setting: 20mm
20 mm Density control using a 20 mm density patch is performed.
10 mm Perform density control using a 10 mm density patch.
OFF Density control is not performed.
2 PATCH FF Set a parameter (PATCH FF) for controlling the patch.
Initial Setting: 50
3 PATCH GAIN Set a parameter (PATCH GAIN) for controlling the patch.
Initial Setting: 40
4 PATCH INTERVAL Set a parameter (PATCH INTERVAL) for controlling the patch.
Initial Setting: 1440
5 [SAVE] button Save the changes and close the “IMAGE ADJUST” window to return to DRYPRO
6 [BACK] button Discard the changes and close the “IMAGE ADJUST” window to return to
15-39
3 Set a constant value as necessary.

Save the changes and close the “IMAGE ADJUST” window to return to DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance
Menu window.
15-40
15.19 Error History

A history of the errors that have occurred in DRYPRO 832 and PC is displayed.
Error history of a maximum of 20 occurrences can be displayed.
2 Click the [ERROR HISTORY] button under “SERVICE INFO.”.
The “ERROR HISTORY” window appears.

“ERROR HISTORY” window
1 2
The “ERROR HISTORY” window contains the following items.

1 DRYPRO 832 A history of the errors that have occurred in DRYPRO 832 is displayed.
main unit
2 Server PC A history of the errors that have occurred in the server PC is displayed.
3 ERROR HISTORY The time that an error occurred, error code displayed on the operation unit, and error
display field message displayed on the operation unit will appear.
4 [BACK] button Close the “ERROR HISTORY” window to return to the Maintenance Menu
window.

The “ERROR HISTORY” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window of DRYPRO 832 Utility
Tool.
15-41
15.20 Densitometer
• “DENSITOMETER” is a function which is different from the “Density Correction” (performed
when printing calibration patterns). Take care not to confuse the two.
Caution
• Since the densitometer of DRYPRO 832 is factory-calibrated using the calibrated external
densitometer, it can be used as is without adjusting the density especially after its
installation. However, if you wish to adjust the film density to the external densitometer
possessed by the facility, perform the densitometer calibration procedure once using the
external densitometer.
• When calibrating the densitometer, it should be noted that the density correction data at the
time of installing DRYPRO 832 cannot be restored after performing the densitometer
calibration procedure even once.
Recommended conditions for external densitometer

Caution Use the calibrated densitometer of any one of the following models.
If densitometer calibration is performed using a model of densitometer other than the following
or one that is not calibrated, the accuracy of density cannot be guaranteed.
• TM-5 (manufactured by Ihara Electronic Industry)
• X-Rite301 (manufactured by X-Rite)
15.20.1 Built-in Densitometer Calibration
The built-in densitometer calibration is performed when there is a density problem when the image
quality is confirmed using the QC pattern. Refer to the setup manual about confirming the image quality
Note of a QC pattern.
2 Click the [DENSITOMETER] button under “SERVICE INFO.”
The “DENSITOMETER” window appears.
3 Click the [DENSITOMETER] button.
The “DENSITOMETER (STEP1)” window appears.
15-42
4 Choose the tray for which you want to perform densitometer calibration, and then click the
[PRINT] button.
Precautions when the optional Lispl-832 is installed:

Caution • If the same film type is used for Tray 1 and Tray 2, by performing the densitometer calibration
once and specifying one tray, calibration is performed for the other tray as well. If different
sizes are used, select the tray into which larger film is loaded.
• If the film type in Tray 1 and Tray 2 are different, select the tray according to the following
table.
Combination of film types Target tray for densitometer calibration
BLUE CLEAR Tray into which BLUE film is loaded

film film
BLUE HIGH BLUE Tray into which BLUE film and HIGH BLUE film are loaded (*)
film film
CLEAR HIGH BLUE Tray into which CLEAR film and HIGH BLUE film are
film film loaded (*)
(*) Perform density calibration for each tray.
Example: Calibration pattern

One sheet of calibration pattern is printed.
15-43
5 Click the [Next(N)] button.

Example: Densitometer calibration pattern
15-44
7 Measure the density of the printed densitometer

calibration patterns (01) - (12), using an external
densitometer.
When measuring the film density, make sure

to standardize the measuring surface of film
Caution (front/back side).
If the measuring surface is not standardized,
the results of measuring the film density may
vary, depending on the model of the
densitometer.
For details of how to measure the density, see the

instruction manual that comes with the
Note densitometer.
The “DENSITOMETER(STEP3)” window appears.
9 Enter a value equals to the density measured in Step 7, which was increased by 100-fold, in
one-byte numbers in [01] - [12] in the “DENSITOMETER (STEP3)” window,
Example:
• If the (01)st density value is 0.21, enter “21” in the 01 field.
• If the (12)th density value is 3.16, enter “316” in the 12 field.
Entering and saving an abnormal or incorrect value can cause density correction data
corruption, making it impossible to perform density correction properly. Take care not to enter
Caution an abnormal or incorrect value.
• Example of abnormal or incorrect values
• Values deviating greatly from the measured value
• The density value was 1.25, but “215” was entered by mistake.
• The density value was 1.25, but an abnormal value of “400” was intentionally entered.
15-45

The settings will be saved.
• After entering the density value, make sure to click the [SAVE] button to save the settings.
If the settings are not saved, proper densitometer calibration procedure may not be
Caution performed.
• When clicking the [SAVE] button, the entered density value may be misjudged as being
abnormal or incorrect value and an error may be displayed. In such a case, perform either of
the following:
• Check the density value and reenter a correct value.（From Step 9)
• Redo the densitometer calibration procedure from the beginning.（From Step 2)
15-46
Example: Calibration pattern

13 Click the [END] button.
The “DENSITOMETER (STEP4)” window will close, returning to the “Maintenance Menu” screen.
15-47
14 If Lispl-832 is installed, perform calibration on another tray.
• If the tray selected in Step 4 comes first, perform calibration on Tray 2.

• If the tray selected in Step 4 comes second, perform calibration on Tray 1.
Note
This completes the process of calibrating the densitometer.

Continue to “15.20.2 Confirming After Density Calibration (Page 15-49)” and confirm after the density has been
calibrated.
15-48
15.20.2 Confirming After Density Calibration

Check the set density value by comparing the reading given by the densitometer built into DRYPRO 832 with the
measured value of the densitometer calibration pattern entered in the Densitometer Calibration window.
1 Click the [DENSITOMETER] button under “SERVICE INFO.”
The “DENSITOMETER” window appears.
2 Click the [DENSITOMETER ADJUST] button.
The “DENSITOMETER ADJUST” window appears.
3 Check the results by comparing the internal density values with the external density values
from the (01)st to the (12)th.
If a correction was made to BLUE film or CLEAR film, check the results field on the “NORMAL FILM” side; or if
a correction was made to HIGH BLUE film, check the results field on the “HIGH DENSITY FILM” side.
（If the difference in the (01)st to the (12)th values is within ±3, the result of correction is judged as being
appropriate, and “OK” will be shown in the results column.
If the value difference is ±4 or greater, NG will be shown in the results column. Perform “15.20.1 Built-in
Densitometer Calibration (Page 15-42)” again.
15-49
No. Setup Items Description of Description of Settings

Settings
1 NORMAL FILM INTERNAL The results of measuring with a built-in densitometer are
shown, when a correction is made to BLUE film or CLEAR
film.
2 EXTERNAL The results of measuring with an external densitometer are
shown, when a correction is made to BLUE film or CLEAR
film.
3 RESULT If the result of comparing the internal density value with the
external density value is within ± 3, “OK” will be shown; or
if it is ± 4 or greater, ”NG” will be shown.
4 HIGH DENSITY INTERNAL The results of measuring with a built-in densitometer are
FILM shown, when a correction is made to HIGH BLUE film.
5 EXTERNAL The results of measuring with an external densitometer are
shown, when a correction is made to HIGH BLUE film.
6 RESULT If the result of comparing the internal density value with the
external density value is within ± 3, “OK” will be shown; or
if it is ± 4 or greater, “NG” will be shown.
The “DENSITOMETER ADJUST” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window.
This completes the process of checking the set density value.
15-50
15.20.3 Creating QC PATTERN BASE

When the QC pattern is printed, the average of the first 3 readings of the built-in densitometer becomes the QC
PATTERN BASE. As the printed QC PATTERN is always registered as the base value for image checking or density
checking, the base value is created by printing 3 QC PATTERNS after resetting the base value.
1 Click the [QC PATTERN] button.
The “QC PATTERN” window appears.
2 Click the [RESET] button.
The base value for the previous QC PATTERN is reset.
15-51
You will return to the “Maintenance Menu” window.
4 Click the [TEST PRINT] button in the “PRINT INFO.” section of the maintenance menu window
of the DRYPRO 832 Utility tool.
5 Set the “QC” radio button ON.

The “QC” pallet appears.
6 Select the tray to use to print the QC PATTERN from the “TRAY SELECT” pull-down list.
7 Enter “3” into the “COPY COUNT” entry field.
15-52
Example: QC PATTERN (14 x17 in.)

3 QC PATTERNS are printed from the selected tray.
9 Click the [QC PATTERN] button.
The “QC PATTERN” window is displayed.
10 Check that an appropriate density value (blue) is displayed in [STEP1] ~ [STEP4].
You will return to the “Maintenance Menu” window. This is the end of the process of creating the QC PATTERN base value.
15-53
15.21 Data Initialize

Performing a DATA INITIALIZE operation resets the following data of DRYPRO 832 to their factory defaults.
• Job Data
• Film total
• Count
• Elapsed days
• Printed sheets
• QC Pattern results
• Error history
2 Click the [DATA INITIALIZE] button under “SERVICE INFO”.
The “DATA INITIALIZE” window appears.

“DATA INITIALIZE” window
The “DATA INITIALIZE” window contains the following buttons.

1 [EXECUTE] Reset Film data, Maintenance schedule, System setup total uptime, System setup
button total output hours to their factory defaults.
2 [BACK] button Close “DATA INITIALIZE” window to return to the Maintenance Menu window.
3 Click the [EXECUTE] button.

Data of each item will be reset to its factory default.

The “DATA INITIALIZE” window closes, returning to the Maintenance Menu window of DRYPRO 832 Utility
Tool.
15-54
Chapter 16 MainteTool
Chapter 16
This chapter describes various maintenance using the service PC.
16.1 MainteTool Outline ...........................................16-2

16.2 Setting up Network...........................................16-3
16.2.1 Connecting Service PC .............................. 16-3
16.2.2 Setting up Network for Service PC............. 16-4
16.2.3 Sharing the Mainte_Tool Folder ................. 16-6
16.3 How to Start the MainteTool .............................16-9
16.4 Upgrade Information ......................................16-12
16.5 Backing up Setup...........................................16-15
16.5.1 Backup Method up to V1.01..................... 16-15
16.5.2 Backup Method for V1.02 and Later ........ 16-18
16.5.3 Backing Up To MECH EEPROM.............. 16-25
16.6 Restoring Settings..........................................16-26
16.6.1 Restore Method up to V1.01 .................... 16-26
16.6.2 Restore Method for V1.02 and Later........ 16-29
16.7 Collecting Logs ..............................................16-33
16.8 Collecting Job Data........................................16-37
16.9 IMAGER MEC I/O TEST................................16-39
16.10 IMAGER PRINT I/O TEST .............................16-49
16.10.1 Measuring Laser Beam Intensity.............. 16-51
16.1 MainteTool Outline

Access the Printlink5-IN shared folder from the service PC connected to the facility's network and use the
MainteTool in that shared folder to perform the various maintenance work.
Basic configuration
Use the Mainte_Tool folder shown in the diagram on the right above as a shared folder.
Caution The Mainte_Tool folder is not shared on the network by default, so the settings need to be
changed. For more information, see “16.2.3 Sharing the Mainte_Tool Folder (Page 16-6)”
Use the MainteTool in the following cases:

When installing
• When backing up the setup data after installation
• When updating the application software version for DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN (as necessary)
• When restoring DRYPRO 832 or Printlink5-IN settings data from a backup file that has been saved (as
necessary)
• When gathering DRYPRO 832 or Printlink5-IN logs (as necessary)
When repairing
• When upgrading the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN application software
• When collecting logs in the event of an error
• When an error is detected in the image data
• When checking the condition of detection and operation after replacing a sensor or motor
• When the parts related to the exposure unit were replaced
• When loading setup data from a backup file
16-2
16.2 Setting up Network

Set up a network to allow the service PC and the facility's network to be connected each other.
Workflow
Set the items following the course shown below.
Item Outline
Connecting Service PC Connect the service PC to the facility's network via LAN cable.
For more information, see “16.2.1 Connecting Service PC (Page 16-3)”.
Setting up Network for Set up the network to allow the service PC and the facility's network to be
Service PC connected each other.
For more information, see “16.2.2 Setting up Network for Service PC (Page 16-4)”.
Sharing the Mainte_tool The Mainte_Tool folder is not shared on the network by default, so change the
Folder settings.
For more information, see “16.2.3 Sharing the Mainte_Tool Folder (Page 16-6)”.
Completion of network
settings
Requirements
The procedures in this manual require the following tools:
No. Tools No. Tools

1 Service PC × 1 unit 2 LAN cable × 1
16.2.1 Connecting Service PC

Connect the service PC to the facility's network via LAN cable.
1 Connect the service PC as shown below.
Tool
This is the end of the process of connecting the service PC.

Now continue to “16.2.2 Setting up Network for Service PC (Page 16-4)” and set up a network for service PC.
16-3
16.2.2 Setting up Network for Service PC

Set up the network to allow the service PC and the facility's network to be connected each other.
1 Start the service PC.

WindowsXP starts and the desktop appears.
2 Click the [start] button and choose the [Control Panel] command from the start menu.
The “Control Panel” window is displayed.
3 Double-click the “Network Connections” icon.
The “Network Connections” window appears.
4 From the popup menu, which appears after right-clicking on the “Local Area Connection” icon,
select the [Properties] command.
“Local Area Connection Properties” window is displayed.
16-4
5 In the [General] panel, under “This connection uses the following items:” click on “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP)”.
When “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” is selected, the text is highlighted.
If the [General] panel is not displayed, click the [General] tab to display the [General] panel.
Note
6 Click the [Properties] button.
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window is displayed.
7 Set the “Use the following IP address:” radio button to ON and adjust the “IP address” and
“Subnet mask” to the facility's network settings.
8 Click the [OK] button.
The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window is closed. Then you will return to the “Local Area Connection
Properties” window.
9 Click the [OK] button in the “Local Area Connection Properties” window.
The “Local Area Connection Properties” window is closed. Then you will return to the “Network Connections” window.
10 Close the “Network Connections” window and the “Control Panel” window.
This is the end of the process of setting up the network for the service PC.
Now continue to “16.2.3 Sharing the Mainte_Tool Folder (Page 16-6)” and change the folder settings.
16-5
16.2.3 Sharing the Mainte_Tool Folder

The default setting is to not share the Mainte_Tool folder over the network, so change this setting.
When the Mainte_Tool folder is shared, MainteTool can be started from a maintenance PC connected to the
network.
Do not share folders other than the Mainte_Tool folder.
Caution
1 The Konicaminolta folder in the C drive of the

Printlink5-IN PC expands as shown in the figure
on the left.
2 Right mouse click on the Mainte_Tool folder and

select “Sharing and Security” from the popup
menu.
The “Mainte_Tool Properties” window is displayed.
3 Select the “Sharing” tab.
The “Sharing” palette appears.
The type of “Shared” pallet differs depending on the status of the “Use simple file sharing
(Recommended)” checkbox in the WindowsXP [Control Panel] – [Folder Options] – [Display] pallet.
Note
• If there is a checkmark in the “Use simple file sharing (Recommended)” box, the “ is checked”
window is displayed. Proceed to “ When is checked (Page 16-7)”.
• If there is no checkmark in the “Use simple file sharing (Recommended)” box, the “is not checked”
window is displayed. Proceed to “ When is not checked (Page 16-8)”.
16-6
When is checked
1 Place a check mark in the “Allow network users to change the file” and “Share folders on the
network” checkboxes in “Sharing and Security on the network” and click the [Apply] button.
The Mainte_Tool folder will be shared on the network, and the “Mainte_Tool properties” screen will close.
This completes the process of sharing the Mainte_Tool folder.

Continue to“16.3 How to Start the MainteTool (Page 16-9)” and start the MainteTool.
16-7
When is not checked
1 Place a checkmark in the “Maximum allowed” boxes in “Share this folder” and “User limit”, and
click the [Permissions] button.
The “Sharing” palette appears.
2 Select “Everyone” in “Group or user names”, and place a checkmark in the full control “Allow”
box.
3 Click the [Apply] button, and then click the [OK] button.
The Mainte_Tool folder will be shared on the network, and the “Mainte_Tool properties” screen will close.
This completes the process of sharing the Mainte_Tool folder.

Continue to “16.3 How to Start the MainteTool (Page 16-9)” and start the MainteTool.
16-8
16.3 How to Start the MainteTool

1 Enter the IP address of the PC to which DRYPRO 832 is connected in the “Computer name:”
field and click the [Search] button.
The PC to which DRYPRO 832 is connected appears on the right hand side of the window.
2 Double-click the displayed PC.
The shared folder appears.
3 Click the shared folder.
The MainteTool program files appear.
4 Click “Mainte Tool.exe”.
Do not move or delete the dll, ini file, Temp, and Log folder.
Caution
The MainteTool is started and the password entry window is displayed.
16-9
5 Enter “5678” in the “Password” entry field and click the [OK] button.
After the “Please wait....” window is displayed, the MainteTool menu window is displayed.
MainteTool Menu Window
3 4
5 6
7 8
9
The MainteTool menu window contains the following items:
No. Setup Item Description of Setting

Information connection
1 Information The serial numbers and IP addresses of the PC and imager connected to the facility's
connection network are displayed.
Menu
2 UPGRADE Upgrade the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN.
For more information, see “16.4 Upgrade Information (Page 16-12)”.
3 SETUP BACKUP Save the contents set in DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN as a backup file.
For more information, see “16.5 Backing up Setup (Page 16-15)”.
4 SETUP RESTORE Load the contents set in DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN from the backup file.
For more information, see “16.6 Restoring Settings (Page 16-26)”.
5 LOG Collect and load DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-In logs into service PC.
For more information, see “16.7 Collecting Logs (Page 16-33)”.
6 JOB DATA Collect and load the image data during the specified period into service PC.
For more information, see “16.8 Collecting Job Data (Page 16-37)”.
16-10

7 IMAGER MEC I/O Conduct motor and sensor operation test by operating MEC (mechanical control)
TEST when loading parts were replaced.
For more information, see “16.9 IMAGER MEC I/O TEST (Page 16-39)”.
8 IMAGER PRINT Conduct exposure unit operation test when parts of the exposure unit were replaced.
I/O TEST For more information, see “16.10 IMAGER PRINT I/O TEST (Page 16-49)”.
9 [EXIT] Button Close the main window and exit the MainteTool.
This is the end of the process of starting the MainteTool.

Perform the each operation as needed.
16-11
16.4 Upgrade Information

Upgrade the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN application software.
5-
5-
1 Connect the service PC to the facility's network with reference to “16.2 Setting up Network
(Page 16-3)”.
2 Copy the distributed, upgraded execution file to the service PC.
3 Refer to “16.3 How to Start the MainteTool (Page 16-9)” and start the MainteTool.
The MainteTool menu window appears.
4 Click the [UPGRADE] button.
The window in which you can select the file you want to open is displayed.
16-12
5 Select the execution file copied in step 2 and click the [Open] button.
The upgrade confirmation window is displayed.
6 Check the currently displayed version and click the [OK] button if it is correct.
After the message “Please wait a while....” is displayed, upgrading takes place.
Upgrading requires approximately 2 minutes.

Note
Upon completion of upgrading, a window appears prompting you to restart.
16-13
After the message “Please wait a while....” is displayed, the upgraded PC is restarted.
This is the end of the process of upgrading.
16-14
16.5 Backing up Setup

Save the contents set in DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN as a backup file.
Method for backup is different depending on the software version of the DRYPRO 832.
Note • Refer to “16.5.1 Backup Method up to V1.01 (Page 16-15)” if the software version is up to V1.01.
• Refer to “16.5.2 Backup Method for V1.02 and Later (Page 16-18)” if the software version is V1.02
or later.
16.5.1 Backup Method up to V1.01
(Page 16-3)”.
3 Click the [SETUP BACKUP] button.
The window in which you can select the device to obtain backup is displayed.
4 Place a checkmark in the box of the device for obtaining backup under “Select Target”.
You can also select multiple devices.

Note
16-15
The message “Please wait a while...” appears and collection of backup files starts.
Once collection of backup files has been completed, the window below appears.
The window in which you can specify the backup name and the destination to save is displayed.
7 Specify the “Location where files are stored” and “File name”, and then click the [SAVE] button.
16-16
The backup compressed files organized into a folder structure below will be saved in the specified location.
The file name of the saved file can be changed but use a file name that can be distinguished
from DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN setup files.
Caution
Example:
DRYPRO 832
The setup file of DRYPRO 832 is output in the ini file.
No. Display Contents Description

1 Date The date on which the backup file was obtained is named as year, month,
day, hour, minute, and second.
2 Equipment Name “D832” represents DRYPRO 832 and the subsequent number “1” represents
the first DRYPRO 832 connected.
3 Serial Number Represents the serial number of DRYPRO 832 of which backup file was
obtained.
Printlink5-IN
The setup file of Printlink5-IN is output in the zip file (compressed file).

2 Equipment Name “PL5” represents Printlink5-IN.
3 Serial Number Represents the serial number of Printlink 5-IN of which backup file was
obtained.
This is the end of the process of backing up setup.
16-17
16.5.2 Backup Method for V1.02 and Later
(Page 16-3)”.
3 Click the [SETUP BACKUP] button.
The window in which you can select the device to obtain backup is displayed.
4 Place a checkmark in the checkbox of the device for obtaining backup under “Select Target”.
• Display will not be active if the applicable device is not running.
Note •
Printlink5-IN checkbox will not be active if BuildIN is installed on the server PC.
• You can also select multiple devices.
• Select the type of backup when the backup target is DRYPRO 832.
• CF Data : Obtains the backup data to restore (required).
• Setup Data : Obtains data related to installation (optional).
16-18
The message “Please wait a while...” appears and collection of backup files starts.
Once collection of backup files has been completed, the window below appears.
The window in which you can specify the backup name and the destination to save is displayed.
7 Specify the “Location where files are stored” and “File name” and then click the [OK] button.
16-19
The backup compressed files organized into a folder structure below will be saved in the specified location.
The file name of the saved file can be changed but use a file name that can be recognized as
DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN setup files.
Caution
Example 1: DRYPRO 832

The setup file of DRYPRO 832 is output in the ini file.
For information about the setting items that are output, refer to “ List Of SetupData (Page 16-21)”.

obtained.
Example 2: DRYPRO 832

The DRYPRO 832 backup file (CFData) is output in the tgz file.
For information about the setting items that are output, refer to “ List Of CFData (Page 16-22)”.
00001_200704111535_D832_1_CFData.tgz
1 2 3

obtained.
day, hour, and minute.
3 Log Type Shows the type of log.
• D832_1 : DRYPRO 832 primary
• D832_2 : DRYPRO 832 secondary
Do not change the first 5 characters (Serial Number) of the name of the DRYPRO 832 backup
file (CFData). If changed, it will not restore properly.
Caution
Example 3: Printlink5-IN
The Printlink5-IN settings file is output in the zip file (compressed file).
200704111535_PL5_00001_SetupData.zip
1 2 3

day, hour, and minute.
2 Log Type “PL5” represents Printlink5-IN.
3 Serial Number Represents the serial number of Printlink5-IN of which backup file was obtained.
16-20
List Of SetupData
Item Information
Setting Print Parameters Printing management information
(File: PrintCondition01.csv)
Specifying image size
Enlargement at integral multiplication ratio
Print position of patient information (position from bottom edge of film)
Print size of patient information (character height)
Print position of stamp (position from bottom edge of film)
Setting Stamp Logo Logo output
(File: StampLogo.csv)
Setting Border Custom Film margin (top)
(File: BorderCustom.csv)
Film margin (bottom)
Film margin (right)
Film margin (left)
Setting Tray Use tray 1
(File: TraySetup.csv)
Tray 1 size
Tray 1 type
Tray 1 number of sheets of package
Use tray 2
Tray 2 size
Tray 2 type
Continuous use of tray
Setting Calibration Setting calibration during film loading
(File: CaribrationSetup.csv)
Setting periodic calibration
Standard interval of periodic calibration (time)
Setting System Machine name
(File: SystemSetup.csv)
Power OFF mode
Sleep mode
Sleep mode switching time
Error/Empty tone
Log obtain mode
Setting Date Layout Date format
(File: DataLayoutSetup.csv)
Date separator
Time format
Setting Periodic Inspection Standard number of printed sheets until periodic inspection 1
(File: MaintenanceSetup.csv)
Standard number of hours until changing filter
Standard number of printed sheets until changing filter
Setting Product Device serial number
(File: ProductSetup.csv)
Density Correction Correction ON/OFF
Patch FF correction angle
Patch gain
Standard interval for patch correction
16-21
List Of CFData
Item Information
Setting Print Parameters Selecting input device
(File: PrintCondition01.csv)
Printing management information
Specifying image size
Outputting image size specifying stamp
Enlargement at integral multiplication ratio
Print position of patient information (position from bottom edge of film)
Print size of patient information (character height)
Print position of stamp (position from bottom edge of film)
Print size of stamp (character height)
Setting Stamp Logo Logo output
(File: StampLogo.csv)
Setting Border Custom Film margin at top of film (viewbox area)
(File: BorderCustom.csv)
Film margin at bottom of film (text area)
Film margin (top)
Film margin (bottom)
Film margin (right)
Film margin (left)
Trim width
Trim BLACK
Trim density CLEAR
Border density BLACK
Border density CLEAR
End of film clear width
Text area width for enlarged text
Setting Tray Use tray 1
(File: TraySetup.csv)
Tray 1 size
Tray 1 type
Use tray 2
Tray 2 size
Tray 2 type
Continuous use of tray
Setting Calibration Setting calibration during film loading
(File: CaribrationSetup.csv)
Setting periodic calibration
Standard interval of periodic calibration (time)
16-22
Item Information
Setting System Machine name
(File: SystemSetup.csv)
Power OFF mode
Sleep mode
Sleep mode switching time
Error/Empty tone
Log obtain mode
Setting Date Layout Date format
(File: DataLayoutSetup.csv)
Date separator
Time format
Setting Periodic Inspection Standard number of printed sheets until periodic inspection 1
(File: MaintenanceSetup.csv)
Standard number of hours until changing filter
Standard number of printed sheets until changing filter
Setting Product Device serial number
(File: ProductSetup.csv)
Print size fine adjustment (vertical)
Print size fine adjustment (horizontal)
Print size fine adjustment (dimensions of the requested image)
HD position adjustment
VD position adjustment
Non-uniform lens correction
Frequency modulation data 1-6
Magnification correction data
Setting MEC MEC setup data 1-30
(File: MecSetup.csv)
Setting HPRO Normal temperature (preheat)
(File: HeaterSetup.csv)
Normal temperature (temperature rising)
Normal temperature (slit)
Normal temperature (cold removal)
Sleep mode temperature (preheat)
Sleep mode temperature (temperature rising)
Sleep mode temperature (slit)
Sleep mode temperature (cold removal)
Spare parameters 1-30
Setting Correction Established value for phase
(File: CorrectionSetup.csv)
Established value for gain
Established value for offset
Established value for sub phase
Established value for sub gain
Test gain
Correction LUT normal 1 side to 6 sides
Correction LUT mammography 1 side to 6 sides
Lens correction LUT
Correction output value (base density)
Film size to print pattern
16-23
Item Information
Film type to print pattern
Established/tentative flag for normal
Established/tentative flag for mammography
Setting Resin Lens Correction Resin lens combination number
(File: LenzCorrectSetup.csv)
Lens correction LUT (0)-(4)
Densitometer Factor Densitometer correction factor for normal
(File: DensitometerData.csv)
Densitometer correction factor for mammography
Established/tentative flag for normal
Established/tentative flag for mammography
Setting Densitometer Correction Film type to print pattern
(File: DensitometerSetup.csv)
Internal densitometer digital value for normal
Internal densitometer digital value for mammography
Internal densitometer density value for normal
Internal densitometer density value for mammography
Internal densitometer input value for normal
Internal densitometer input value for mammography
Setting Film Tone Correction Correction ON/OFF
(File: DensitometerOffset.csv)
Film density conversion LUT (blue → clear)
Film density conversion LUT (blue → mammography)
16-24
16.5.3 Backing Up To MECH EEPROM

Backup to the MECH EEPROM is performed automatically, and it is used to protect data during the replacement of
MECH board or the compact flash (CF).
Backed Up Data
• Serial Number
• Tray 1 film count
• Tray 2 film count
• Total output count
• Periodic inspection 1, output count
• Filter change, output count
• Filter change, previous inspection date and time
• Total hours of operation
The following message will be displayed on the DRYPRO 832 with a buzzer during startup, when the MECH board
or compact flash (CF) is replaced.
W h i c h　i s　e x c h a n g e d ?
M E C ：r e s e t　C F ：e n t e r
Press the [reset] button to startup using the data in the EEPROM.
Press the [enter] button to startup using the data in the compact flash (CF).
The following message will be displayed and DRYPRO 832 will be turned OFF when no entry is made within 3
minutes.
T u r n　O F F　t h e　p o w e r
16-25
16.6 Restoring Settings

Restore the setup data of DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN from the saved backup file as necessary, for example,
when you replaced the control box.
Method for restore is different depending on the software version of the DRYPRO 832.
Note • Refer to “16.6.1 Restore Method up to V1.01 (Page 16-26)” if the software version is up to V1.01.
• Refer to “16.6.2 Restore Method for V1.02 and Later (Page 16-29)” if the software version is V1.02
or later.
16.6.1 Restore Method up to V1.01
(Page 16-3)”.
3 Click the [SETUP RESTORE] button.
The window in which you can select the device for restore and the file for restore is displayed.
4 Place a checkmark in the box of the device to restore under “Select Target”.

Note • Printlink5-IN checkbox will not be active if BuildIN is installed on the server PC.
5 Click the [Select] button for the device to restore.
The window in which you can select the file to restore is displayed.
16-26
6 Select the file to restore and click the [Open] button.
To restore multiple devices, select each file.

Note
The confirmation window appears.
7 Check the device and file to restore again and click the [OK] button if everything is OK.
16-27
Click the [OK] button and verify the source file and the selected device again by checking the
serial number and IP address of the destination device of restored data before performing a
Caution restore.
After the message “Please wait....” is displayed, the restore is performed.
When the restore is successfully completed, the following window appears.
After the MainteTool quits, Printlink5-IN is restarted.
This is the end of the process of restoring setup.
16-28
16.6.2 Restore Method for V1.02 and Later
(Page 16-3)”.
3 Click the [SETUP RESTORE] button.
The window in which you can select the device for restore and the file for restore is displayed.
4 Place a checkmark in the checkbox of the device to restore under “Select Target”.

Note • Printlink5-IN checkbox will not be active if BuildIN is installed on the server PC.
5 Click the [SELECT] button for the device to restore.
The window in which you can select the file to restore is displayed.
16-29
6 Select the file to restore and click the [Open] button.
To restore multiple devices, select each file.

Note

First 5 characters in the name of the DRYPRO 832 backup file (CFData) represents the serial
number. The following error dialog is displayed when the Serial Number of the file and the serial
Caution number of the DRYPRO 832 to be restored is different.
Check the serial number in the label on DRYPRO 832, and if it is different from ① in above
diagram, correct the “SERIAL NO.” in PRODUCT SETUP, and perform from step 5 again.
For information on PRODUCT SETUP, refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)”.
If the serial number checked on the label of DRYPRO 832 is same as ① of above diagram, go back to step 5,
and select the backup file with same serial number as the one on the label of the DRYPRO 832.
16-30
Click the [OK] button and verify the source file and the selected device again by checking the
serial number and IP address of the destination device of restored data before performing a
Caution restore.
Error dialog may be displayed when the [OK] button is clicked in above diagram.
Caution
If the backup file for DRYPRO 832 is not valid
Check the serial number of the target file, and repeat from step 5.
Connection error with DRYPRO 832
Check the network connection status between the server PC and the DRYPRO 832.
Refer to the installation manual regarding network connection.
Network error on server PC
Check if the network cable is connected to the server PC.

Refer to the installation manual regarding network connection.
16-31
After the message “Please wait a while....” is displayed, the restore is performed.
When the restore is successfully completed, the following window appears.
Restored device is restarted.
Executed Restarting Device

Executed restore of server Server PC and DRYPRO 832
PC and DRYPRO 832
Executed restore of server PC only Server PC
Executed restore of DRYPRO 832 Server PC and DRYPRO 832
only
This is the end of the process of restoring setup.
16-32
16.7 Collecting Logs

Collect and load DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN logs into service PC.
Collect the appropriate log in the following procedure when there is a problem with DRYPRO 832, Printlink5-IN, or
MainteTool.
(Page 16-3)”.
3 Click the [LOG] button.
The window in which you can select the period and device to collect LOG is displayed.
4 Enter the time when collection of logs starts in the “FROM” entry field and the time when
collection of logs ends in the “TO” entry field.
5 Place a checkmark in the box of the device to collect logs under “Select Target”.

If the version of software for DRYPRO 832 is up to V1.01
If the version of software for DRYPRO 832 is V1.02 or later
16-33
The message “Please wait...” appears and collection of logs starts.
When the collection of logs is finished, the window in which you can specify the destination to save is displayed.
The message “Please wait...” appears and the process of saving the log compressed files in the specified folder
starts.
The log compressed files organized into a folder structure below will be saved in the specified location.
The file name of the saved file can be changed but use a file name that can be distinguished from
DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN setup files.
Note
16-34
Example:
DRYPRO 832

1 Date The date on which the log was obtained is named as year, month, day, hour,
minute, and second.
3 Serial Number Represents the serial number of DRYPRO 832 of which log was obtained.
When the above zip file (compressed file) is decompressed, the logs of DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN are
expanded as shown below:
The txt file is a log of Printlink5-IN while the file compressed in the tar format is a log file of DRYPRO 832.
When the compressed log file of DRYPRO 832 decompressed, it is expanded in the txt file as with the log file of
Printlink5-IN.
When the process of saving files is finished, the window appears, showing the completion.
16-35
Example:
Printlink5-IN

minute, and second.
2 Equipment Name “PL5” represents Printlink5-IN.
3 Serial Number Represents the serial number of Printlink5-IN of which log was obtained.
When the above zip file (compressed file) is decompressed, the log of Printlink5-IN is expanded in the txt file.
Example:
MainteTool
20070704201859_MAINTE_01234_Log.zip
1 2 3

minute, and second.
2 Equipment Name “MAINTE” represents MainteTool.
3 Serial Number Represents the serial number of DRYPRO 832 of which log was obtained.
When the above zip file (compressed file) is decompressed, the log of MainteTool is expanded in the txt file.
The window to select the period and device for collecting the LOG is closed and the screen returns to the
MainteTool menu window.
This is the end of the process of collecting logs.
16-36
16.8 Collecting Job Data

Collect job data processed by Printlink5-IN into service PC.
(Page 16-3)”.
3 Click the [JOB DATA] button.
The window in which you can select the period to collect job data is displayed.
4 Enter the time when collection starts in the “FROM” entry field and the time when collection
ends in the “TO” entry field.
The message “Please wait a while...” appears and collection of job data starts.
When the collection of job data is finished, the window in which you can specify the destination to save is displayed.
16-37
A screen for designating a backup name and save destination is displayed.
The message “Please wait a while...” appears and the process of saving job data in the specified folder starts.
The job data files organized into a folder structure below will be saved in the specified location.
No. Description
1 The job data will be saved.
jobdata 1
Close the window to select the period to collect job data to return to the MainteTool menu window.
This is the end of the process of collecting job data.
16-38
16.9 IMAGER MEC I/O TEST

Conduct motor and sensor operation test by operating MEC (mechanical control) when loading parts were replaced.
• When you check each loading operation or sensor ON/OFF with the exterior cover opened,
remove the supply tray so that film that is already loaded in the supply tray won’t be affected.
Caution
• When performing work, be careful not to get your clothes or fingers caught in driving parts.
• With the loading part driven in one position, you can drive other loading parts. However, it
should be noted that inconsistent operation could cause equipment failure.
• After operating any loading, DRYPRO 832 may be unstable. Turn it off once and initialize it.
This section describes the procedure for displaying the “MEC I/O TEST” window.
(Page 16-3)”.
3 Click the [IMAGER MEC I/O TEST] button.
The window in which you can select device for conducting an I/O test is displayed.
4 Place a checkmark in the box of the device for conducting I/O test under “Select Target”.
The “IMAGER MEC I/O TEST” window appears.
16-39
“IMAGER MEC I/O TEST” window - [Status] tab, [A/D port] tab
2
1
5
6
7
3
4
8 9 10
The “IMAGER MEC I/O TEST” window contains the following items:
No. Item Description
1 Sensor display Contains tabs from [Status1] to [Status5]. Each tab displays 20 sensor names and
field statuses.
For information on status name, see “ MEC I/O Test Sensor Name List (Page
16-46)”.
The status of sensor, ON (detected) or OFF (undetected), is displayed .
2 Other information Information on AD Port 1 to AD Port 14 is displayed in decimal number (0 - 1024).

field The temperature sensor is displayed by converting to the temperature.
3 UNIT Select the unit for performing MEC I/O test.

For more information, see “ Test Number List (Page 16-42)”.
4 LOAD Select load and operation.

For more information, see “ Test Number List (Page 16-42)”.
Load that you can select varies, depending on the unit you choose.
5 Test No. Enter the test number for the I/O test.
You can enter a value from 0 to 239.
For information on test number, see “ Test Number List (Page 16-42)”.
6 MEC status display Displays the status of MEC.
READY MEC is ready.
BUSY MEC is busy.

Even if you press the [RUN] button, it does not work when MEC is
busy.
7 ErrorNo. If an error occurred in MEC, the error code is displayed in four digits.
8 [RUN] button Send the test number entered to DRYPRO 832 via “ID” and run a MEC I/O test
with the specified test number.
Even if you click the [RUN] button, it does not work when the MEC status display
shows “BUSY”.
9 [STOP] button Stops the MEC I/O test being run.
16-40
10 [END] button Ends the MEC I/O test.

Pressing the [END] button causes MEC to start initialization.
“IMAGER MEC I/O TEST” window - [Status] tab, [Setup] tab
3
2
1
4
[Setup] tab
1 SETUP DATA You can display and change the setup data necessary for MEC I/O test.
SETUP Number of operations
DATA 1 The appropriate test only is valid.
For more information, see “ Test Number List ”.
SETUP Nonuse
DATA 2 - 8
2 INPUT When the [SETUP] button is pressed, the value entered is sent to DRYPRO 832.
3 DISPLAY The value received in the response is sent.
4 [SETUP] Button The value entered in the entry field is sent to DRYPRO 832.
When the MEC status display shows BUSY, you cannot press the button.
6 Perform MEC I/O test as necessary.
16-41
Test Number List

Single loading operation
Unit name: CH1 SUPPLY UNIT
Test Load name Description of operation

No.
CH1 PICKUP MOTOR
1 Low Speed 50 mm/s Drives at low transport speed (50 mm/s).
2 High Speed 100 mm/s Drives at high transport speed (100mm/s).
3 Stop Causes the motor to stop running.
CH1 UP_DW PL MOTOR (CH1 Supply Up/Down motor)
4 Upward Moves up the up/down plate.
5 Downward Moves down the up/down plate.
CH1 TRAY LOCK SOL (CH1 supply tray lock solenoid)
6 Activate 1 second (ON for a given time 1 second) ON (1 second)
CH1 PICKUP ESC MOTOR (CH1 Pickup ESC Motor)
7 To Home Position Moves to the home position.
8 To Transport Position Moves to the transport position.
9 Rotate continuously Rotates continuously.
10 Stop Stops operation.
Unit name: CH2 SUPPLY UNIT

No.
CH2 PICKUP MOTOR
CH1 UP_DW PL MOTOR (CH2 Supply Up/Down motor)
14 Upward Moves up the up/down plate.
15 Downward Moves down the up/down plate.
CH2 TRAY LOCK SOL (CH2 Supply Tray Lock Solenoid)
16 Activate 1 second (ON for a given time 1 second) ON (1 second)
CH2 PICKUP ESC MOTOR (CH2 Pickup ESC Motor)
18 To Nip Position Moves to the transport position.
TRANSPORT MOTOR
Nip OPEN-CLOSE MOTOR
16-42

No.
25 To Nip Position Moves to the nip position.
Unit name: JUSTIFICATION UNIT

No.
JUSTIFICATION MOTOR
28 Low Speed 33 mm/s Drives at low transport speed (33mm/s).
29 Middle Speed 50 mm/s Drives at medium transport speed (50 mm/s).
31 Reverse at 106.8 mm/s Drives at reverse rotation.
(Reverse at 106.8 mm/s (4000 Hz))
Unit name: SUB SCAN UNIT

No.
SUB SCAN MOTOR
33 Scan speed 33 mm/s Drives at exposure transport speed (33 mm/s).
SUB SCAN NIP MOTOR
36 To Strong Nip Position * Operating from the home position brings to the strong
nip position.
37 Rotate 90 degrees Rotates 90 degrees from the present position.
Unit name: HEAT PROCESS /MAIN

No.
HEAT PROCESS MOTOR
40 Trans speed 32.5 mm/s Drives at heat process transport speed (32.5 m/s).
HEAT PROCESS FAN1
43 Stop Causes the fan to stop running.
HEAT PROCESS FAN2
INSULATION&SUP FAN
16-43

No.
DEODORANT FAN
Unit name: DENSITOMETER

No.
DENSITOMETER LED
50 ON Turns on the densitometer LED.
51 OFF Turns off the densitometer LED.
Unit name: EXIT TRANSPORT UNIT

No.
EXIT TRANSPORT MOTOR
52 Low speed 32.5mm/s Drives at low transport speed (32.5mm/s).
53 High Speed 100mm/s Drives at high transport speed (100mm/s).
Unit name: OPERATION PANEL

No.
BUZZER
55 Sound 1 second (ON for a given time) ON (1 second)
LED BACKLIGHT (LCD backlight)
56 Turn OFF 1 second (OFF for a given OFF (1 second)
time)
Open/Enter LED (Open/Enter LED)
57 ON Turns on the LED.
58 OFF Turns off the LED.
Reset/Cancel LED (Reset/Cancel LED)
STATUS BLUE LED (Status blue LED)
STATUS ORANGE LED (Status orange LED)
16-44
Continuous Motion
Unit name: UNIT OPERATION (Continuous motion)
Test Load name Description of motion

No.
100 CH1 SUPPLY MOTION No multiple sheets
(CH1 Supply Motion) (Supply, justification, and sub scan unit are needed.)
101 CH1 PICKUP MOTION Multiple sheets allowed (Supply unit is needed.)
(CH1 Pickup Motion)
102 CH1 EXPOSURE TO EXIT No multiple sheets (Supply, heat processing, and ejection
(CH1 Exposure - Exit Motion) unit are needed: The densitometer does not read.)
110 CH2 SUPPLY MOTION No multiple sheets
(CH2 Supply Motion) (Supply, justification, and sub scan unit are needed.)
111 CH2 PICKUP MOTION Multiple sheets allowed (Supply unit is needed.)
(CH2 Pickup Motion)
112 CH2 EXPOSURE TO EXIT No multiple sheets (Supply, heat processing, and ejection
(CH2 Exposure - Exit Motion) unit are needed: The densitometer does not read.)
16-45
MEC I/O Test Sensor Name List

Input port
No. Name Symbol Details
1 CH1 PICKUP HP SENS PS11 Pickup roller home position sensor
(CH1 Pickup HP Sensor)
2 CH1 FILM PICK SENS PS12 Sensor that detects the height of film (pickup
(CH1 Film Pick Sensor) position)
3 CH1 BAG DETECT SENS PS13 Sensor that detects the presence or absence of the
(CH1 Bag Detect Sensor) barrier bag
5 CH1 UP_DW PL HP SENS PS15 Sensor that detects the home position of the up/
(CH1 Up/Down Plate HP Sensor) down plate (on which film is placed)
6 CH1 TRAY SENS PS16 Sensor that detects the presence or absence of the
(CH1 Tray Sensor) tray
7 RIGHT COVER SENS PS8 Sensor that detects the opening or closing of the
(Right Cover Sensor) right cover
9 POS_ REG FILM SENS PS1 Transport sensor in the justification unit
(Film Detection Sensor)
10 V-SYNC SENS PS2 Transport sensor in the sub scan unit
(V-SYNC Sensor)
11 SUBSCAN NIP HP SENS PS3 Sensor that detects the home position of the nip in
(Sub Scan Nip HP Sensor) the sub scan unit.
12 SUBSCAN ENT SENS PS4 Transport sensor in the sub scan unit
(Sub Scan Entrance Sensor)
13 FILTER SENS PS5 Sensor that detects the presence or absence of the
(Deodorant Filter Detection Sensor) deodorant filter
14 DENSITO ENT SENS PS6 Transport sensor at the densitometer inlet
(Densitometer Entrance Sensor)
15 FRONT COVER SENS PS7 Sensor that detects the opening or closing of the
(Front Cover Sensor) front cover
17 CH2 PICKUP HP SENS PS18 Pickup roller home position sensor
(CH2 Pickup HP Sensor)
18 CH2 FILM PICK SENS PS19 Sensor that detects the height of film (pickup
(CH2 FILM Pick Sensor) position)
19 CH2 BAG DETECT SENS PS20 Sensor that detects the presence or absence of the
(CH2 Bag Detect Sensor) barrier bag
20 SUPPLY EXIT SENS PS21 Transport sensor at the CH2 supply exit
(Supply Exit Sensor)
21 CH2 UP_DW PL HP SENS PS24 Sensor that detects the home position of the up/
(CH2 Up/Down Plate HP Sensor) down plate (on which film is placed)
22 CH2 TRAY SENS PS22 Sensor that detects the presence or absence of the
(CH2 Tray Sensor) tray
24 CH2 SUP_NIP HP SENS PS25 Sensor that detects the home position of the nip in
(CH2 Nip Opening/Closing HP Sensor) the CH2 supply
57 CTL COOL FAN MON MN_MO Sensor that detects rotation of the cooling fan in the
(Control Cool FAN Monitor1) N1 control unit
59 PW_SUP COOL FAN MON FAN_LD Sensor that detects rotation of the cooling fan in the
(Power Supply Cooling FAN Monitor ) power supply unit
16-46

65 OP_SW1 (calibration) SW1 Operation panel switch
(Operation SW1(calibration SW))
66 OP_SW2 (test print) SW2 Operation panel switch
(Operation SW2 (test print SW))
67 OP_SW3 (open/enter) SW3 Operation panel switch
(Operation SW3 (open/enter SW))
68 OP_SW4 (reset/cancel) SW4 Operation panel switch
(Operation SW1 (reset/cancel SW))
73 SUPPLY COOL FAN MON H_MON Sensor that detects rotation of the supply cooling
(Supply Cooling FAN Monitor ) fan
75 INSULATION FAN MON DN_MO Sensor that detects rotation of the fan in the
(Insulation Unit FAN Monitor ) N insulation unit
76 DEODORANT FAN MON DS_MO Sensor that detects rotation of the deodorant fan
(Deodorant FAN Monitor ) N
Input port
81 DIP-SW_1 DIP_SW1 DIP switch on the MEC Board
AD input
1 V1 MAIN SENS 1 TH1 Heat process temperature sensor
(V1 Main Sensor 1)
(V1 Main Sensor 2)
3 V2 SUB SENS F TH3 Heat process temperature sensor
(V2 Sub Sensor F)
4 V2 SUB SENS R TH4 Heat process temperature sensor
(V2 Sub Sensor R)
(V2 Main Sensor 1)
(V2 Main Sensor 2)
7 V3 SUB SENS F TH7 Heat process temperature sensor
(V3 Sub Sensor F)
8 V3 MAIN SENS TH8 Heat process temperature sensor
(V3 Main Sensor)
9 V3 SUB SENS R TH9 Heat process temperature sensor
(V3 Sub Sensor R)
16-47

(V4 Main Sensor 1)
(V4 Main Sensor 2)
12 DENSITOMETER VALUE DENS_VS Densitometer readout value
(Densitometer)
13 IN_MACHINE TEMP SENS TH15 Heat process temperature sensor
(In-Machine Temperature
Sensor)
14 V2 QC SENS TH12 Heat process temperature sensor
(V2 QC Sensor)
(V4 QC Sensor)
(V5 QC Sensor)
16-48
16.10 IMAGER PRINT I/O TEST

This is used to measure the laser intensity of the main scan unit.
This section describes the procedure for displaying the “PRINT I/O TEST” window.
1 Connect the service PC to the facility’s network with reference to “16.2 Setting up Network
(Page 16-3)”.
3 Click the [IMAGER PRINT I/O TEST] button.
The window in which you can select device for conducting an I/O test is displayed.
4 Place a checkmark in the box of the device for conducting I/O test under “Select Target”.
The “PRINT I/O TEST” window appears.

“PRINT I/O TEST” window
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
16-49
The “PRINT I/O TEST” window contains the following items:

CYCLE
1 UPDATE CYCLE Set the timing at which the condition of the polygon motor and laser diode is
checked.
CONDITION
2 POLYGON Set the rotation condition of the polygon motor.
ON Set the rotation of the polygon motor to ON.
OFF Set the rotation of the polygon motor to OFF.
3 POLYGON TIME Set the rotation time of the polygon motor.
Setting range: 0 - 99
4 LD Set the emitting state of the polygon motor.
ON Set emission of the polygon motor to ON.
OFF Set emission of the polygon motor to OFF.
5 LD OUT Set the light intensity to be output.
6 [START] button Starts operation of the polygon motor and laser diode as set.
RESULT
7 POLYGON Displays the operating state of the polygon motor.
8 LD Displays the operating state of the laser diode.
9 VSYNC SIGNAL Displays the state of the V-Sync signal.
10 HSYNC SIGNAL Displays the state of the H-Sync signal.
11 POLYGON LOCK Displays the state of the POLYGON LOCK signal.
SIGNAL
12 POLYGON FASE Displays the state of the face detection signal.
13 [EXIT] button Close the “PRINT I/O TEST” to return to menu.
Next proceed to “16.10.1 Measuring Laser Beam Intensity (Page 16-51)”and measure laser beam intensity.
16-50
16.10.1 Measuring Laser Beam Intensity

Measure the laser intensity of the main scan unit, using the optical power meter.
Perform the measurement if a defect is suspected in the exposure unit or there is a problem in the image data.
If you handle the display screen with the exterior cover removed from DRYPRO 832, the
outside of the machine may be radiated with laser. Direct exposure to laser beam could cause
Warning blindness.
Be sure to check that there is no one around and wear laser goggles before starting work.
The buzzer sounds continuously to warn during emission of laser.
Note
Work outline
The number of personnel and the estimated work hours required to measure the laser beam intensity is as follows:

1 20 minutes each
Requirements
The procedure for measuring laser beam intensity requires the following tools:
No. Tools No. Tools

3 Laser goggles 4 Optical power meter
5 IR card
1 Press and hold the operation switch for about 1

second.
2 Turn the main power supply OFF.
16-51

supply tray.


Notch Hole replace with the tray shutter attached.
Tray Shutter insert if it becomes deformed due to
rough handling.

Procedure ” in “3.3.3 Removing/Installing Upper
6 Connect the LAN cable.
7 Turn the main power supply ON.
16-52

second.
Initialize and warm-up processes start.
An error that indicates the supply tray is open,

however, continue to work.
Note
9 Open the external guide unit assembly with

reference to “ How to open the right cover ” in
“3.2.2 Opening/Closing Right Cover (Page 3-5)”.
10 Display the “PRINT I/O TEST” window with reference to “16.10 IMAGER PRINT I/O TEST
(Page 16-49)”.
11 Set “CONDITION” to the following values.

Item Setting
POLYGON OFF
POLYGON TIME 10
LD ON
LD OUT 16383
Laser beam is emitted in the next operation. Be sure to wear laser goggles.
Make sure there is no one around again.
Warning
16-53
12 Click the [START] button.
The laser diode is emitted and the laser beam is radiated
At this moment, the polygon motor is not rotating. So the laser beam is radiated to one spot somewhere
within the laser scanning range.
Note
13 Insert the IR card in the roller in the sub scan unit

and search the laser light spot.
Search for the position where a red light spot is visible while
moving the IR card in a lateral direction.
• If the laser light spot is near the center of the scanning
range, go to step 18.
• If the laser light spot is not near the center of the scanning
range or the laser light spot cannot be found, go to step 14.
14 Click the [STOP] button in the “PRINT I/O TEST” window.
The laser diode turns off and the laser radiation disappears.
16-54
15 Turn “POLYGON” ON under “CONDITION” and enter a value of 1 - 4 in the “POLYGON TIME”.
The light spot moves approximately 10 - 30 mm for the input value (msec) of 1- 4.
Note
Laser beam is emitted in the next operation. Be sure to wear laser goggles.
Make sure there is no one around again.
Warning
16 Click the [START] button.

The polygon motor rotates for the time (msec) entered in step 15 and the light spot moves.
The laser diode is emitted and the laser beam is radiated.
17 Insert the IR card in the roller in the sub scan unit

and search for the laser light spot.
Search for the position where a red light spot is visible while
moving the IR card in a lateral direction.
Repeat the steps in step 14 to step 17 until the

light spot is found or it is moved near the center
Note of the scanning range
16-55
18 Cover the probe of the optical power meter and

press the [ZERO] button.
The zero point of the optical power meter is adjusted.
Adjust the measurement wavelength of the optical
wavelength to 784 nm.
19 Hold the probe of the optical power meter over

the position of the light spot and measure the
laser beam intensity.
When holding the probe of the optical power

meter over the light spot, slightly tilt the
Caution probe surface to the optical axis.
If you hold the probe perpendicular to the
optical axis, the laser beam reflected off the
probe may bounce back to the exposure unit
and cause unstable emission of the laser
diode.
Verify that the laser beam intensity is 35mW or more.

• If the laser beam intensity is less than 35mW, replace the
exposure unit with reference to “Chapter 8 Replacing
Exposure Unit (Page 8-1)”.
20 Click the [EXIT] button.
The “PRINT I/O TEST” window is closed. Then you will return to the maintenance menu window.

second.
16-56
22 Turn the main power supply OFF.
23 Install the upper right cover, connector cover, film

ejection tray, LAN cover, lower right cover, and
right cover with reference to “ Installation
This is the end of the process of verifying the laser data intensity.
16-57
Chapter 17 Troubleshooting
Chapter 17
This section describes solutions for when errors occur.
17.1 Solutions When Trouble Occurs ......................17-2

17.1.1 The DRYPRO 832 main unit will not start .. 17-2
17.1.2 The DRYPRO 832 stops during startup ..... 17-3
17.1.3 An error message is displayed................... 17-4
17.1.4 Film Jam..................................................... 17-4
17.1.5 Trouble while using DRYPRO 832 ............. 17-4
17.1.6 Does not exit (shutdown) ........................... 17-5
17.1.7 Pickup malfunction trouble ......................... 17-6
17.1.8 Print Image Trouble.................................... 17-7
17.2 Error display and solutions.............................17-14
17.2.1 Operating panel display and solutions ..... 17-14
17.2.2 Display and solutions for MainteTool........ 17-58
17.3 DRYPRO 832 Unit Replacement Procedure...17-62
17.3.1 Replacing Main Board.............................. 17-63
17.3.2 Replacing the Compact Flash (CF).......... 17-64
17.3.3 Replacing the DRYPRO 832 .................... 17-82
17.3.4 Replacing Printlink5-IN............................. 17-95
17.3.5 Replacing the MEC Board...................... 17-106
17.1 Solutions When Trouble Occurs

If trouble occurs in the DRYPRO 832 main unit, use the solutions shown in the table below.
17.1.1 The DRYPRO 832 main unit will not start
Phenomenon Parts to check Cause Solution
When the power The power source Short circuit in the AC line Disconnect the power cable, then check
source breaker is breaker protection the conductance between TP1-TP2, TP1-
turned ON, it returns has activated TP5, TP2-TP5.
to OFF If there is no conductance, replace the
power source breaker.
If there is conductance, replace the noise
filter, multiple power supply, power Assy,
noise filter Assy, and CB1 Assy.
Even if the main Bad connection A power cable (on the equipment Visually inspect how well the main power
power supply is on or wall socket) is not plugged in supply side and equipment side cables are
and the operation inserted.
switch is pressed, the
LCD on the operation Broken wire in the The power cable has a broken Remove the power cable from the
power cable wire equipment, and check the power cable
panel is not displayed
conductance with a tester.
Replace the power cable if a broken wire
is found.
Power is not being There is a fault on the main Check the output voltage of the main
supplied from the power supply side or UPS power supply or UPS with a tester.
main power supply If there is no voltage output from the
or UPS main power supply or UPS, request
repairs from the facility owner.
STBY 5V is not Power fault or MEC fault Measure the multi power ACN5 5 pins as
being output + and 6 pins as - with a tester, and check
that 5V is being output.
If 5V is not output, replace the multi
power and MEC power Assy. If this does
not resolve the problem, replace the MEC
board.
Defective operation Operation switch fault, or broken Check the connection of the densitometer
of the operation wire in the cable relay Assy, and if there are no problems,
switch remove MCN13 from the MEC board,
and check the conductance between the
MCN13 No.1 pin-No.2 pin while the
operation switch is pressed down.
If there is no conductance, replace the
operation switch board and densitometer
relay Assy.
Defective operation Faulty LCD board, broken wire Check the connection of the LCD relay
of LCD board in the cable, disconnected Assy, and if there are no problems,
connector, short circuit replace the LCD board and LCD relay
Assy.
17-2
17.1.2 The DRYPRO 832 stops during startup

The initial window Communication • Main board fault or MEC Check the connection of the main
stops with the error between the board fault communication Assy, and if there are no
“Welcome to DRY main board and • Main communication Assy problems, replace the main board, MEC
PRO” display MEC board connector disconnected or board, and main communication Assy.
broken wire
Insufficient voltage • Main board fault or multiple Check the exposure power supply relay
for main board power fault Assy1 connection, and if there are no
power supply • Exposure power supply relay problems, replace the main board,
Assy 1 connector disconnected multiple power, and exposure power
or broken wire supply relay Assy1.
Compact flash (CF) • Compact flash (CF) fault Check that the compact flash (CF) is
malfunction • Compact flash (CF) incorrect inserted correctly, and if it is inserted
insertion correctly, replace the compact flash (CF).
If this does not resolve the problem,
replace the main board.
Main board LED-2 • Malfunction occurred in the Replace the main board.
lit boot program
• Malfunction occurred in the
Linux kernel
• Driver failed to start
Main board LED-3 Disk mount failed Replace the compact flash (CF).
lit
Regular window Stops on the Software version mismatch, or • Check the Error.log of the date the
“Warming up” is not message “Checking application startup error due to error occurred.
displayed system” OS damage • Update the software version.
Stops on the If this does not resolve the problem,
message “ Failed to replace the compact flash (CF).
startup shared
memory process”
Stops on the
message “ Failed to
startup programs
waiting for shared
memory”
Stops on the Error occurred on the power
message “ Failed to supply driver, or application
startup power startup error occurred due to OS
management damage
process”
Stops on the Software version mismatch, or
message “An error application startup error due to
occurred during the OS damage
update process”
Stops on the Failed to access the print board • Check the Error.log of the date the
message due to driver or hardware related error occurred.
“Downloading print cause • Replace the print engine board or the
software” control box.
Stops on the Failed to access the MEC board Check the connection of the
message communication wire (RS-232C) between
“Download MEC the MEC and main board, or replace it. If
software” this does not resolve the problem, update
the software, or replace the CF. If this
does not resolve the problem, replace the
MEC board.
Stops on the Software version mismatch, or Update the software version. If this does
message “Checking application startup error due to not resolve the problem, replace the
operation” OS damage compact flash (CF).
The operating panel Defective operation • Status lamp or MEC board Check the connection of the LCD relay
LCD is displayed, but of the status lamp failure Assy, and if there are no problems,
the status lamp does • Broken wire, short circuit, or replace the status lamp and LCD relay
not light disconnected connector in Assy. If this does not resolve the problem,
LCD relay Assy replace the MEC board.
17-3
17.1.3 An error message is displayed

If an error message is displayed, refer to “17.2.1 Operating panel display and solutions (Page 17-14)” and solve the
problem.
17.1.4 Film Jam

For solutions for film jams, see “4.4 Film Jam Solutions” in the operation manual.
17.1.5 Trouble while using DRYPRO 832
An error message is Communication Communication fault between Check the connection of the LAN cable
displayed on the condition between DRYPRO and server PC between the DRYPRO 832 and the server
server PC during DRYPRO and PC, restart the server PC, and perform
upgrade server PC upgrade again.
A message for F error Communication Communication fault between Check the connection of the LAN cable
is displayed on the condition between DRYPRO and server PC between the DRYPRO 832 and the server
DRYPRO during DRYPRO and PC, and restart the DRYPRO 832 and the
upgrade server PC server PC.
Print film timestamp Server PC date and Server PC date and time are Correct the server PC date and time.
is incorrect time incorrect
Shutdown was Power supply UPS detected a power cut Check for the presence of a power cut
executed even malfunction from from the power supply side.
though an operation the UPS is recorded
switch was not in the log
pressed
Power supply UPS battery UPS detected a power cut when Refer to the UPS operation manual, and
stopped even though malfunction the UPS battery charge was low. either recharge or replace the battery.
the operation switch Or, the UPS battery has reached
was not pressed its regular replacement time
(lifespan)
Power supply Disconnected power cable Check that the power cable is connected.
malfunction
Power cut After power supply has resumed, switch
the power on.
Control panel does Operation panel • LCD board failure or MEC Check the connection of the LCD relay
not accept switch switch input board failure Assy, and if there are no problems,
input malfunction • Broken wire, short circuit, or replace the LCD board, MEC board, and
disconnected connector in LCD relay Assy.
LCD relay Assy
Cannot connect on Use the status DRYPRO 832 is connected to Check the connection and setup of the
the network display in DRYPRO other Printlink5-IN network.
832 UtilityTool user
window to check
the IP address (only
when the software
version of
DRYPRO 832 is
V1.02 or later)
17-4
Cannot connect on Use the ping LAN cable disconnected Check that the LAN cable is connected.
the network command from a
maintenance PC to Depending on the type of Switch off the switching hub power, then
switching hub, the board may be restart the hub.
check the network
remembering the previous MAC The problem may not be fixed by only
status
connection, and may therefore disconnecting and reconnecting the LAN
not accept this product cable.
Depending on the type of Set the board settings for the switching
switching hub, the connection hub that connects this product to
may not be established with auto- 100Base/TX, FDX or 1000Base/T.
negotiation
LAN board LED The main board LAN function Remove the installation location base,
does not flash has a fault and if a connection cannot be established
between a hand-held HUB and the PC,
replace the main board.
A message “PC not Communication fault between • Check that power supply of the server
connected” is DRYPRO and server PC PC is ON.
displayed on the • Check the connection of the LAN
DRYPRO 832 cable.
• Restart the DRYPRO 832 and the
server PC.
17.1.6 Does not exit (shutdown)
The operation switch Communication • Main board fault or MEC Press and hold the operation switch once
was pressed and the error between the board fault again for more than 10 seconds.
status LED has gone main board and • Main communication Assy If the DRYPRO does shut down, check
out, but the DRYPRO MEC board connector disconnected or the connection of the main
does not shut down broken wire communication Assy, and if there are no
problems, replace the main board, MEC
board, and main communication Assy.
If the DRYPRO does not shut down, there
is a communication error between the
MEC board and multiple power supply.
Switch the main power supply OFF, and
follow the “Communication error
between MEC board and multiple power
supply” solution below. (When a forced
shutdown can be performed)
Communication • MEC board fault or multiple Replace the MEC board, multiple power
error between MEC power supply fault supply, and remote signal Assy.
board and multiple • Short circuit in remote signal (When a forced shutdown cannot be
power supply Assy performed)
17-5
17.1.7 Pickup malfunction trouble

If a pickup malfunction occurs, follow the procedure below to solve the problem.
• When performing this work, always make sure the power supply is OFF, and insert a tray
shutter.
Caution
• When inserting the tray shutter, stop immediately if you feel any resistance.
㪧㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫄㪸㫃㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㫉㪼㪻
䇭㪜㪋㪈㪈㪇㩷㪧㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㪤㪸㫃㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㩿㪚㪟㪈㩷㫇㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫄㪸㫃㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪀
䇭㪜㪋㪉㪈㪇㩷㪧㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㪤㪸㫃㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㩿㪚㪟㪉㩷㫇㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫄㪸㫃㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪀
㪰㪼㫊㪮㫆㫉㫂㩷
㪧㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪼㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷
㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪼㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷㫉㪼㫊㪼㫋㪖㪺㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻
㪝㫀㫃㫄㩷㫄㫀㪾㪿㫋㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫇㫆㫉㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㪼㪺㪸㫌㫊㪼㩷
㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫃㫀㫇㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫉㫆㫃㫃㪼㫉㩷㪻㫌㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷
㪥㫆㪺㫆㫅㪻㪼㫅㫊㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㫊㫌㫉㪽㪸㪺㪼㪅㩷
㪩㪼㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪼㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪼㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷㫉㪼㫊㪼㫋㪃㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㩷㪸㫉㪼㩷㫊㫌㪽㪽㫀㪺㫀㪼㫅㫋㫃㫐㩷
㪰㪼㫊㪸㪺㪺㫌㫊㫋㫆㫄㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷
㪠㫄㫄㪼㪻㫀㪸㫋㪼㫃㫐㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㫃㫆㪸㪻㪼㪻㪖㪼㫅㫍㫀㫉㫆㫅㫄㪼㫅㫋㪅
㪥㫆
㪰㪼㫊㪧㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫀㫅㫊㪼㫉㫋㩷㪸㩷㫊㪿㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㪧㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫀㫅㫊㪼㫉㫋㩷㪸㩷㫊㪿㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㪰㪼㫊

㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪚㪟㩷㫎㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㪼㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㫉㪼㪻㪖㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪚㪟㩷㫎㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㪼㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㫉㪼㪻㪖
㪥㫆㪥㫆
㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㫆㩷㵰㪊㪅㪈㩷㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㫀㫅㪾㪆㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㫆㩷㵰㪊㪅㪈㩷㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㫀㫅㪾㪆㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷
㪪㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷㪫㫉㪸㫐㵱㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㪸㫀㫉㩷㫄㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㪅㪪㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷㪫㫉㪸㫐㵱㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㪸㫀㫉㩷㫄㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㪅
㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㫆㩷㵰㪊㪅㪊㪅㪋㩷㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㫀㫅㪾㪆㩷㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷
㪫㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㫊㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㪦㪝㪝㪃㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫉㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷
㪩㪼㪸㫉㩷㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉㵱㪸㫅㪻㩷㵰㪊㪅㪌㩷㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㫃㫐㩷
㫉㪼㪸㫉㩷㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㫉㪸㫐㩷㫃㫆㪺㫂㩷㫃㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㫄㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㫃㫐㪅
㪩㪼㫃㪼㪸㫊㫀㫅㪾㩷㪫㫉㪸㫐㩷㪣㫆㪺㫂㩷㪣㪼㫍㪼㫉㵱㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷
㫉㪼㫇㪸㫀㫉㩷㫄㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㪅
㪰㪼㫊㪰㪼㫊
㪡㪸㫄㫄㪼㪻㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㫉㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫊㩷㪧㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫇㫌㫃㫃㩷㫆㫌㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㫉㪸㫐㪖
㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪖
㪥㫆㪥㫆
㪧㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫄㪸㫃㪽㫌㫅㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫄㫀㪾㪿㫋㩷㪿㪸㫍㪼㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㫉㪼㪻㩷㪹㪼㪺㪸㫌㫊㪼㩷㪩㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫆㫌㫋㫃㪼㫋㩷㫊㫌㫅㩷㫍㫀㫊㫆㫉㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪚㪟㩷㫎㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㪘㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫇㫌㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫌㫋㩷㩿㫆㫉㩷㫉㪼㫄㫆㫍㫀㫅㪾㪀㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㫉㪸㫐㩷

㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㪺㫆㫌㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪸㪺㫋㫌㪸㫃㩷㫅㫌㫄㪹㪼㫉㩷㫆㪽㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㫊㩷㪼㫉㫉㫆㫉㩷㫆㪺㪺㫌㫉㫉㪼㪻㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫉㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㫉㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫉㫆㫅㫋㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪃㩷㫉㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷
㪸㫉㪼㩷㪻㫀㪽㪽㪼㫉㪼㫅㫋㩷㪹㫐㩷㫊㫀㫏㩷㫆㫉㩷㫄㫆㫉㪼㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫊㫆㫄㪼㩷㫉㪼㪸㫊㫆㫅㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㪻㫀㫉㪼㪺㫋㫃㫐㪅
㫅㫆㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㫀㫊㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷㫋㫉㪸㫐㪅
㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㫆㩷㵰㪌㪅㪍㩷㪩㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㪦㫌㫋㫃㪼㫋㩷㪣㫀㪾㪿㫋㩷㪪㪿㫀㪼㫃㪻㩷
㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪘㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㵱㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㪸㫀㫉㩷㫄㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㪅
㪘㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫇㫌㫃㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫌㫋㩷㩿㫆㫉㩷㫉㪼㫄㫆㫍㫀㫅㪾㪀㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷㫋㫉㪸㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷㪘㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫊㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㪦㪥㪃㩷㫃㫆㪸㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫉㫆㫅㫋㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪃㩷㫉㪼㫄㫆㫍㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㫊㩷㪹㫐㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㪺㫆㫌㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫆㩷㫑㪼㫉㫆㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷
㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㪻㫀㫉㪼㪺㫋㫃㫐㪅㫎㪸㫉㫄㪄㫌㫇㪅㩷㩿㪛㫀㫊㪺㪸㫉㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㫊㩷㫃㪼㪽㫋㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷
㪘㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫊㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㩷㪦㪥㪃㩷㪺㪿㪸㫅㪾㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫋㫉㪸㫐㪅㩷㪘㩷㪺㪸㫃㫀㪹㫉㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫈㫌㪼㫌㪼㫊㩷㪸㫉㪼㩷
㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㪽㫉㫆㫄㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㫀㫊㫇㫃㪸㫐㪼㪻㩷㫅㫌㫄㪹㪼㫉㩷㫆㪽㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㫊㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㪸㫉㫄㪄㫌㫇㩷㫀㫊㩷㪺㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅㪀
㫅㫌㫄㪹㪼㫉㩷㫊㫌㪹㫋㫉㪸㪺㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫅㫌㫄㪹㪼㫉㩷㫆㪽㩷㫁㪸㫄㫄㪼㪻㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㫊㩷㪸㫋㩷
㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫀㫃㫄㩷㫊㪼㫋㫌㫇㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫎㪸㫉㫄㪄㫌㫇㪅㩷㩿㪩㪼㫄㪸㫀㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫈㫌㪼㫌㪼㫊㩷
㪸㫉㪼㩷㫇㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㪸㫉㫄㪄㫌㫇㩷㫀㫊㩷㪺㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅㪀
㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㫆㩷㵰㪌㪅㪉㩷㪝㫀㫃㫄㪄㫉㪼㫃㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㵱㩷
㪩㪼㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㫆㩷㵰㪌㪅㪉㩷㪝㫀㫃㫄㪄㫉㪼㫃㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㫊㵱㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㪅
㪮㫆㫉㫂㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪠㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪤㪸㫅㫌㪸㫃㪅㪮㫆㫉㫂㩷
㪺㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪺㫆㫄㫇㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻
17-6
17.1.8 Print Image Trouble

Trouble related to print images can be broadly defined into the following categories.
Follow the solutions for each item to solve the problems.
• Density fluctuation trouble
See “ Density fluctuation trouble (Page 17-7)”.
• Density unevenness trouble
See “ Density unevenness trouble (Page 17-8)”.
• Image malfunction trouble
See “ Image malfunction trouble (Page 17-11)”.
• Print malfunction trouble
See “ Print malfunction trouble (Page 17-12)”.
• Curl trouble
See “ Curl trouble (Page 17-13)”.
• Scratched film trouble
See “ Scratched film trouble (Page 17-13)”.
• Contaminated film trouble
See “ Contaminated film trouble (Page 17-13)”.
Density fluctuation trouble

Phenomenon Cause Solution
Image Horizontal Temperature 1. Insufficient adjustment of shading Even if the film is the cause, the
Difference correction at shipment horizontal density difference for films in
Output a FLAT pattern (1.5D 2. Film has its own density distribution the same pack can be suppressed by
recommended) and measure the density 3. Dirty optical parts performing shading correction.
at the x locations below (3 locations). A 4. Heat process unit temperature not
temperature difference greater than uniform, temperature setting fault
0.15D (estimate) is abnormal
㪜㫈㫌㪸㫃㩷㫊㫇㪸㪺㪼
Cannot obtain density linearity 1. Malfunction in measuring 1. Check by re-measuring using a

(density malfunction) densitometer calibrated densitometer.
1. No malfunction in the image density, 2. Change in film sensitivity 2. Check the guarantee period of the
but differences occur in measured 3. LUT malfunction: LUT setting error film, and replace the film if it is old.
density values 4. Exposure amount malfunction for 3. Check and correct the LUT setting
2. Density fluctuation occurring within optical system value.
the field, and density fluctuation is 5. Developing temperature malfunction 4. Perform shading correction and pitch
occurring while the film is transported 6. Insufficient cooling, developing unevenness correction.
in the machine temperature malfunction 5. Check the HPRO temperature
3. Even if calibration is performed, settings.
differences in density linearity are 6. Check the operation of the cooling
repeated section fan and the HPRO
4. Density fluctuation where a temperature settings.
characteristic curve follows a steady
value parallel translation
5. Density malfunction accompanied by
tone differences
6. Large increase in density during
continued processing
17-7
Density unevenness trouble

Pitch Unevenness 1. Insufficient final stage pitch 1. Perform unevenness correction

Output a FLAT pattern (1.5D unevenness correction at shipment 2. Perform unevenness correction
recommended) and check with a 2. Correction value was reset/discarded 3. Replace the feed unit
magnifying glass. 3. Vibration in feed unit 4. Replace the Sub Scan transport motor
• Phenomenon 1,2 4. Sub Scan transport motor malfunction
A large amount of unevenness
appears at 157μm intervals
• Phenomenon 3,4
Unevenness occurs at other intervals
Belt-Like Density Unevenness Faulty grounding for the exposure unit Tighten the earth wire fixing screws (2
Density is reduced (0.01D~0.02D) in screws) that connect between the Sub
belt-like shapes in certain areas Scan unit and DRYPRO frame.
㪘㫇㫇㫉㫆㫏㪅㩷㪉㪇㪇㫄㫄
㪉㪇㫄㫄㩷㫋㫆㩷㪏㪇㫄㫄
Unevenness 39mm from top Faulty feed outlet guide position Replace feed unit
Check with flat pattern
Top edge insert unevenness Faulty position of exposure guide Replace feed unit
(23mm from top)
73mm pitch unevenness Dirt inside tensioner collar bearing Replace feed unit
Check with flat pattern Replace feed unit and Sub scan unit
Unevenness 34mm from bottom Faulty feed outlet guide position Replace feed unit
edge
11mm pitch unevenness (occurs Feed unit, motor axle dirty Clean motor axle
in 140mm space from top edge)
Belt-like density unevenness Faulty grounding for the exposure unit Re-tighten the earth wire screws (2
Density reductions (0.01D~0.02D) occur screws) that connect between the chassis
at approximately 200mm intervals, in of the feed unit and DRYPRO.
bands of 20mm~60mm
38mm pitch horizontal stage 1. Developing temperature malfunction 1. Check HPRO temperature settings
unevenness 2. Rotation malfunction of opposite 1. Check operation of cooling section
roller fan
3. Heat process guide malfunction 2. Replace HPRO unit
3. Replace HPRO unit
17-8
Top edge falcate low density 1. Developing temperature malfunction 1. Check HPRO temperature settings
unevenness 2. Film deterioration 1. Check operation of the cooling
3. HPRO guide malfunction section fan
2. Check the film usage limit, replace
old film with new film, and recheck.
Low temperature unevenness 1. Developing temperature malfunction 1. Check HPRO temperature settings
extended to radiation condition in 2. Heat process guide malfunction 1. Check operation of cooling section
transporting direction fan
Pale horizontal line unevenness HPRO malfunction Replace HPRO unit

45mm from bottom edge
Pale horizontal line unevenness HPRO malfunction Replace HPRO unit

110mm from bottom edge
Low density unevenness at HPRO guide malfunction Replace HPRO unit
bottom edge section
Low density unevenness at side 1. Uneven HPRO temperature 1. Check HPRO temperature settings
edge section 1. Developing temperature malfunction 1. Check operation of the cooling
2. Film deterioration section fan
3. HPRO malfunction 2. Check the film usage limit, replace
old film with new film, and recheck.
Insertion unevenness 50mm from top Bad installation of heat process inlet • Check installation of the heat process
edge lower queue guide inlet lower queue guide.
• Replace HPRO unit
17-9
Judgment standards for polygon pitch unevenness and feed unevenness

Division procedure：Output a FLAT pattern (approx. 1.5D), observe with a magnifying glass, and divide by the
intervals between unevenness.
Unevenness Phenomenon Solution
Polygon pitch unevenness 0.157mm interval unevenness Correction
Feed unevenness 0.5mm interval unevenness • Replace feed unit moderation belt
• Replace feed unit propagation belt
• Replace feed unit drive motor pulley
11mm interval unevenness
Two to three short

horizontal lines
11mm space
17-10
Image malfunction trouble

Bad extraction of fine white lines/ 1. Dirty optics 1. Replace exposure unit
bad fine detail (product pattern) 2. Amount of radiation too strong 2. Check the laser beam intensity, and if
Output a PRODUCT pattern (3.0D), 3. Beam diameter is large/worsening the value is higher than the standard
measure the average density of the modulation response value, replace the exposure unit.
central fine white lines (thicker of the 4. Heat process unit temperature (Above 55mW as an estimate)
fine white lines). Malfunction occurs if malfunction 3. Replace exposure unit
they are over 2.0D, or if the fine white 4. Check the setting temperature of the
lines are clearly dark or overlapping heat process unit, and if there is no
problem with the setting value,
replace the HPRO unit.
Near center ghost Optical malfunction Replace the exposure unit
When a FLAME pattern is output
(approx.1.5D), and a thin vertical line can
be seen just next to the center vertical line
Wavering vertical lines Function failure of frequency Check the setting values in 1~6 of
Output a FLAME pattern (approx. modulation, or exposure unit (polygon “Frequency modulation data” in the
1.5D), and the wavering of the vertical rotation) failure “PRODUCT SETUP” window of
lines is marked compared to the right SERVICE INFO.
side vertical lines (more than 30μm) If there are no problems, replace the
exposure unit.
Vertical black lines • Phenomenon 1 • Check the feed unit guide board for
When a FLAT pattern (approx. 1.5D) is Dust accumulation or scratch (approx. foreign particles or scratches (that
output, the occurrence of vertical black 0.5mm thin black line) on the feed shine with light).
lines is unpredictable guide board • Check whether the image position has
• Phenomenon 2 deviated either to the right or left.
2JGPQOGPQP Distortion of optical parts, fogging by If it has deviated, center the image
scattered light again correctly, and check the vertical
• Phenomenon 3 lines again.
Lines on the film If this does not remove the vertical
2JGPQOGPQP lines, replace the exposure unit.
• Use film from a different lot, or load
film in backwards, and check the
position in which the problem is
occurring.
Vertical white lines 1. Dust or dirt on optical parts 1. Check whether there is dirt or foreign
When a FLAT pattern (approx. 1.5D) is 2. Lines on the film itself objects on the dustproof glass on the
output, the occurrence of vertical white 3. Optical path is blocked back of the exposure unit, and if there
lines is unpredictable 4. Scratch or protrusion on the heat are no problems with the surface,
process guide surface replace the exposure unit.
2. Check using a different lot of film.
3. Check whether there is nothing that
could interrupt the exposure position
with a beam.
4. Replace the heat process unit
Black lines occur at 63mm Dirty transport rollers in the feed unit, Clean the transport rollers in the feed
intervals in the horizontal scratch on the roller surface unit and check for scratches.
direction
White spots occur 1. Dust on the film 1. Clean inside the machine
2. Condensation on the film 2. Replace the film
17-11

Horizontal line shaped white dots Accumulation of dirt on the surface of Roller cleaning in the feed unit
that appear clustered together the transport rollers has transferred onto
occur the film
Print malfunction trouble

The Main Scan OFFSET image 1. Polygon motor rotation error in the 1. Check the connection of the connector
size does not match exposure unit section.
2. Distance between exposure unit and 2. Check that the exposure unit is
film surface is incorrect installed correctly.
2.Check whether the numerical values
shown on the label attached to the
exposure unit match the setting values
in the “PRODUCT SETUP” window
in SERVICE INFO.
If there are no problems with either,
replace the exposure unit.
If there is insufficient accuracy of the Refer to the “PRODUCT SETUP”
image horizontal dimension specified in window in SERVICE INFO, and adjust
Requested image size, it is possible to the setting values.
fine tune the settings
Example: For 300mm specification
when the horizontal dimension is
303mm, set the “SIZE FINE TUNING
(Requested image size)” to 99%.
The Sub Scan OFFSET image size Setting value mismatch Refer to the “PRODUCT SETUP”
does not match window in SERVICE INFO, and adjust
the setting values.
Example: If the vertical dimension is 1%
too large, set the “SIZE FINE TUNING
(V direction)” to 99%.
Image Main Scan OFFSET has Setting value mismatch Refer to the “PRODUCT SETUP”
deviated window in SERVICE INFO, and adjust
the setting values in “HD OFFSET”.
Example: If the setting value is increased
by 1, the image shifts 0.01mm to the
right when looking at the exposure face
with the transport direction at the top
edge.
Image Sub Scan OFFSET has Setting value mismatch Refer to the “PRODUCT SETUP”
deviated window in SERVICE INFO, and adjust
the setting values in “VD OFFSET”.
Example: If the setting value is increased
by 1, the image shifts 0.01mm
downwards when looking at the
exposure face with the transport
direction at the top edge.
Calibration pattern does not print 1. Bad connection in the print engine Check the connection (lock) of the
1. Data not output from the print board or the exposure I/F cable exposure I/F cable. If this does not
2. Exposure unit malfunction, or bad improve the problem, replace the
engine board
connection with the exposure I/F exposure unit or exposure I/F cable.
(print I/O check implemented)
cable
2. Polygon is not rotating
(polygon lock is not ON),
or the laser does not emit
(laser intensity measurement)
Densitometer pattern does not Cannot read the density correctly Replace the densitometer.
print
Calibration pattern can be printed
17-12

SMPTE test pattern does not print 1. Internal file error 1. Cold start, or switch the power supply
2. Mistakes in the Dmax, Dmin settings, OFF/ON.
1. Densitometer pattern can be
printed, but it does not print if the or mistakes in the LUT settings If this does not resolve the problem,
update the software, or replace the
setting is No Select
compact flash (CF).
2. The densitometer pattern can be
2. Set Dmax=3.00, Dmin=0.20,
printed, but it does not print if the
Lut=liner, and check the settings.
settings are Ch1~Ch4
DICOM image does not printed 1. Malfunction in DICOM parameters or 1. Refer to the error code table, and
image check whether the DICOM pattern
1. SMPTE pattern can be printed, but
only the specified SCU cannot be 2. DICOM input process fail completed sent from the SCU is correct.
printed (check the log for the 2. Cold start, or switch the power supply
occurrence date) OFF/ON.
2. SMPTE pattern can be printed, but
nothing is printed from all SCU
(check the log of the occurrence compact flash (CF).
date)
Images is slanted 1. Position regulation unit malfunction 1. Replace the position regulation unit
The image is out of spec if it slants 2. Poor installation of the standard guide 2. If only 2ch images slant, replace the
more than 1mm in the 17-inch (pin) outlet light shield unit assembly (1ch).
direction for 356mm × 432mm size 3. Malfunction of separating prongs If both 1ch and 2ch images slant,
images. 4. Bad settings for the supply tray film replace the standard guide of the
size position regulation unit.
3. Replace the separation prong section
4. Check the film size settings
QC pattern does not printed Internal file malfunction Switch the power supply OFF/ON.
compact flash (CF).
The QC pattern can be printed, but DICOM parameter or image malfunction Switch the power supply OFF/ON.
the DICOM image does not print If this does not resolve the problem,
compact flash (CF).
Curl trouble
Curl 1. Cooling malfunction 1. Check the operation of the cooling

The front and back of the film raise more 2. HPRO guide malfunction section fan
than 25mm when attached to the light 2. Replace HPRO unit
box
Scratched film trouble

Transport direction scratches 1. Scratches or protrusions on the HPRO 1. Replace the HPRO unit
appear at set locations on the BC guide surface 2. Clean or replace the position
surface 2. Position regulation roller fault regulation roller
Transport direction scratches 1. Dust on the HPRO guide 1. Print a number of sheets, and there is
appear at random on the BC 2. Dust on the exposure guide no problem if the scratches do not
surface appear at the same place.
2. Clean the exposure guide
Scratch on the EC surface 1. Faulty rotation of the opposed roller Replace HPRO rack
2. Peeling of HPRO rack insulating
material
Contaminated film trouble

Adherence of a lot of powdery Transfer of dirt adhering to the opposing Clean the heat process unit
white dirt, or many scrape marks rollers
17-13
17.2 Error display and solutions

When an error occurs, an error message and the solution are displayed in the message display window of the
operating panel.
The error message is also displayed inPrintlink5-IN.
17.2.1 Operating panel display and solutions

Error
Error Error
Message (Display Error contents Error Support: Service
Level Code
Characters)
E 3000 HPRO Error Error when 22 minutes, which is 2times 1. Check whether the short-circuit breaker (domestic) or circuit
stronger than normal startup 11 minutes protector (domestic) is OFF
(when not in POWER OFF MODE), 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and mechanical
passes control board
3. Check conductance of the power cable
4. Check voltage
5. Replace H-DRV board
6. Replace heat process unit
7. Replace mechanical control board
8. Replace the wire bundle between the H-DRVboard and
mechanical control board
F 3001 HPRO Error Check the sensor detection of wire 1. Check connection between mechanical control and HPRO unit
malfunction signal for the heater every 2. Replace HPRO unit
0.1 seconds, and an error occurs if 3. Replace mechanical control board
anomaly is detected 4. Replace wire bundle between mechanical control board and HPRO unit
E 3002 Temperature error When the pre-heating C1 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
moving average temperature is compared 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and mechanical
to 100°C, an error occurs when the control board
temperature is 5°C higher when Ready 3. Check connection between mechanical control board and HPRO
and 10°C higher when in PRINT. unit
5. Check voltage
10. Replace wire bundle between mechanical control board and HPRO unit
moving average temperature is compared 2. Check whether the short-circuit breaker (domestic) or circuit
to 100°C, an error occurs when the protector (domestic) is OFF
temperature is 5°C lower when Ready 3. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and mechanical
and 10°C lower when in PRINT. control board
4. Check connection between mechanical control board and HPRO
unit
6. Check voltage
E 3004 Temperature error Irrespective of the status of the machine, 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
check the temperature of preheat C1 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and mechanical
every 1 seconds, and if the temperature is control board
continually 147°C for 5 seconds, an error 3. Check connection between mechanical control board and HPRO
occurs unit
5. Check voltage
10. Replace wire bundle between mechanical control board and
HPRO unit
F 3006 HPRO Error The heater sensor A/D value has a fixed 1. Replace HPRO unit
upper value 2. Replace mechanical control board
17-14
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 3007 HPRO Error Check the AD_ERR signal every 0.1 1. Replace HPRO unit
seconds, and an error occurs if an 2. Replace mechanical control board
anomaly is detected 3. Replace wire bundle between mechanical control board and HPRO unit
F 3008 HPRO Error Check the connector disconnect signal for the 1. Check connection between mechanical control board and HPRO
heater temperature sensor every 0.1 seconds, unit
and an error occurs if an anomaly is detected 2. Replace HPRO unit
F 3009 HPRO Error Check the sensor detection of wire malfunction 3. Replace mechanical control board
signal for density correction every 0.1 seconds, 4. Replace wire bundle between mechanical control board and
and an error occurs if an anomaly is detected HPRO unit
F 300B HPRO Error The density correction sensor A/Dvalue 1. Replace HPRO unit
has a fixed upper value. 2. Replace mechanical control board
3. Replace wire bundle between mechanical control board and
HPRO unit
moving average temperature is compared 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and mechanical
to 100°C, an error occurs when the control board
temperature is 5°C higher when Ready 3. Check connection between mechanical control board and HPRO unit
and 10°C higher when in PRINT. 4. Check conductance of the power cable
5. Check voltage
E 3013 Temperature When the pre-heating C2 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
error moving average temperature is compared 2. Check whether the short-circuit breaker (domestic)
to 100°C, an error occurs when the or circuit protector (domestic) is OFF
temperature is 5°C lower when Ready 3. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
and 10°C lower when in PRINT. mechanical control board
4. Check connection between mechanical control
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
10. Replace the wire bundle between the H-DRVboard
and mechanical control board
11. Replace wire bundle between mechanical control
board and HPRO unit
E 3014 Temperature Irrespective of the status of the machine, 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
error check the temperature of preheat C2 every 1 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
seconds, and if the temperature is continually mechanical control board
147°C for 5 seconds, an error occurs 3. Check connection between mechanical control
E 3022 Temperature When the heating temperature 30 second board and HPRO unit
error moving average temperature is compared 4. Check conductance of the power cable
to 130°C, an error occurs when the 5. Check voltage
temperature is 5°C higher when Ready 6. Replace H-DRV board
and 10°C higher when in PRINT. 7. Replace heat process unit
board and HPRO unit
E 3023 Temperature When the heating temperature F 30 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
error second moving average temperature is 2. Check whether the short-circuit breaker (domestic)
compared to 130°C, an error occurs when or circuit protector (domestic) is OFF
the temperature is 5°C lower when Ready 3. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
17-15
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
error check the temperature of heating F every 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
1 second, and if the temperature is mechanical control board
continually 147°C for 5 seconds, an error 3. Check connection between mechanical control
occurs board and HPRO unit
E 3032 Temperature When the heating temperature C1 30 4. Check conductance of the power cable
error second moving average temperature is 5. Check voltage
compared to 130°C, an error occurs when 6. Replace H-DRV board
the temperature is 5°C higher when 7. Replace heat process unit
Ready and 10°C higher when in PRINT. 8. Replace mechanical control board
board and HPRO unit
E 3033 Temperature When the heating temperature C1 30 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
error check the temperature of heating C1 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
every 1 second, and if the temperature is mechanical control board
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
error second moving average temperature is 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
compared to 130°C, an error occurs when mechanical control board
the temperature is 5°C higher when 3. Check connection between mechanical control
Ready and 10°C higher when in PRINT. board and HPRO unit
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
17-16
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
error check the temperature of heating C2 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
E 3052 Temperature When the heating temperature R 30 4. Check conductance of the power cable
error second moving average temperature is 5. Check voltage
compared to 130°C an error occurs when 6. Replace H-DRV board
the temperature is 5°C higher when 7. Replace heat process unit
Ready and 10°C higher when in PRINT. 8. Replace mechanical control board
board and HPRO unit
E 3053 Temperature When the heating temperature R 30 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
error check the temperature of heating R every 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
1 second, and if the temperature is mechanical control board
E 3062 Temperature When the slit F temperature 30 second 4. Check conductance of the power cable
error moving average temperature is compared 5. Check voltage
to 130°C, an error occurs when the 6. Replace H-DRV board
temperature is 10°C higher when Ready 7. Replace heat process unit
and 10°C higher when in PRINT. 8. Replace mechanical control board
board and HPRO unit
E 3063 Temperature When the slit F temperature 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
error check the temperature of slit F every 1 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
second, and if the temperature is mechanical control board
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
17-17
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
E 3072 Temperature When the slit C temperature 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
error moving average temperature is compared 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
to 130°C, an error occurs when the mechanical control board
temperature is 10°C higher when Ready 3. Check connection between mechanical control
and 10°C higher when in PRINT. board and HPRO unit
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
E 3073 Temperature When the slit C temperature 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
error check the temperature of slit C every 1 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
E 3082 Temperature When the slit R temperature 30 second 4. Check conductance of the power cable
board and HPRO unit
E 3083 Temperature When the slit R temperature 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
error check the temperature of slit R every 1 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
17-18
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
E 3092 Temperature When the slow cool C1 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
E 3093 Temperature When the slow cool C1 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
error check the temperature of slow cool C1 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
E 30A2 Temperature When the slow cool C2 30 second 4. Check conductance of the power cable
board and HPRO unit
E 30A3 Temperature When the slow cool C2 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
E 30A4 Temperature Irrespective of the status of the machine, 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
error check the temperature of slow cool C2 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
17-19
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
Ｃ 30B2 Caution When the heating inlet 30 second moving 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
average temperature is compared to 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
130°C, an error occurs when the mechanical control board
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
Ｃ 30B3 Caution When the heating inlet 30 second moving 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
average temperature is compared to 2. Check whether the short-circuit breaker (domestic)
130°C, an error occurs when the or circuit protector (domestic) is OFF
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
Ｃ 30B4 Caution Irrespective of the status of the machine, 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
check the temperature of heating inlet 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
Ｃ 30C2 Caution When the slow cool outlet 30 second 4. Check conductance of the power cable
moving average temperature is compared 5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
Ｃ 30C3 Caution When the slow cool outlet 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
moving average temperature is compared 2. Check whether the short-circuit breaker (domestic)
board and HPRO unit
6. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
Ｃ 30C4 Caution Irrespective of the status of the machine, 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
check the temperature of cooling outlet 2. Check the connection between the H-DRVboard and
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
17-20
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
E 30D2 Temperature When the rapid cooling outlet 30 second 1. Check HPRO OFFSET and mechanical control offset
5. Check voltage
board and HPRO unit
C 30E2 Caution 1 Minute average value temperature 1. Check the connection to the internal temperature
upper limit error sensor mechanical control board (CN22)
(supply) 2. Replace mechanical control board
C 30E3 Caution 1 Minute average value temperature 3. Replace the internal temperature sensor
upper limit error
(supply)
F 30ED HPRO Error Check the connector disconnect signal for 1. Check the connection of connector CN22 on the
the internal temperature sensor every 0.1 mechanical control board
seconds, and an error occurs if an 2. Replace mechanical control board
anomaly is detected 3. Replace the internal temperature sensor
E 3A0E HPRO Error Deodorization FAN rotation error 1. Check connection between mechanical control
board and deodorization FAN
2. Replace the deodorization fan
4. Replace wire bundle between deodorization FAN
E 3B0E HPRO Error Supply cooling FAN rotation error 1. Check connection between mechanical control
board and supply cooling FAN
2. Replace the supply cooling FAN
4. Replace wire bundle between supply cooling FAN
E 3C0E HPRO Error Heat insulation unit FAN rotation error 1. Check heat insulation unit FAN connector
2. Replace heat insulation unit FAN
4. Replace wire bundle between heat insulation FAN
C 3DB2 Caution Standard temperature upper limit error Replace HPRO unit
(heating inlet)
C 3DC2 Caution Standard temperature upper limit error
(slow cool outlet)
C 3DD2 Caution Standard temperature upper limit error
(rapid cooling outlet)
C 3DB3 Caution Standard temperature lower limit error
(heating inlet)
C 3DC3 Caution Standard temperature lower limit error
(slow cool outlet)
C 3DD3 Caution Standard temperature lower limit error
(rapid cooling outlet)
E 4110 Pickup not Could not pickup at CH1 pickup • Shake the tray, and re-insert the film
required operation (film does not reach the
position regulation FILM detection
• Replace pickup unit
sensor). • Check the connection and operation of the pickup
motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the pickup
evacuation motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the FILM
detection sensor and mechanical control board
• Replace mechanical control board
E 4120 The operation The pickup evacuation sensor did not • Replace pickup unit
was not switch ON during CH1 pickup operation. • Check the connection and operation of the pickup
performed evacuation motor and mechanical control board
normally • Check the connection and operation of the pickup
evacuation sensor and mechanical control board
17-21
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
E 4121 The operation The FILM height detection sensor did not • Shake the tray, and re-insert the film
was not switch ON during CH1 elevating plate • Check the connection and operation of the elevating
performed raising operation. plate motor and mechanical control board
normally • Check the connection and operation of the FILM
height detection sensor and mechanical control
board
E 4122 The operation The elevation HP sensor did not switch • Shake the tray, and re-insert the film
was not ON during the CH1 elevating plate • Check the connection and operation of the elevating
performed lowering operation. plate motor and mechanical control board
normally • Check the connection and operation of the elevating
HP sensor and mechanical control board
E 4124 The operation The tray detection sensor did not switch • Replace tray detection unit
was not OFF during the CH1 film loading • Check the connection and operation of the tray
performed operation. detection sensor and mechanical control board
normally • Check the connection and operation of the tray lock
E 4125 Tray-1 is open The tray detection sensor switched OFF solenoid and mechanical control board
during operations other than the CH1 film • Replace mechanical control board
loading operation.
was not switch OFF during CH1 pickup • Check the connection and operation of the pickup
performed operation. evacuation motor and mechanical control board
was not switch OFF during CH1 elevating plate • Check the connection and operation of the elevating
board
was not OFF during the CH1 elevating plate • Check the connection and operation of the elevating
E 4143 Tray-1 settings CH1 supply unit is set to be used, even • Check connection between the CH1 supply unit and
are incorrect though it is not present. mechanical control board
E 4210 Pickup not Could not pickup at CH2 pickup • Shake the tray, and re-insert the film
required operation (film does not reach the • Replace pickup unit
position regulation FILM detection • Check the connection and operation of the pickup
sensor). motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the pickup
evacuation motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the FILM
detection sensor and mechanical control board
E 4211 Occurrence of Film remains on the CH2 outlet sensor • Check the connection and operation of the CH2
film jam transportation motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the CH2
outlet sensor and mechanical control board
was not switch ON during CH2 pickup operation. • Check the connection and operation of the pickup
performed evacuation motor and mechanical control board
17-22
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
was not switch ON during CH1 elevating plate • Check the connection and operation of the elevating
board
was not ON during the CH1 elevating plate • Check the connection and operation of the elevating
E 4124 The operation The tray detection sensor did not switch • Replace tray detection unit
was not OFF during the CH1 film loading • Check the connection and operation of the tray
performed operation. detection sensor and mechanical control board
normally • Check the connection and operation of the tray lock
E 4125 Tray-1 is open The tray detection sensor switched OFF solenoid and mechanical control board
during operations other than the CH1 film • Replace mechanical control board
loading operation.
was not switch OFF during CH1 pickup • Check the connection and operation of the pickup
performed operation. evacuation motor and mechanical control board
was not OFF during the CH2 elevating plate • Check the connection and operation of the elevating
E 4228 The operation The elevation HP sensor did not switch HP sensor and mechanical control board
was not OFF during the CH2 elevating plate • Replace mechanical control board
performed raising operation.
normally
E 4243 Tray-2 settings CH2 supply unit is set to be used, even • Check connection between the CH2 supply unit and
are incorrect though it is not present. mechanical control board
E 4410 Occurrence of Film remains at position regulation unit. • Check the connection and operation of the feed
film jam Film did not arrive at feed inlet sensor. motor and mechanical control board
E 4411 Occurrence of Film remains at position regulation unit. • Check the connection and operation of the feed nip
film jam Film remains at feed inlet sensor. motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the feed inlet
sensor and mechanical control board
film jam Film remains at position regulation FILM motor and mechanical control board
detection sensor. • Check the connection and operation of the position
transportation motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the feed nip
• Check the connection and operation of the position
regulation FILM detection sensor and mechanical
control board
film jam Film does not arrive at the V-SYNC motor and mechanical control board
sensor. • Check the connection and operation of the position
transportation motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the V-SYNC
17-23
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
E 4511 Occurrence of Film remains at the V-SYNC sensor. • Check the connection and operation of the feed
film jam motor and mechanical control board
E 4512 Occurrence of Film remains at the V-SYNC sensor. • Check the connection and operation of the position
film jam transportation motor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the HPRO
• Check the connection and operation of the V-SYNC
E 4520 The operation The feed nip HP sensor did not switch • Check the connection and operation of the feed nip
was not from ON to OFF during feed nip motor and mechanical control board
performed operation. • Check the connection and operation of the feed nip
normally HP sensor and mechanical control board
E 4521 The operation The feed nip home sensor did not switch • Replace mechanical control board
was not ON during the feed nip operation.
performed
normally
E 4522 The operation Film arrived at the feed inlet sensor • Check the connection and operation of the feed nip
was not during the feed nip operation. motor and mechanical control board
performed • Check the connection and operation of the feed nip
normally HP sensor and mechanical control board
• Check the connection and operation of the feed inlet
E 4610 Occurrence of Film did not arrive at densitometer inlet • Check the connection and operation of the HPRO
film jam sensor. motor and mechanical control board
E 4611 Occurrence of Film remains at densitometer inlet sensor. • Check the connection and operation of the
film jam densitometer inlet sensor and mechanical control
board
E 4720 The operation The 2ch nip open/close HP sensor did not • Check the connection and operation of the 2ch nip
was not open during the 2ch nip operation. open/close motor and mechanical control board
performed • Check the connection and operation of the 2ch nip
normally open/close HP sensor and mechanical control board
E 4721 The operation The 2ch nip open/close HP sensor did not • Replace mechanical control board
was not close during the 2ch nip operation.
performed
normally
E 4820 Filter not The Deodorant filter detection sensor did • Check the connection and operation of the
mounted not switch ON. Deodorant filter detection sensor and mechanical
control board
E 4A20 The front cover The front cover is open. • Check the connection and operation of the front
is open cover sensor and mechanical control board
E 4A21 The right cover The right cover is open. • Check the connection and operation of the right
is open cover sensor and mechanical control board
F 4A30 Power cooling Power internal cooling FAN is not • Check the connection and operation of the power
fan failure rotating (did not rotate for more than 5 and mechanical control board
seconds). • Replace power supply
E 4A32 Main cooling The control cooling fan failed. • Check connection between the control cooling FAN
fan failure and mechanical control board
C 4A35 Caution An error occurred writing EEPROM. Replace mechanical control board
F 4A37 Note the error An error occurred reading HPRO • Check the connection between the HPRO EEPROM
code and make EEPROM. board and mechanical control board
a request for • Replace HPRO unit
servicing • Replace mechanical control board
17-24
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 4B34 Note the error An error occurred reading FLASH. Replace mechanical control board
code and make
a request for
servicing
F 4B35 Note the error CN5 on the mechanical control is Due to the F error, switch the power OFF (shutdown
code and make disconnected. LCD connector operations), and reconnected the mechanical control
a request for disconnected connector CN5 with the LCD board connector CN1.
servicing
code and make disconnected. HPRO temperature sensor operations), and reconnected the mechanical control
a request for connector disconnected connector CN25 with the HPRO unit relay connector.
servicing
code and make disconnected. H-DRV Board connector operations), and reconnected the mechanical control
a request for disconnected connector CN15 with the LCD board connector CN6.
servicing
code and make disconnected. Internal temperature sensor operations), and reconnected the mechanical control
a request for connector disconnected connector CN22.
servicing
F 4B39 Note the error CN16 on the mechanical control is • Due to the F error, switch the power OFF (shutdown
code and make disconnected. Or the HPRO motor is not operations), and reconnected the mechanical control
a request for operating. connector CN16.
servicing • Replace the HPRO motor
F 4F00 Control error Operation unit response timeout error Due to the F error, switch the power OFF/ON.
F 8000 Application Parameter error After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
F 8001 Application File does not exist.
error
F 8003 Application MOT file is not stored in the heap,
error address error.
F 8004 Application Error in MOT file syntax, midway
error address error
F 8005 Application Reading error in MOT file
error
F 8006 Application Data error in ini file
error
E 8007 Application Received data error 1. Replace the mechanical control board
error 2. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
E 8008 Application Sent data error
error
F 8009 Application Insufficient memory After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
F 800A Application Communication device open error
error
F 800B Application Communication timeout 1. Check for disconnected connectors of
error communication cable between main-mechanical
F 800C Application Mechanical control DSR does not switch control (control board side, mechanical control side)
error ON, or does not switch OFF 2. Check communication cable between main-
mechanical control for broken wires
F 800E Application Mechanical control rebooted 3. Replace cables between main-mechanical control
error (1A reception recognized 3 times).
4. Replace the mechanical control board
5. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
F 800F Application Cannot send 1B to mechanical control. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
17-25
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 8010 Application Cannot receive 1A from mechanical 1. Check for disconnected connectors of
error control. communication cable between main ? mechanical
control (control board side, mechanical control side)
2. Check communication cable between main ?
3. Replace cables between main mechanical control
F 8080 Application Retry of print server update is over After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
F 8081 Application Cannot open retry file.
error
F 8082 Application Cannot write into retry file.
error
F 8083 Application Cannot close retry file.
error
F 8084 Application Cannot delete retry file.
error
F 8090 Application Error updating the print version, or there
error is no file.
F 8091 Application Cannot open print version update file.
error
F 8092 Application Cannot write print update file to FLASH-
error ROM.
F 8093 Application Cannot read print version update file.
error
F 80A0 Application Print driver device error
error
F 80A1 Application Print driver device open error
error
F 80A2 Application No pixel clock output Replace the main board
error
F 8100 Application Flash ROM delete error Replace the mechanical control board
error
F 8101 Application Flash ROM comparison error
error
F 8102 Application Memory error After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
F 8104 Application Reception error 1. Check for disconnected connectors of
error communication cable between main-mechanical
F 8105 Application Received data error control (control board side, mechanical control side)
error 2. Check communication cable between main-
3. Replace cables between main-mechanical control
F 8200 Print control Driver: Device not registered The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
error Either reset the error, or switch the power OFF/ON.
If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
software or replace the control box.
17-26
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 8201 Print control Driver: Kernel memory acquisition The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
error failure Either reset the error, or switch the power OFF/ON.
F 8202 Print control Driver: Physical memory acquisition If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
error failure software or replace the control box.
F 8203 Print control Driver: Device not detected
error
F 8204 Print control Driver: I/O space mapping failed
error
F 8205 Print control Driver: IRQ Interrupt registration failed
error
F 8206 Print control Driver:
error Physical memory mapping failed
F 8210 Print control Library: Un-opened
error
F 8211 Print control Library: Duplicate open
error
F 8212 Print control Library: OFF command
error
F 8213 Print control Library: OFF parameter
error
F 8214 Print control Library: Processing command
error
F 8215 Print control Library: Insufficient resources
error
F 8216 Print control Library: OFF address
error
E 8220 Print control Command: HW Diagnosis command
error
E 8221 Print control Command: Exposure check command
error
E 8222 Print control Command: Polygon setting command
error
E 8223 Print control Command: Polygon check command
error
E 8224 Print control Command: DMA command
error
E 8225 Print control Command: Print command
error
E 8226 Print control Command:
error Print reset command
E 8227 Print control Command: Test operation start command
error
E 8228 Print control Command: Test operation check
error command
E 8229 Print control Command: Test operation end command
error
E 8230 Print control File: open
error
E 8231 Print control File: Read
error
E 8232 Print control File: close
error
17-27
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 8240 Print control HW Diagnosis: Data path error The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
F 8241 Print control HW Diagnosis: Address path error If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
error software or replace the control box.
F 8242 Print control HW Diagnosis: Data conveyor error
error
E 8251 Print control Exposure unit status: Polygon restart
error error
E 8252 Print control Exposure unit status:
error Polygon restart timeout
D 8253 Exposure unit status: LD temperature Output in log file only.
control error You can continue the process.
D 8254 Exposure unit status: LD drive current
error
D 8255 Exposure unit status: LD luminance error
D 8256 Exposure unit status: Light arriving at
HSYNC error
E 8260 Print control Print operation: The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
error Polygon restart error Either reset the error, or switch the power OFF/ON.
If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
E 8261 Print control Print operation: software or replace control box.
error Polygon restart timeout
E 8270 Print control Print operation:
error VSYNC timeout error
E 8271 Print control Print operation:
error HSYNC timeout error
E 8272 Print control Print operation: Surface detection error
error
E 8273 Print control Print operation: Parity error
error
C 8400 Caution Non target data to mechanical control After replacing the control box, restore the settings
(main → mechanical control)
C 8401 Caution Non target data to mechanical control
(main → mechanical control)
C 8402 Caution Non target data to main
(mechanical control → main)
C 8403 Caution Non target data to main
(mechanical control → main)
C 8410 Caution select function interrupt factor error
C 8411 Caution read function interrupt factor error
C 8412 Caution read function interrupt factor error
E 8440 Application Common function (SendProcMsg) error
error
E 8441 Application Common function (SendProcMsg) error
error
F 84A0 Application Mechanical control communication retry 1. Check for disconnected connectors of
error over (NAK reception retry over) communication cable between main-mechanical
F 84A1 Application Mechanical control communication retry control (control board side, mechanical control side)
error over 2. Check communication cable between main-
(Other retry over) mechanical control for broken wires
3. Replace cables between main-mechanical control
F 84A5 Application DTR Signal timeout error
error
F 84A6 Application DTR Signal timeout error
error
17-28
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 84A7 Application DTR Signal timeout error 1. Check for disconnected connectors of
error communication cable between main ? mechanical
F 84A8 Application Mechanical control initial data control (control board side, mechanical control side)
error notification 2. Check communication cable between main ?
Timeout error mechanical control for broken wires
3. Replace cables between main mechanical control
F 84B0 Application COM4 open failed After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
F 84B1 Application Acquisition of communication port initial
error value failed
F 84B2 Application Input Baud rate settings failed
error
F 84B3 Application Output Baud rate settings failed
error
F 84B4 Application Other Rs232c settings failed
error
F 84C0 Application Update process error file open failed
error
F 84C1 Application Update process error file read failed
error
C 8600 Caution Reception socket error:
NetIF_WatchStatus function select error
C 8602 Caution Reception from main failed: Error
occurred in ReceiveProcMsg function
C 8604 Caution Data section reception from PC failed: 1. Check condition of network communication with
Error occurred in Receive function PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
2. Replace HUB, network cables Replace HUB,
network cables
D 8605 Caution Header section reception from PC failed: 1. Check condition of network communication with
network cables
C 8606 Caution Send to PC failed: Error occurred in 1. Check condition of network communication with
common Send function PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)。
network cables 。
3. After replacing the control box, restore the settings。
C 8607 Caution Send to main control failed: Error After replacing the control box, restore the settings
occurred in common SendProcMsg
function
F 8608 Application PC access wait failed: 1. Check condition of network communication with
error Error occurred in WaitConnect function PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
network cables
F 8609 Application Port open for PC reception failed: Error After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error occurred in OpenServer function
F 860A Application Thread creation failed: Error occurred in
error pthread_create function
F 860B Application Update file obtain request was not sent. 1. Check condition of network communication with
error PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
C 8640 Caution Receive data from PC 2. Replace HUB, network cables Replace HUB,
sending source process name is incorrect network cables
C 8641 Caution Receive data from main After replacing the control box, restore the settings
sending source process name is incorrect
17-29
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C 8642 Caution Receive data from PC 1. Check condition of network communication with
header code is incorrect, or is PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
unregistered 2. Replace HUB, network cables Replace HUB,
network cables
header code is incorrect, or is
unregistered
C 8644 Caution Execute function for the internal ID
requested from the receive data is not
registered
C 8660 Caution Failed to obtain 1. Perform settings again。
logo file status. 2. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
C 8661 Caution Logo setup data obtain response
communication
failed: Error occurred in Send function
communication
E 8663 Application Failed to open logo file.
error
communication
E 8665 Application Failed to read logo file.
error
E 86A0 Application Failed to open file for saving image data. 1. Check condition of network communication with
error PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
network cables
E 86A1 Application Failed to write to image data file After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
E 86A2 Application Failed to automatically assign memory
error when receiving image data.
E 86A3 Application Failed to write to image data file
error
C 86A4 Caution Failed to receive image data: 1. Check condition of network communication with
network cables
E 86A5 Application Failed to close file for saving After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error image data.
F 86B0 Application Failed to open file for saving update data.
error
F 86B1 Application Failed to write to update data file.
error
F 86B2 Application Failed to automatically assign memory
error when updating.
F 86B3 Application Failed to write to update data file.
error
F 86B4 Application Update data reception failed: Error 1. Check condition of network communication with
error occurred in Receive function PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
network cables
F 86B5 Application Failed to close file for saving update data. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
F 86B6 Application Update failed. 1. Reinstall PrintLink for DRYPRO
error 2. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
17-30
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
E 86C0 Application Failed to close file for saving 1. Perform settings again
error logo file data. 2. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
E 86C1 Application Failed to write to logo file data file.
error
E 86C2 Application Failed to automatically assign memory
error when receiving logo file data.
E 86C3 Application Failed to write to logo file data file.
error
C 86C4 Caution Logo file data reception failed: Error
occurred in Receive function
E 86C5 Application Failed to close file for saving
error logo file data.
C 86C6 Caution Failed to move the
logo file data
C 8800 Caution Reception socket error: After replacing the control box, restore the settings
MntIF_WatchStatus function select error
C 8802 Caution Reception from main failed: Error
occurred in ReceiveProcMsg function
C 8804 Caution Data section reception from PC failed: 1. Check condition of network communication with
network cables
D 8805 Caution Header section reception from PC failed: 1. Check condition of network communication with
network cables
C 8806 Caution Send to PC failed: Error occurred in 1. Check condition of network communication with
common Send function PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
network cables
C 8807 Caution Send to main control failed: Error After replacing the control box, restore the settings
occurred in common SendProcMsg
function
F 8808 Application PC access wait failed: Error occurred in 1. Check condition of network communication with
error WaitConnect function PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
network cables
F 8809 Application Port open for PC reception failed: Error After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error occurred in OpenServer function
F 880A Application Thread creation failed: Error occurred in
error pthread_create function
sending source process name is incorrect PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
network cables
sending source process name is incorrect
header code is incorrect, or is PrintLink5-IN (CS-2)
unregistered 2. Replace HUB, network cables Replace HUB,
network cables
header code is incorrect, or is
unregistered
C 8844 Caution Execute function for the internal ID
requested from the receive data is not
registered
17-31
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
E 88A0 Application Failed to open file for saving restore data. 1. Check whether this is the DRYPRO832 restore data
error 2. Perform restore again
E 88A1 Application Failed to write to After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error restore data file.
E 88A2 Application Failed to automatically assign memory
error when expanding restore data.
E 88A3 Application Failed to write to
error restore data file.
C 88A4 Caution Image data reception from PC failed: 1. Check condition of network communication with
network cables
E 88A5 Application Failed to close file for saving restore data. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
E 88B0 Application Failed to obtain compressed logo file 1. Perform logo collection work again
error status 2. After replacing the control box, restore the settings
C 88B1 Caution Send compressed logo file to PC

E 88B3 Application Failed to open compressed logo file.
error
E 88B5 Application Failed to read compressed logo file
error
E 88C0 Application Failed to obtain backup (ini) file status.
error
C 88C1 Caution Send backup (ini) file to PC failed: Error
occurred in Send function
E 88C3 Application Failed to read backup
error (ini) file.
E 88C5 Application Failed to read backup
error (ini) file.
C 8A00 Caution Socket communication WatchStatus After replacing the control box, restore the settings
function error
C 8A01 Caution Socket communication ReceiveProcMsg
Function error
F 8AA0 Application Failed to open After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error local I/O device
F 8AA1 Application COM3 open failed
error
F 8AA2 Application Acquisition of communication port initial
error value failed
F 8AA3 Application Input Baud rate settings failed
error
17-32
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 8AA4 Application Output Baud rate settings failed After replacing the control box, restore the settings
error
F 8AA5 Application Other Rs232c settings failed
error
D 8AF0 Application Shutdown from UPS Shutdown signal received from UPS due to power cut,
error lowered voltage etc
F 9000 Application Failed to read total version file The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
F 9010 Application Failed to start network IF: fork() If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
F 9011 Application Failed to start network IF: exec ()
error
F 9012 Application Failed to start network IF: socket ()
error
F 9013 Application Failed to start network IF: bind ()
error
F 9014 Application Failed to start network IF: listen()
error
F 9015 Application Failed to start network IF: select ()
error
F 9016 Application Failed to start network IF: accept ()
error
F 9017 Application Failed to start network IF: send ()
error
F 9018 Application Failed to start network IF: recv ()
error
F 9019 Application Failed to start network IF:
error Communication timeout
F 9020 Application Failed to start mechanical control IF:
error fork()
error exec ()
error socket()
error bind()
error listen()
error select ()
error accept ()
error send ()
F 9028 Application Failed to start mechanical control IF: recv
error ()
F 9030 Application Failed to start print IF: fork()
error
F 9031 Application Failed to start print IF: exec ()
error
17-33
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 9032 Application Failed to start print IF: socket () The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
F 9033 Application Failed to start print IF: bind() If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
F 9034 Application Failed to start print IF: listen ()
error
F 9035 Application Failed to start print IF: select ()
error
F 9036 Application Failed to start print IF: accept()
error
F 9037 Application Failed to start print IF: send ()
error
F 9038 Application Failed to start print IF: recv ()
error
F 9039 Application Failed to start print IF:
F 9040 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: fork()
error
F 9041 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: exec ()
error
F 9042 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: socket ()
error
F 9043 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: bind()
error
F 9044 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: listen()
error
F 9045 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: select ()
error
F 9046 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: accept ()
error
F 9047 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: send ()
error
F 9048 Application Failed to start maintenance IF: recv ()
error
F 9049 Application Failed to start maintenance IF:
F 9050 Application Failed to start power IF: fork()
error
F 9051 Application Failed to start power IF: exec ()
error
F 9052 Application Failed to start power IF: socket()
error
F 9053 Application Failed to start power IF: bind()
error
F 9054 Application Failed to start power IF: listen ()
error
F 9055 Application Failed to start power IF: select ()
error
F 9056 Application Failed to start power IF: accept()
error
F 9057 Application Failed to start power IF: send ()
error
17-34
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
F 9058 Application Failed to start power IF: recv () The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
F 9059 Application Failed to start power IF: Communication If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
error timeout software or replace the control box.
F 9060 Application Failed to start remote IF: fork()
error
F 9061 Application Failed to start remote IF: exec ()
error
F 9062 Application Failed to start remote IF: socket ()
error
F 9063 Application Failed to start remote IF: bind()
error
F 9064 Application Failed to start remote IF: listen ()
error
F 9065 Application Failed to start remote IF: select ()
error
F 9066 Application Failed to start remote IF: accept()
error
F 9067 Application Failed to start remote IF: send ()
error
F 9068 Application Failed to start remote IF: recv ()
error
F 9069 Application Failed to start remote IF:
F 9070 Application Time management thread:
error pthread_create()
F 9071 Application Message receive waiting thread:
F 9072 Application Imager management thread:
D 9100 Setting file (print conditions settings) Output in log file only.
error: fopen() You can continue the process.
D 9101 Setting file (print conditions settings)
error: fread()
error: fwrite()
error: Parameter fault
D 9104 Setting file (LUT settings) error: fopen()
D 9105 Setting file (LUT settings) error: fread()
D 9106 Setting file (LUT settings) error: fwrite()
D 9107 Setting file (LUT settings) error:
Parameter fault
D 9108 Setting file (Border custom settings)
error: fopen()
D 9109 Setting file (Border custom settings)
error: fread()
D 910A Setting file (Border custom settings)
error: fwrite()
17-35
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
D 910B Setting file (Border custom settings) Output in log file only.
error: Parameter fault You can continue the process.
D 910C Setting file (tray settings)
Error: fopen()
D 910D Setting file (tray settings)
Error: fread()
D 910E Setting file (tray settings)
Error: fwrite()
D 910F Setting file (tray settings)
Error: Parameter fault
D 9110 Setting file (Calibration setup) error:
fopen()
fread()
fwrite()
Parameter fault
D 9114 Setting file (system settings)
Error: fopen()
Error: fread()
Error: fwrite()
D 9118 Setting file (SCP setup) error: fopen()
D 9119 Setting file (SCP setup) error: fread()
D 911A Setting file (SCP setup) error: fwrite()
D 911B Setting file (SCP setup) error: Parameter
fault
D 911C Setting file (SCU setup) error: fopen()
D 911D Setting file (SCU setup) error: fread()
D 911E Setting file (SCU setup) error: fwrite()
D 911F Setting file (SCU setup) error: Parameter
fault
D 9120 Setting file (Time layout) error: fopen()
D 9121 Setting file (Time layout) error: fread()
D 9122 Setting file (Time layout) error: fwrite()
D 9123 Setting file (Time layout) error:
Parameter fault
D 9124 Setting file (Language setup) error:
fopen()
17-36
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
D 9125 Setting file (Language setup) error: Output in log file only.
fread() You can continue the process.
fwrite()
Parameter fault
D 9128 Setting file (Maintenance schedule)
Error: fopen()
D 9129 Setting file (Maintenance schedule)
Error: fread()
D 912A Setting file (Maintenance schedule)
Error: fwrite()
D 912B Setting file (Maintenance schedule)
D 912C Setting file (product settings)
Error: fopen()
D 912D Setting file (product settings)
Error: fread()
D 912E Setting file (product settings)
Error: fwrite()
D 912F Setting file (product settings)
D 9130 Setting file (mechanical control settings)
Error: fopen()
Error: fread()
Error: fwrite()
D 9134 Setting file (HPRO setup) error: fopen()
D 9135 Setting file (HPRO setup) error: fread()
D 9136 Setting file (HPRO setup) error: fwrite()
D 9137 Setting file (HPRO setup) error:
Parameter fault
D 9138 Setting file (HPRO temperature setup)
Error: fopen()
D 9139 Setting file (HPRO temperature setup)
Error: fread()
D 913A Setting file (HPRO temperature setup)
Error: fwrite()
D 913B Setting file (HPRO temperature setup)
D 913C Setting file (Days density correction
setup) error: fopen()
D 913D Setting file (Days density correction
setup) error: fread()
D 913E Setting file (Days density correction
setup) error: fwrite()
17-37
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
D 913F Setting file (Days density correction Output in log file only.
setup) error: Parameter fault You can continue the process.
D 9140 Setting file (correction settings)
Error: fopen()
Error: fread()
Error: fwrite()
D 9144 Setting file (density correction data)
Error: fopen()
Error: fread()
Error: fwrite()
D 9180 Setting file (Densitometer settings)
Error: fopen()
Error: fread()
Error: fwrite()
Error: fopen()
Error: fread()
Error: fwrite()
D 9188 Setting file (LUT library CT/MRI) error:
fopen()
D 9189 Setting file (LUT library CT/MRI) error:
fread()
D 918A Setting file (LUT library CT/MRI) error:
fwrite()
D 918B Setting file (LUT library CT/MRI) error:
Parameter fault
D 918C Setting file (LUT library CR) error:
fopen()
D 918D Setting file (LUT library CR) error:
fread()
D 918E Setting file (LUT library CR) error:
fwrite()
D 918F Setting file (LUT library CR) error:
Parameter fault
D 9190 Setting file (LUT library DSA) error:
fopen()
17-38
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
D 9191 Setting file (LUT library DSA) error: Output in log file only.
fread() You can continue the process.
fwrite()
Parameter fault
D 9194 Setting file (LUT library US) error:
fopen()
fread()
fwrite()
Parameter fault
D 9198 Setting file (LUT library RI) error:
fopen()
D 9199 Setting file (LUT library RI) error:
fread()
D 919A Setting file (LUT library RI) error:
fwrite()
D 919B Setting file (LUT library RI) error:
Parameter fault
D 919C Setting file (Film color tone calibration
D 919D Setting file (Film color tone calibration
D 919E Setting file (Film color tone calibration
D 919F Setting file (Film color tone calibration
setup) error: Parameter fault
D 91A0 Setting file (Image processing function
debug information) Error: fopen()
debug information) Error: fread()
debug information) Error: fwrite()
debug information) error: Parameter fault
D 91C0 Setting file (LUT library DR) error:
fopen()
fread()
fwrite()
Parameter fault
D 91C4 Setting file (Image processing function
debug information) Error: fopen()
debug information) Error: fread()
debug information) Error: fwrite()
17-39
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
D 91C7 Setting file (Image processing function Output in log file only.
debug information) error: Parameter fault You can continue the process.
D 91C8 Setting file (tray elapsed setup)
Error: fopen()
D 91C9 Setting file (tray elapsed setup)
Error: fread()
D 91CA Setting file (tray elapsed setup)
Error: fwrite()
D 91CB Setting file (tray elapsed setup)
D 91CC Setting file (Calibration elapsed setup)
error: fopen()
D 91CD Setting file (Calibration elapsed setup)
error: fread()
D 91CE Setting file (Calibration elapsed setup)
error: fwrite()
D 91CF Setting file (Calibration elapsed setup)
D 91D0 Setting file (Maintenance schedule
elapsed) error: fopen()
elapsed) error: fread()
elapsed) error: fwrite()
elapsed) error: Parameter fault
D 91D4 Setting file (Calibration data) error:
fopen()
fread()
fwrite()
Parameter fault
D 91D8 Setting file (Density correction) error:
fopen()
D 91D9 Setting file (Density correction) error:
fread()
D 91DA Setting file (Density calibration) error:
fwrite()
D 91DB Setting file (Density calibration) error:
Parameter fault
D 91DC Setting file (Internal management data
D 91DD Setting file (Internal management data
D 91DE Setting file (Internal management data
D 91DF Setting file (Internal management data
D 91E0 Setting file (Resin lens correction setup)
error: fopen()
17-40
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
D 91E1 Setting file (Resin lens correction setup) Output in log file only.
error: fread() You can continue the process.
error: fwrite()
D 91E4 Setting file (Film color tone calibration
E 9200 Application Print timeout error: [NET] print request ~ The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
error Image data receive completed Either reset the error, or switch the power OFF/ON.
notification If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
E 9201 Application Print timeout error: [MEC] supply software or replace the control box.
error request ~ supply response
E 9202 Application Print timeout error: [MEC] Exposure
error request ~ Exposure response
E 9203 Application Print timeout error: [MEC] Exposure
error response ~ Discharging completion
notification
E 9204 Application Print timeout error: [PRN] Image data
error transfer request ~ Image data transfer
response
E 9205 Application Print timeout error: [PRN] Polygon status
error check request ~ Polygon status check
response
E 9206 Application Print timeout error: [PRN] Print
error preparation response ~ Expose process
complete notification
E 9207 Application Print timeout error: [ALL] Print request
error
E 9210 Application Print sequence error: [PRN] exposure
error process complete notification does not
arrive for [MEC] discharge complete
notification
E 9211 Film Size Err: Film sizeType error : Change the image data so that the type of film size of the
Queue cleared Reception of an image data which is machine is equivalent to that of the image data sent.
different from the Film sizeType of the
machine
D 9220 Application Timer process timeout: Output in log file only.
error Shutdown You can continue the process.
E 9221 Application Timer process timeout: The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
error Error release Either reset the error, or switch the power OFF/ON.
C 9900 Caution ini file read error: [PrintCondition] If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
ManageInfoPrint software or replace the control box.
C 9901 Caution ini file read error: [PrintCondition]
RequestedImageSize
RequestedImageSizeStamp
IntegralMultipleRatio
17-41
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C 9904 Caution ini file read error: [PrintCondition] The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
PatientInfoPosition Either reset the error, or switch the power OFF/ON.
C 9905 Caution ini file read error: [PrintCondition] If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
PatientInfoSize software or replace the control box.
StampPosition
StampSize
C 9910 Caution ini file read error: [StampLogo] Print
C 9920 Caution ini file read error: [BorderCustom]
Top&BottomSize
C 9921 Caution ini file read error: [BorderCustom]
Left&RightSize
C 9930 Caution ini file read error: [Tray] Tray1Use
C 9931 Caution ini file read error: [Tray] Tray1FilmSize
C 9932 Caution ini file read error: [Tray] Tray1FilmType
C 9933 Caution ini file read error: [Tray] Tray1Count
C 9934 Caution ini file read error: [Tray]
Tray1SheetOfPackage
C 9935 Caution ini file read error: [Tray] Tray2Use
C 9936 Caution ini file read error: [Tray] Tray2FilmSize
C 9937 Caution ini file read error: [Tray] Tray2FilmType
C 9938 Caution ini file read error: [Tray] Tray2Count
C 9939 Caution ini file read error: [Tray]
Tray2SheetOfPackage
C 993A Caution ini file read error: [Tray] SeriesUse
C 9940 Caution ini file read error: [Calibration]
UponFilmSet
ScheduledCalibration
DefaultCalibrationTime
Tray1ElapsedHours
Tray2ElapsedHours
C 9950 Caution ini file read error: [System] ImagerName
C 9951 Caution ini file read error: [System]
PowerOffMode
C 9952 Caution ini file read error: [System] SleepMode
17-42
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C 9953 Caution ini file read error: [System] The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
SleepModeTimer Either reset the error, or switch the power OFF/ON.
C 9954 Caution ini file read error: [System] Buzzer If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
software or replace the control box.
C 9955 Caution ini file read error: [System]
LogWeiteMode
C 9960 Caution ini file read error: [Layout] DateFormat
C 9961 Caution ini file read error: [Layout] DatSeparator
C 9962 Caution ini file read error: [Layout] TimeFormat
C 9970 Caution ini file read error: [Maintenance]
MaintenanceStandardSheets
MaintenancePrintSheets
FilterStandardDays
FilterElapsedDays
FilterStandardSheets
FilterPrintSheets
C 9980 Caution ini file read error:[DensityCorrect]
PatcMain ScanensityCorrection
C 9981 Caution ini file read error: [DensityCorrect]
PatchFF
PatchGain
PatchInterval
C 9990 Caution ini file read error: [Product] SerialNo
D 99A0 Update error 00 Output in log file only.
D 99A1 Update error 01 You can continue the process.
D 99A2 Update error 02
D 99A8 Application Update error 08
error
D 99A9 Application Update error 09
error
D 99AA Application Update error 0A
error
17-43
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
D 99AB Application Update error 0B Output in log file only.
error You can continue the process.
D 99AC Update error 0C
D 99AD Update error 0D
D 99AE Update error 0E
D 99AF Update error 0F
D 99B0 Update error 10
D 99BA Update error 1A
E 9A00 Application Socket error: socket() The cause of this error is either software or hardware.
E 9A01 Application Socket error: bind() If this does not correct the problem, either upgrade the
E 9A02 Application Socket error: listen()
error
E 9A03 Application Socket error: connect()
error
C 9A04 Caution Socket error: select()
E 9A05 Application Socket error: accept()
error
C 9A06 Caution Socket error: send()
C 9A07 Caution Socket error: recv()
E 9A08 Application Socket error: Server IP is incorrect
error
C 9A09 Caution Socket error: Timout occurred
E 9A10 Application File error: fopen()
error
E 9A11 Application File error: fopen()
error
E 9A12 Application File error: fwrite()
error
E 9A13 Application File error: fread()
error
E 9A20 Application Pipe error: pipe()
error
E 9A21 Application Pipe error: write()
error
E 9A22 Application Pipe error: read()
error
17-44
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
E B200 PROC START Failed to start setup data management The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
ERROR process Collect the log.
E B201 PROC START Failed to start file management process
ERROR
E B202 PROC START Failed to start queue management process
ERROR
E B203 PROC START Failed to start IMAGER management
ERROR process
E B204 PROC START Failed to start image creation process
ERROR
E B205 PROC START Failed to start time management process
ERROR
E B206 PROC START Failed to start GUI process
ERROR
E B207 PROC START Failed to start communication condition
ERROR process
E B208 DICOM FILE DICOM data creation error
MAKE ERROR
E B209 VERSIONUP Error occurred in update file obtain
ERROR response
E B20A ERROR Error reset error
RESET
ERROR
F B20B START END Startup complete timout
TIMEOUT
ERROR
D B400 FILEMNTPRO Error at startup
C ERROR
D B401 FILEMNTPRO DCM.exe startup error
C ERROR
D B402 FILEMNTPRO DCM Initial setup file error
C ERROR
D B403 FILEMNTPRO DCM.exe fail completed
C ERROR
D B410 FILEMNTPRO Server PC internal communication error
C ERROR
D B420 FILEMNTPRO Queue management data error
C ERROR
D B460 FILEMNTPRO Communication data parameter fault
C ERROR
D B499 FILEMNTPRO Other process error
C ERROR
D B600 QUEMNGPRO Error at startup
C ERROR
D B610 QUEMNGPRO Server PC internal communication error
C ERROR
D B620 QUEMNGPRO Queue management data error
C ERROR
D B660 QUEMNGPRO Communication data parameter fault
C ERROR
17-45
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
D B690 QUEMNGPRO Disk space error The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
C ERROR Collect the log.
D B691 QUEMNGPRO Queue registration quantity exceeded
C ERROR
D B692 QUEMNGPRO Queue delete error
C ERROR
D B699 QUEMNGPRO Other process error
C ERROR
D B800 IMAGERMNG Error at startup
PROC ERROR
D B810 IMAGERMNG Server PC internal communication error
PROC ERROR
D B820 IMAGERMNG Film transportation management error
PROC ERROR
E B830 IMAGERMNG [Image creation response MSG] returned
PROC ERROR value is NG
E B831 IMAGERMNG [Image creation response MSG] returned
PROC ERROR value was successful, but there is no
created file.
D B832 IMAGERMNG [Print response MSG] returned value is
PROC ERROR NG
D B833 IMAGERMNG [Image data response MSG] returned
D B834 IMAGERMNG [Print end instruction MSG] returned
D B850 IMAGERMNG Transportation process [Image creation
PROC ERROR response MSG]
Timeout error
D B851 IMAGERMNG Transportation process [Print response
PROC ERROR MSG]
Timeout error
D B852 IMAGERMNG Transportation process [Image data
PROC ERROR response MSG]
Timeout error
D B853 IMAGERMNG Transportation process [DMA sent end
PROC ERROR instruction MSG] timeout error
D B854 IMAGERMNG Transportation process [Print end
PROC ERROR response MSG] timeout error
D B860 IMAGERMNG Communication data parameter fault
PROC ERROR
D B899 IMAGERMNG Other process error
PROC ERROR
C BA00 IMAGE FILE Error at image file open
OPEN ERR
17-46
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C BA01 IMAGE FILE Error at image file read The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
READ ERR Collect the log.
C BA02 DICOM IMAGE BOX image position error
(2020:0010)
ERR
C BA03 DICOM IMAGE BOX polarity error
(2020:0020)
ERR
C BA04 DICOM IMAGE BOX pixel assign
(0028:0100) bit number error
ERR
C BA05 DICOM IMAGE BOX pixel bit number
(0028:0101) Error
ERR
C BA06 DICOM IMAGE BOX High order bit error
(0028:0102)
ERR
C BA07 DICOM IMAGE BOX pixel data expression
(0028:0102) Error
ERR
C BA08 DICOM IMAGE BOX optical measurement
(0028:0004) construction error
ERR
C BA09 FILMBOX FILM BOX format check error
FORMAT ERR
C BA0A FILMBOX FILM BOX film orientation error
FILM ORIENT
ERR
C BA0B FILMBOX FILM BOX film size error
FILM SIZE
ERR
C BA0C FILMBOX Cannot print with width specified from
PORTRAIT FILM BOX PORTRAIT.
NOPRINT
C BA0D FILMBOX Cannot print with length specified from
LANDSCAPE FILM BOX LANDSCAPE.
NOPRINT
C BA0E FILMBOX FILM BOX Image Format information
STANDARD (STANDARD) error
ERR
C BA0F FILMBOX FILM BOX Image Format information
ROW ERR (ROW) error
C BA10 FILMBOX FILM BOX Image Format information
SLIDE ERR (SLIDE) error
C BA11 FILMBOX FILM BOX Image Format information
CUSTOM ERR (CUSTOM) error
C BA12 FILMBOX FILM BOX magnification method error
MAGNIFICATI
ON ERR
C BA13 FILMBOX FILM BOX interpolation function type
INTERPOLATI error
ON ERR
17-47
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C BA14 FILMBOX FILM BOX Border error The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
BORDER ERR Collect the log.
C BA15 FILMBOX FILM BOX trim error
TRIM ERR
C BA16 FILMBOX FILM BOX contrast error
CONTRAST
ERR
C BA17 FILMBOX FILM BOX density error
DNSITY ERR
C BA18 FILMBOX FILM BOX glossy error
GLOSSY ERR
C BA19 NO IMAGE No received image information
DATA
C BA1A NO FILM The appropriate film box
SESSION does not exist when normal printing.
C BA1B NO FILM BOX The appropriate film box
box does not exist when normal printing.
C BA1C NO IMAGE The appropriate image
BOX box does not exist when normal printing.
C BA1D REC DATA There is a discrepancy in the
ERR STANDARD format.
C BA1E REC DATA The STANDARD format does not exist in
ERR d007.ini
C BA1F REC DATA There is a discrepancy in the ROW
ERR format.
C BA20 REC DATA The ROW format
ERR does not exist in d007.ini.
C BA21 REC DATA The SLIDE format does not exist in
ERR d007.ini.
C BA22 REC DATA There is a discrepancy in the CUSTOM
ERR format
.
C BA23 REC DATA FILM BOX luminance conversion error
ERR
C BA24 REC DATA FILM BOX Border size error
ERR
C BA25 REC DATA FILM BOX format type error
ERR
C BA26 REC DATA FILM BOX stamp message output error
ERR
C BA27 BITMAP ERR BITMAP SIZE height error
C BA28 BITMAP ERR BITMAP SIZE width error
C BA29 BITMAP ERR BITMAP interpolation process error
C BA2A IMAGE FILE Error at image file creation
WRITE ERR
C BC00 LOG DELETE Failed to create the log registration list
ERROR
C BC01 LOG DELETE Failed to delete log
ERROR
C BC02 SUM FILE Failed to create film total file
MAKE ERROR
17-48
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C BC03 LOG DELETE Failed to create the log registration list The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
ERROR Collect the log.
C BC04 LOG DELETE Failed to delete log
ERROR
C BC05 REP STATUS Status change report failed
ERROR
E BE00 DICOM FILE Failed to create DICOM directory
MAKE ERROR
C BE01 REP STATUS Status change notification
ERROR Failure occured
C BE02 REP STATUS Tray setup data obtain response
ERROR failure occurred
C BE03 REP STATUS System setup data obtain response
C BE04 REP STATUS Time layout setup data obtain response
C BE05 REP STATUS Language setup data obtain response
C BE06 REP STATUS Product setup data obtain response
C BE07 REP STATUS Print condition data obtain response
C BE08 REP CH Print condition data obtain response
ERROR Input device selection other than 1~4
C BE09 LUT MAKE Print condition data obtain response
ERROR LUT creation failed
C BE0A REP STATUS LUT setup data obtain response
C BE0B REP CH LUT setup data obtain response
C BE0C LUT MAKE LUT setup data obtain response
ERROR User LUT definition file creation failure
C BE0D REP STATUS LUT setup data obtain response
C BE0E REP STATUS Custom border setup data obtain response
ERROR failure occured
C BE0F REP STATUS DICOM SCP Setup data obtain response
C BE10 REP STATUS DICOM SCU Setup data obtain response
C BE11 REP CH DICOM SCU Setup data obtain response
C BE12 REP STATUS Print condition data obtain request
C BE13 REP STATUS Print condition setup data setup request
C BE14 LUT MAKE Print condition setup data setup request
C BE15 REP STATUS LUT setup data obtain request
17-49
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C BE16 LUT GET LUT setup data obtain request The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
ERROR User LUT definition file obtain failure Collect the log.
C BE17 REP STATUS LUT setup data setup request
C BE18 LUT MAKE LUT setup data setup request
ERROR User LUT definition file creation failure
C BE19 LUT MAKE LUT setup data setup request
C BE1A REP STATUS LUT library data obtain request
C BE1B REP STATUS LUT library name data obtain request
C BE1C REP STATUS DICOM SCU Setup data obtain request
C BE1D REP STATUS DICOM SCU Setup data setup request
C BE1E REP STATUS Image adjust data obtain response
C BE1F REP STATUS Logo setup data obtain response
D C000 COMMPROC Error at startup
ERROR
D C010 COMMPROC Server PC internal communication error
ERROR
D C020 COMMPROC KI3 Main unit communication error
ERROR
D C030 COMMPROC File access error
ERROR
D C070 COMMPROC Destination IP Address, Port No error
ERROR
D C080 COMMPROC Connected to a different PC
ERROR
D C099 COMMPROC Other process error
ERROR
C C200 MSG SEND Communication error (send error)
ERROR
C C201 LOGIN RSP Login response NG
NG
C C202 LOGIN RSP Login response Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C203 LOGOUT RSP Logout response NG
NG
C C204 LOGOUT RSP Logout response Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C205 RESERVE Reservation
C C206 JOB LIST RSP GUI job data information obtain data
NG response NG
C C207 JOB LIST RSP GUI job data information obtain data
TIMEOUT response Timeout
17-50
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C C208 QUE DEL RSP Queue delete response NG The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
NG Collect the log.
C C209 QUE DEL RSP Queue delete response Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C211 TEST PRINT Test print registration response NG
RSP NG
C C212 TEST PRINT Test print registration response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C C214 QC TEST QC Test print registration response NG
PRINT RSP
NG
C C215 QC TEST QC Test print registration response NG
PRINT RSP
TIMEOUT
C C217 PRINT COND Print condition data obtain response NG
GET RSP NG
C C218 PRINT COND Print condition data obtain response
GET RSP Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C219 PRINT COND Print condition data setup response NG
SET RSP NG
C C220 PRINT COND Print condition data setup response
SET RSP Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C222 BORDER GET Custom border setup data obtain response
RSP NG NG
C C223 BORDER GET Custom border setup data obtain response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C224 BORDER SET Custom border setup data setup response
RSP NG NG
C C225 BORDER SET Custom border setup data setup response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C227 COUNT Count failure
ERROR
C C228 CSV FILE CSV file output error
WRITE
ERROR
C C230 TRAY GET Tray setup data obtain response NG
RSP NG
C C231 TRAY GET Tray setup data obtain response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C C232 TRAY SET Tray setup data setup response NG
RSP NG
17-51
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C C233 TRAY SET Tray setup data setup response Timeout The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
RSP TIMEOUT Collect the log.
C C235 CALIB GET Calbration setup data obtain response NG
RSP NG
C C236 CALIB GET Calbration setup data obtain response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C237 CALIB SET Calbration setup data setup response NG
RSP NG
C C238 CALIB SET Calibration setup data setup response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C240 SYSTEM GET System setup data obtain response NG
RSP NG
C C241 SYSTEM GET System setup data obtain response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C242 SYSTEM SET System setup data setup response NG
RSP NG
C C243 SYSTEM SET System setup data setup response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C245 DATE GET Time layout setup data obtain response
RSP NG NG
C C246 DATE GET Time layout setup data obtain response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C247 DATE SET Time layout setup data setup response
RSP NG NG
C C248 DATE SET Time layout setup data setup response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C250 DENSITY GET Densitometer data obtain response NG
RSP NG
C C251 DENSITY GET Densitometer data setup response
RSP Timeout
TIMEOUT000
C C252 DENSITY SET Densitometer data setup response NG
RSP NG
C C253 DENSITY SET Densitometer data setup response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C255 DENSITY R Densitometer results data obtain response
GET RSP NG NG
C C256 DENSITY R Densitometer results data obtain response
GET RSP Timeout
TIMEOUT
17-52
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C C257 RESERVE Reservation The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
C C258 QUE INIT RSP Queue data initialize response NG Collect the log.
NG
C C259 QUE INIT RSP Queue data initialize response Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C261 PREV MNT Maintenance schedule data obtain
GET RSP NG response NG
C C262 PREV MNT Maintenance schedule data obtain
GET RSP response Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C263 PREV MNT Maintenance schedule data setup
SET RSP NG response NG
C C264 PREV MNT Maintenance schedule data setup
SET RSP response Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C266 PRODUCT Product setup data obtain response NG
GET RSP NG
C C267 PRODUCT Product setup data obtain response
GET RSP Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C268 PRODUCT Product setup data setup response NG
SET RSP NG
C C269 PRODUCT Product setup data setup response
SET RSP Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C271 MECH GET MEC setup data obtain response NG
RSP NG
C C272 MECH GET MEC setup data obtain response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C C273 MECH SET MEC setup data setup response NG
RSP NG
C C274 MECH SET MEC setup data setup response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C C276 HEAT GET HPRO setup data obtain request NG
RSP NG
C C277 HEAT GET HPRO setup data obtain request Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C C278 HEAT SET HPRO setup data setup response NG
RSP NG
C C279 HEAT SET HPRO SETUP data setup response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
17-53
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C C281 IMG ADJUST Image adjust data obtain response NG The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
GET RSP NG Collect the log.
C C282 IMG ADJUST Image adjust data obtain response
GET RSP Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C283 IMG ADJUST Image adjust data setup response NG
SET RSP NG
C C284 IMG ADJUST Image adjust data setup response Timeout
SET RSP
TIMEOUT
C C286 PATCH GET Correction data obtain response NG
RSP NG
C C287 PATCH GET Correction data obtain response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C C288 PATCH SET Correction data setup response NG
RSP NG
C C289 PATCH SET Correction data setup response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C C291 ERR LIST GET Error history data obtain response NG
RSP NG
C C292 ERR LIST GET Error history data obtain response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C294 DATA INIT Data initialize response NG
GET RSP NG
C C295 DATA INIT Data initialize response Timeout
GET RSP
TIMEOUT
C C297 LOGIN MNT Login maintenance shift response NG
RSP NG
C C298 LOGIN MNT Login maintenance shift response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C300 LOGOUT Logout maintenance cancel response NG
MNT RSP NG
C C301 LOGOUT Logout maintenance cancel response
MNT RSP Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C303 MNT MODE Maintenance shift response NG
RSP NG
C C304 MNT MODE Maintenance shift response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
17-54
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C C306 MNT CANCEL Maintenance shift cancel response NG The problem may be solved by rebooting the system.
RSP NG Collect the log.
C C307 MNT CANCEL Maintenance shift cancel response
RSP TIMEOUT Timeout
C C309 QC GET RSP QC data obtain request NG
NG
C C310 QC GET RSP QC data obtain request Timeout
TIMEOUT
C C312 LOGO GET Logo setup data obtain response NG
RSP NG
C C313 LOGO GET Logo setup data obtain response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C C314 LOGO SET Logo setup data setup response NG
RSP NG
C C315 LOGO SET Logo setup data setup response Timeout
RSP TIMEOUT
C CE00 DCHK INIT Cannot secure shared memory. (1)
ERROR
ERROR
ERROR
C CE10 DCHK CH NO Channer number error Check the send contents.
ERR Collect the log.
C CE11 DCHK FILM Film session error
SESSION
ERROR
C CE12 DCHK FILM Film box error Check the send contents.
BOX ERROR Collect the log.
C CE13 DCHK IMAGE Image box error
BOX ERROR
C CE14 DCHK Custom format error
CUSTOM
FORMAT
ERROR
C CE15 DCHK Position information error
POSITION
ERROR
C CE20 DCHK IMAGE IMAGE BOX image position error
BOX ERROR
C CE21 DCHK IMAGE IMAGE BOX polarity error
BOX ERROR
17-55
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C CE22 DCHK IMAGE IMAGE BOX pixel assign Check the send contents.
BOX ERROR bit number error Collect the log.
C CE23 DCHK IMAGE IMAGE BOX pixel bit number
BOX ERROR Error
C CE24 DCHK IMAGE IMAGE BOX High order bit error
BOX ERROR
C CE25 DCHK IMAGE IMAGE BOX pixel data expression
BOX ERROR Error
C CE26 DCHK IMAGE IMAGE BOX optical measurement
BOX ERROR construction error
C CE30 DCHK FILM FILM BOX format check error
BOX ERROR
C CE31 DCHK FILM FILM BOX film orientation error
BOX ERROR
C CE32 DCHK FILM FILM BOX film size error
BOX ERROR
C CE33 DCHK FILM FILM BOX Image Format information
BOX ERROR (STANDARD) error
BOX ERROR (ROW) error
BOX ERROR (SLIDE) error
BOX ERROR (CUSTOM) error
C CE37 DCHK FILM FILM BOX magnification method error
BOX ERROR
C CE38 DCHK FILM FILM BOX interpolation function type
BOX ERROR error
C CE40 DCHK Image magnification error (0.8~15.7)
STANDARD
MAG
STANDARD
REQIMAGE
MAG
STANDARD
CROP MAG
C CE43 DCHK ROW Image magnification error (0.8~15.7)
MAG
REQIMAGE
MAG
CROP MAG
CUSTOM
MAG
17-56
Error
Error Error
Level Code
Characters)
C CE47 DCHK Image magnification error (0.8~15.7) Check the send contents.
CUSTOM Collect the log.
REQIMAGE
MAG
CUSTOM +E476
CROP MAG
C CE49 DCHK Image expansion error (other)
EXPANSION
ERROR
C CE50 DCHK Columns are less than 64PIXELS
COLUMS
LESS THAN
64
C CE51 DCHK ROWS Rows are less than 64PIXELS
LESS THAN
64
C CE52 DCHK IMAGE Total number of pixels exceeds
SIZE OVER 76608336.
C CE53 DCHK FILM Film type is not supported
TYPE ERROR
C CE54 DCHK IMAGE SMOOTH=Exceeds 7 hour expansion
BOX ERROR image area
C CE55 DCHK IMAGE Exceeds expansion image area in
BOX ERROR MAG_NONE
C CE60 DCHK FILM FILM BOX trim error
BOX ERROR
C CE61 DCHK FILM FILM BOX contrast error
BOX ERROR
C CE62 DCHK FILM FILM BOX density error
BOX ERROR
C CE63 DCHK FILM FILM BOX glossy error
BOX ERROR
17-57
17.2.2 Display and solutions for MainteTool

No. Display Message Meaning Solution
1 This application has already been Double activation error Use the MainteTool that was activated
activated. (tried to activate MainteTool, even though it was already.
already activated)
2 Current PATH get error Current PATH get error Restart the PC.
(failure to get current PATH at the startup)
3 MainteTool.ini file does not exist. No MainteTool.ini file (initial setup file) error UPGRADE to most current version.
Please create the file.
4 IP address of PC for PLNK5 is not IP address of PLNK5-PC not set error UPGRADE to most current version.
set.
5 Socket Initialization Error. Socket initialization error Restart the PC.

This application will be exit.
6 Socket Connection Error. Socket connection error Restart the PC.

This application will be exit.
7 Please input a password. No passowrd entered error Enter the password.
8 Password is invalid. Password error Enter the correct password.
9 Login Failure. Login process failed UPGRADE to most current version.
10 Login Failure (Password Login process failed UPGRADE to most current version.
mismatch for DRYPRO832-1). (password for DRYPRO832-1 does not match)
11 Login Failure (Other user logged Login process failed Try again after the logged in user logs
in DRYPRO832-1). (other user already logged in to DRYPRO832-1) out.
12 Login Failure (Password Login process failed UPGRADE to most current version.
mismatch for DRYPRO832-2). (password for DRYPRO832-2 does not match)
in DRYPRO832-2). (other user already logged in to DRYPRO832-2) out.
14 Login Failure (PLNK5). Login process failed UPGRADE to most current version.
(failed on start request for PLNK5 maintenance)
15 Login Failure (DRYPR832-PC). Login process failed UPGRADE to most current version.
(failed on start request for DRYPRO832PC
maintenance)
16 Login Failure (DRYPRO832-1). Login process failed UPGRADE to most current version.
(failed on start request for DRYPRO832-1
maintenance)
(failed on start request for DRYPRO832-2
maintenance)
in PLNK). (other user already logged in to PLINK5) out.
in DRYPRO832-1). (other user already logged in to DRYPRO832-1, out.
Login Failure (Other user logged DRYPRO832-2)
in DRYPRO832-2).
20 Login Failure (Other user logged Login process failed • Try again after other user logs out
in DRYPRO832-1). (other user already logged in to DRYPRO832-1, from DRYPRO832-1
Login Failure (DRYPRO832-2). failed on start request for DRYPRO832-2 • UPGRADE to most current version.
maintenance)
Login Failure (DRYPRO832-2). (failed on start request for DRYPRO832-1,
DRYPRO832-2)
22 Login Failure (DRYPRO832-1). Login process failed • Try again after other user logs out
Login Failure (Other user logged (failed on start request for DRYPRO832-1, other from DRYPRO832-2.
in DRYPRO832-2). user already logged in to DRYPRO832-2) • UPGRADE to most current version.
17-58
23 Upgrade beginning OK ? Upgrade file confirmation message Press the OK button.

UPGRADE FILE
24 Setup backup request failure Setup backup request failed (PLNK5) Restart the PC.
(PLNK5).
25 Setup backup file compression Setup backup file compression failed (PLNK5) Restart the PC.
failure (PLNK5).
26 Setup backup file does not exist Setup backup file does not exist (PLNK5) Restart the PC.
(PLNK5).
27 Setup backup request failure Setup backup request failed (DRYPRO832-1) Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-1.
(DRYPRO832-1).
28 Setup backup file compression Setup backup file compression failed Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-1.
failure (DRYPRO832-1). (DRYPRO832-1)
29 Setup backup request failure Setup backup request failed (DRYPRO832-2) Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-2.
(DRYPRO832-2).
30 Setup backup file compression Setup backup file compression failed Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-2.
failure (DRYPRO832-2). (DRYPRO832-2)
31 Setup restoration completed!! Setup restoration complete message

Target System Restart. －
And MainteTool Shutdown.
32 Setup restoration request failure Setup restoration request failed (PLNK5) Restart the PC.
(PLNK5).
33 Setup restoration file Setup restoration file decompression failed Restart the PC.
decompression failure (PLNK5). (PLNK5)
34 Setup restoration request failure Setup restoration request failed (DRYPRO832-1) Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-1.
(DRYPRO832-1).
35 Setup restoration file Setup restoration file decompression failed Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-1.
decompression failure (DRYPRO832-1)
(DRYPRO832-1).
36 Setup restoration request failure Setup restoration request failed (DRYPRO832-2) Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-2.
(DRYPRO832-2).
37 Setup restoration file Setup restoration file decompression failed Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-2.
decompression failure (DRYPRO832-2)
(DRYPRO832-2).
38 Log compression failure (PLNK5). Log compression failed (PLNK5) Restart the PC.
39 Object file does not exist Object file does not exist (PLNK5) Confirm if the period entered when
(PLNK5). collecting the log was correct.
40 Log compression failure Log compression failed (DRYPRO832 PC-1) Restart the PC.
(DRYPRO832 PC-1).
41 Object file does not exist Object file does not exist (DRYPRO832 PC-1) Confirm if the period entered when
(DRYPRO832 PC-1). collecting the log was correct.
42 Log compression failure Log compression failed (DRYPRO832 PC-2) Restart the PC.
(DRYPRO832 PC-2).
43 Object file does not exist Object file does not exist (DRYPRO832 PC-2) Confirm if the period entered when
(DRYPRO832 PC-2). collecting the log was correct.
44 Log collection request failure Log collection request failed (DRYPRO832-1) Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-1.
(DRYPRO832-1).
45 Log compression failure Log compression failed (DRYPRO832-1) Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-1.
(DRYPRO832-1).
46 Object file does not exist Object file does not exist (DRYPRO832-1) Confirm if the period entered when
(DRYPRO832-1). collecting the log was correct.
47 Log collection request failure Log collection request failed (DRYPRO832-2) Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-2.
(DRYPRO832-2).
48 Log compression failure Log compression failed (DRYPRO832-2) Restart the PC and DRYPRO832-2.
(DRYPRO832-2).
17-59
49 Object file does not exist Object file does not exist (DRYPRO832-2) Confirm if the period entered when
(DRYPRO832-2). collecting the log was correct.
50 Log compression failure Log compression failed (MainteTool) Restart the PC.
(MAINTE).
51 Object file does not exist Object file does not exist (MainteTool) Confirm if the period entered when
(MAINTE). collecting the log was correct.
52 Please select CH NO. Request to select CHNo. Select the CH NO.
53 Job data collection failure. Job data collection failed Restart the PC.
54 Job data compression failure. Job data compression failed Restart the PC.
55 Object file does not exist. Object file does not exist Confirm if the period and the CH NO.
entered when collecting the job data was
correct.
56 Number of object files exceeded Too many number of object files (20 data) Decrease the period so the number of
(Max 20 data). files will be 20 or less.
57 Please wait a while. Now Terminating MEC I/O test
terminating MEC I/O test ... －
58 Test number is invalid. (Test Invalid test number Set the value for test number from 0 to
number is 0 to 239) (number should be between 0 and 239) 239.
59 TPRINT I/O test failure. Please Print I/O test failed Try again.
execute again.
60 Restore file unset error. Restore file unset error Specify the file to restore in the restore
dialog box.
61 Restore file does not exist. Restore file does not exist Specify the file name that is on the disc.
62 Restore file name error. The Restore file type error Confirm if the serial number in the file
serialno is different. (different serial number) name matches the serial number of the
device.
63 Restore file name error. The Restore file type error Specify the file with a .zip file extension.
extension is different(.zip). (different file extension, .zip)
64 Restore file name error. The Restore file type error Specify the file with a .tgz file extension.
extension is different(.tgz). (different file extension, .tgz)
65 Please check that Mainte_Tool Confirm Mainte_Tool folder sharing setup Set to share the Mainte_Tool folder.
folder is set to sharing.
66 Date is not input. Please input. Date is not entered Enter the date.
67 The date of From exceeds the Date in From exceeds the date in To Make the date in From before the date in
date of To. (Date in From should be before the date in To) To.
68 Please input correct 'Year'. Value in “Year” is invalid Enter correct value for “Year”.
69 Please input correct 'Month'. Value in “Month” is invalid Enter correct value for “Month”.
70 Please input correct 'Day'. Value in “Day” is invalid Enter correct value for “Day”.
71 Please input correct 'Hour'. Value in “Hour” is invalid Enter correct value for “Hour”.
72 Please input correct 'Minute'. Value in “Minute” is invalid Enter correct value for “Minute”.
73 Please wait a while ... Processing message －

74 Please wait a while. Now file is File copying message －
being copied ...
75 Completed!! Completion message －
17-60
76 Communication was aborted Communication with PLNK5 was aborted Restart the PC.
(PLNK5-PC). (periodical communication error)
77 Communication was aborted Communication with DRYPRO832-1 was aborted Restart the PC.
(DRYPRO832-1). (periodical communication error)
78 Communication was aborted Communication with DRYPRO832-2 was aborted Restart the PC.
(DRYPRO832-2). (periodical communication error)
79 This application will be exit. Application exit message －

80 Data will not be saved. Data is not saved • Confirm if specified folder is correct.
• Restart the PC.
81 Send data timeout error. Send data timeout error Restart the PC.
(cannot send within specific time)
82 Send data retry error. Send data error Restart the PC.
(send failure except timeout error)
83 Receive data timeout error. Receive data timeout error Restart the PC.
(cannot receive within specific time)
84 Receive data retry error. Receive data error Restart the PC.
(receive failure except timeout error)
85 Receive data analysis error. Receive data analysis error Restart the PC.
(received invalid data)
17-61
17.3 DRYPRO 832 Unit Replacement Procedure

This chapter provides the replacement procedure used when it is necessary to replace DRYPRO 832 units.
DRYPRO 832 Unit Malfunction

If the DRYPRO 832 unit has a malfunction, follow the procedure below to replace the unit.
Error occurred a DRYPRO 832
Replace the DRYPRO 832 unit Refer to “17.3.3 Replacing the DRYPRO 832 (Page 17-82)” for the
replacement procedure.
Control BOX Malfunction

If the control BOX has a malfunction, follow the procedure below to replace the unit.
Error occurred at control BOX
Replace the main board Refer to “17.3.1 Replacing Main Board (Page 17-63)” for the replacement
procedure.
• If this does not solve the problem, proceed to the next step
Replace the compact flash Refer to “17.3.2 Replacing the Compact Flash (CF) (Page 17-64)” for the
Printlink5-IN Malfunction
If the Printlink5-IN has a malfunction, follow the procedure below to replace the unit.
Error occurred at Printlink5-IN
Replace Printlink5-IN Refer to “17.3.4 Replacing Printlink5-IN (Page 17-95)” for the
MEC Board Malfunction

If the MEC board has a malfunction, follow the procedure below to replace the unit.
Error occurred at the MEC board
Replace the MEC board Refer to “17.3.5 Replacing the MEC Board (Page 17-106)”for the
17-62
17.3.1 Replacing Main Board

Follow the procedure below to replace the main board.
Continue to use the compact flash (CF) that was used previously.
Caution
Requirements
Prepare following when replacing main board.
No. Requirements No. Requirements
1 Replacement main board 2 DRYPRO 832 Operation Manual
3 DRYPRO 832 Repair Manual
START
Exit the DRYPRO 832 Refer to “3.2.1 How to Exit” in the operation manual to exit the DRYPRO 832 and switch the
power source breaker OFF.
Remove the old main Refer to “11.3 Replacing Main Board (Page 11-7)” to remove the old main board from the
board DRYPRO 832 unit.
Install the compact flash Refer to “11.4 Replacing Compact Flash (Page 11-11)” to remove the compact flash installed on
the old main board and install it to the new main board.
Install a new main board Refer to “11.3 Replacing Main Board (Page 11-7)” to install the new main board with a compact
flash installed, to the DRYPRO 832 unit.
Start the DRYPRO 832 Refer to “3.1.1 How to Start” in the operation manual, and check whether the DRYPRO 832 starts
normally.
END
17-63
17.3.2 Replacing the Compact Flash (CF)
Method for replacing the compact flash (CF) is different depending on the software version of the
DRYPRO 832.
Note
• Refer to “ Replacing Compact Flash (Up to V1.01) (Page 17-64)” if the software version is up to
V1.01.
• Refer to “ Replacing Compact Flash (V1.02 or Later) (Page 17-73)” if the software version is
V1.02 or later.
Replacing Compact Flash (Up to V1.01)

This procedure is the replacing method when the software version of the DRYPRO 832 is up to V1.01.
Refer to “ Replacing Compact Flash (V1.02 or Later) (Page 17-73)” if the software version is V1.02
Note or later.
For information about the software version of the DRYPRO 832, refer to “15.11 System Setup (Page 15-
25)”.
Follow the procedure below to replace the compact flash.
• Before replacing the compact flash, replace the main board as shown in “17.3.1 Replacing
Main Board (Page 17-63)”, and check that the DRYPRO 832 main unit starts up normally.
Caution
• If there are IP Addresses “192.168.20.161” or “192.168.20.179” used in the same network
environment of the facility, you need to release these IP addresses before the procedure.
• Data for “Film Count” and/or “Maintenance Schedule” may be lost if the procedure is not
carried out correctly. Loaded film needs to be discarded and newly loaded when the data is
lost, so take note of the “Film Count” and “Maintenance Schedule” before starting the
procedure.
For details, refer to “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)”, “15.14 Maintenance Schedule (Page 15-
31)”, and “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)”.
Requirements
Prepare following when replacing compact flash (CF).

1 Replacement compact flash (V1.01 or later) 2 Upgrading file (V1.01 or later)
3 Backup file (DRYPRO 832) 4 DRYPRO 832 Operation Manual
5 DRYPRO 832 Installation Manual 6 DRYPRO 832 Repair Manual
START
Check the status In order to check the status check setup items, start the DRYPRO 832 and server PC (Printlink5
or CS-2 or CS-3), and check the connection status.
• For information on connecting the devices, see “Chapter 4 Setting Up the Network” in the
installation manual.
• For information on connecting the power supply, see “Chapter 3.7 DRYPRO 832 Startup
Checks” in the installation manual.
Exit the application Refer to “7.4 Closing CS-2 or CS-3” in the installation manual to exit CS-2 or CS-3.
(Only for CS-2 and CS-3)
17-64
Check the current Start the DRYPRO 832 unit, and if you can check the settings from the Printlink5-IN, check the following
settings items from the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool Maintenance menu window and make a note of them.
• Film setup
• Number of sheets of film remaining in the tray
• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
• MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (ELAPSED TIME, PRINTED SHEETS)
• Product Setup
• SIZE FINE TUNING (H, V, requested size)
• Non-uniform Lens Correction
If the Lispl-832 is connected, setup in the same way and make a note of the
settings.
Caution
unit Power source breaker OFF
Replace the compact Refer to “11.4 Replacing Compact Flash (Page 11-11)” to replace the compact flash.
flash
Upgrading server PC Upgrade the server PC version to a later version than [V1.01R00].
However, the upgrade procedure differs depending on the server PC (Printlink5-IN or CS-2 and
CS-3).
When the server PC is CS-2 or CS-3

1. Before upgrading the software, click the [Help] tab on the “Prinlink5 Maintenance
Main Window” and check the current version.
17-65
2. Double-click the file below, and exit Printlink5.

• C:￥programFiles￥KonicaMinolta￥Plnk5￥Bin￥PL5End.bat
3. Refer to “7.4.1 Uninstalling Printlink5-IN” in the installation manual to uninstall the

Printlink5-IN installed on the server PC.
4. Refer to “7.3.2 Installing Printlink5-IN” in the installation manual, and install a
version of Prinlink5 later than [V1.01R00] in the server PC.
However, select “Built IN” in the “Mode select” window at installation.
If the installation completes normally, the server PC will automatically restart.

During the restart a DRYPRO 832 connection error will be displayed. Click the [Yes]
button, and close the dialog box.
When the server PC is Printlink5-IN
1. Refer to “16.4 Upgrade Information (Page 16-12)” and upgrade the software.
During the restart a DRYPRO 832 connection error will be displayed. Click
the [Yes] button, and close the dialog box.
Note
Start the DRYPRO 832 Refer to “3.1.1 How to Start” in the operation manual, and check whether the DRYPRO 832
starts normally.
However, if the MEC upgrade is performed at startup, the startup time may take a few
minutes longer than normal.
Note
Exit the application Refer to “How to Exit CS-2 and CS-3” in the installation manual to exit CS-2 or CS-3.
17-66
Initializing network If the compact flash is replaced, the DRYPRO 832 network settings return to the factory settings.
settings For this reason, return the Printlink5-IN network settings to the factory settings.
Check that following IP Address is not the same as another IP address within
the facility.
Caution
• IP address: 192.168.20.179
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
1. Select [Start] - [Control Panel] - [Network Connections] from the WindowsXP
desktop.
The network connections window opens.
2. Right-click on “Local Area Connection”, and select “Properties” from the pull down
menu.
“Local Area Connection Properties” dialog box is displayed.

3. Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” from “This connection uses the following
items:”, and click the [Properties] button.
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” dialog box is displayed.
17-67
4. Set the [Use the following IP address] radio button to ON and enter the factory
setting IP address and subnet mask.
5. Click the [OK] button and then the [Close] button.
Setting up Network Setup the network.

However, the network setup procedure differs depending on the server PC (Printlink5-IN or CS2
and CS-3).
1. Startup the CS-2 or CS-3.
After starting up WindowsXP, a dialog box is displayed.
2. Check that the factory IP address (192.168.20.161) is entered in the [IP
ADDRESS] entry field, and click the [SERVICE] button.
“Enter Password” dialog box is displayed.

3. Enter “5678” in the [Password] entry field, and click the [OK] button.
The main window of the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool is displayed.

License registration is required for the oversea version.
17-68
4. Refer to step 1 to 10 in “4.2.6 Changing the Facility Network Settings” in the

installation manual, and change to the facility network setting.
5. Click the [BACK] button on the main window of the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
6. Enter the new IP address that you set for the imager into the “IP ADDRESS” entry
field in the dialog box below, and click the [RENEW] button.
7. Check that a connection has been established with the imager.

8. Close all of the windows, and restart the server PC.

1. Refer to step 1 to step 11 of “4.2.5 Printlink5-IN Imager Output Channel Settings” in
the installation manual, and setup the imager output channel.
However, in the “Imager Output channel set” window in step 5, enter “192.168.20.161” into
the “DRYPRO 832 IP Address” entry field.
The server PC is restarted.
Exit the application Refer to “How to Exit CS-2 and CS-3” in the installation manual to exit CS-2 or CS-3.
17-69
Restore the setup Refer to “16.6 Restoring Settings (Page 16-26)” to restore the setup.
• Perform the restore for the DRYPRO 832. Do not restore Printlink5.
• If any error occurs during the restore, restart the server PC and redo the
Caution restore.
• DRYPRO 832 might restart. In that case, execute the restore after it has
restarted.
• Check that the serial number of DRYPRO 832 ① is same as the serial
number of the backup file ② in following setup restore window.
Check the serial number of the device on the label if ① and ② are different.
If the serial number on the label is different from ① , there is a chance that
there was a mistake in unit selection in previous “Selecting Replaced Unit”.
Refer to “ When Mistake was Made Selecting Replaced Unit (Page 17-79)”
and execute restore.
If the serial number on the label is same with ① , there is a chance that there
was a mistake in selection of the backup. Select the backup file with same
serial number as above ① .
If there is no backup file, DRYPRO 832 needs to be replaced.
For details, refer to “17.3.3 Replacing the DRYPRO 832 (Page 17-82)”.
Film Count Settings Set the film count.

If you do not have notes on the number of films left in the tray
1. Refer to “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)”, and set the film count to 0.
2. Refer to “5.3 Film Loading” in the installation manual, discard the remaining film
from the supply tray, and re-load the film.
If you have notes on the number of films left in the tray
1. Refer to “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)”, enter the film count from your notes.
• If the Lispl-832 is connected, set the Lispl-832 in the same way.

• If the actual film count and set film count differ, a pickup malfunction will
Caution occur when the film tray is empty.
17-70
Setting the Maintenance Setup the maintenance schedule.

Schedule
If you do not have notes on the maintenance schedule (elapsed time, printed
(ELAPSED TIME,
sheets)
PRINTED SHEETS)
1. Calculate an appropriate value for the elapsed time and printed sheets from the
installation date, first scheduled maintenance date, and daily film output status for
the facility, refer to “15.14 Maintenance Schedule (Page 15-31)”, and set the
values.
If you have notes on the maintenance schedule (elapsed time, printed sheets)
1. Refer to “15.14 Maintenance Schedule (Page 15-31)”, and enter the elapsed time
and printed sheets values from your notes.
If the Lispl-832 is connected, set the Lispl-832 in the same way.
Caution
Enter the label of the Refer to “ Work after replacing the exposure unit (Page 8-5)” in the “8.2 Replacing Exposure
control BOX. Unit”, re-enter the product setup items according to the label attached to the control BOX.
For PRODUCT SETUP, refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)”.
Set the image writing Refer to“14.2 Checking and Adjusting Image Data Writing Position (Page 14-13)”, re-enter the
position product setup items according to the label attached to the exposure unit.
Main Scan
OFFSET
position
adjustment
Sub Scan
OFFSET
position
adjustment
For PRODUCT SETUP, refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)”.
Setting SIZE FINE Set each value for SIZE FINE TUNING.
TUNING (H) SIZE FINE
If you do not have notes on setting values
TUNING (V) SIZE FINE
TUNING (Requested 1. Refer to “14.3 Checking and Fine Tuning the Print Size (Page 14-17)”, and adjust
Size) the SIZE FINE TUNING (H) and SIZE FINE TUNING (V).
2. Refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)” and adjust SIZE FINE TUNING
(requested size).
If you have notes on setting values
1. Refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)” and enter the values from your notes
into SIZE FINE TUNING (H), SIZE FINE TUNING (V), and SIZE FINE TUNING
(requested size).
Set the correction Refer to “14.1.1 Density Correction (Page 14-3)”, re-enter the correction items according to the
label attached to the control BOX.
Gain value
Phase value
Sub phase value
Sub gain value
Offset value
There is no need to print here.
Note
17-71
Checking the image Refer to “5.4 Checking Image Quality”, “5.5 Checking Density Linearity”, and “5.6
quality Creating QC Pattern Base” in the installation manual, and check the image quality.
When replacing the compact flash, always perform “5.5.3 Internal

Densitometer Correction”. However, if there are no densitometers in
Caution the facility, you will need to take it for correction. When aligning with a
densitometer in the facility, use the facility densitometer internally.
Set the logo Refer to “5.9 Logo Setup” in the installation manual to set the logo to be output on a film.
Backup the setup Refer to “Chapter 6: Backing up Setup” in the installation manual to backup the setup
data using the MainteTool.
Creating duplicate data Refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)” and note the following numerical values.
• SERIAL NO.
• SIZE FINE TUNING (H)
• SIZE FINE TUNING (V)
• SIZE FINE TUNING (Requested size)
END
17-72
Replacing Compact Flash (V1.02 or Later)

This procedure is the replacing method when the software version of the DRYPRO 832 is V1.02 or later.
Refer to “ Replacing Compact Flash (Up to V1.01) (Page 17-64)” if the software version is up to
Note V1.01.
25)”.
Follow the procedure below to replace the compact flash.
• Before replacing the compact flash, replace the main board as shown in “17.3.1 Replacing
Main Board (Page 17-63)”, and check that the DRYPRO 832 main unit starts up normally.
Caution
• If there are IP Addresses “192.168.20.161” or “192.168.20.179” used in the same network
environment of the facility, you need to release these IP addresses before the procedure.
• Data for “Film Count” and/or “Maintenance Schedule” may be lost if the procedure is not
carried out correctly. Loaded film needs to be discarded and newly loaded when the data is
lost, so take note of the “Film Count” and “Maintenance Schedule” before starting the
procedure.
For details, refer to “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)”, “15.14 Maintenance Schedule (Page 15-
31)”, and “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)”.
Requirements
Prepare following when replacing compact flash (CF).

1 Replacement compact flash 2 Upgrading file
(V1.02 or later) (V1.02 or later)
START
unit Power source breaker OFF.
Replacing the compact Refer to “11.4 Replacing Compact Flash (Page 11-11)” to replace the compact flash.
flash
Starting the server PC If the power for the server PC is OFF, turn the power ON.
Connection error message is displayed when the server PC is CS-2 or CS-3.

Click the [Yes] button, and close the dialog box.
Caution
Exit the application Refer to “7.4 How to Exit CS-2 and CS-3” in the installation manual to exit CS-2 or CS-3.
(Only for CS2 and CS-3)
Upgrade server PC Refer to “16.4 Upgrade Information (Page 16-12)”, and upgrade the version of server PC to
V1.02R00 or later.

Caution
17-73
starts normally.
If the MEC upgrade is performed at startup, the startup time may take a few minutes
longer than normal.
Note
Selecting replaced unit Following message is displayed in the operation panel of DRYPRO 832 when the DRYPRO 832
is started, then press the [Open/Enter] button.
• “Which was changed? CF:enter MEC:reset”
If the [Reset/Cancel]button is pressed by mistake (selecting MEC), the actual
film count and set film count will differ, and a pickup malfunction will occur
Caution when the film tray is empty.
Refer to “ When Mistake was Made Selecting Replaced Unit (Page 17-79)”,
and recover the previous status. In that case, currently loaded film needs to be
discarded and newly loaded.
• Pressing the [Open/Enter] button may cause MEC to start initialization. In that
case, above message is displayed after completion.
Note • Following message is displayed 3 minutes after above message is displayed.
• “Turn OFF the power”
If this message is displayed, press the operation switch and redo from previous
“Start the DRYPRO 832”.
(CS-2 and CS-3 only)
Initializing network If the compact flash is replaced, the DRYPRO 832 network settings return to the factory settings.
settings For this reason, return the Printlink5-IN network settings to the factory settings.
Check that the following address is not the same as another IP address within
the facility.
Caution • IP address: 192.168.20.179
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
1. Select [Start] – [Control Panel] – [Network Connections] from the WindowsXP
desktop.
menu.
17-74

17-75

However, the network setup procedure differs depending on the server PC (Printlink5-IN or CS-2
and CS-3).
2. Check that the factory IP address (192.168.20.161) is entered in the [IP
ADDRESS] entry field, and click the [RENEW] button.
3. Click the [SERVICE] button.


Upgrade of the DRYPRO 832 may start when the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool is
displayed.
Note Once the upgrade has started, the “disconnected” status may continue for more than 2
minutes.

installation manual, and change the facility network settings.
7. Enter the new IPaddress that you set for the imager into the “IP ADDRESS” entry
field in the dialog box below, and click the [RENEW] button.

17-76

1. Select [SETUP] - [MAINTENANCE] in Printlink5-IN main window.
3. Open the “Imager Output channel set” window, enter “192.168.20.161” into the
“DRYPRO 832 IP Address” entry field, and click [Imager Setup] button.
Upgrade of the DRYPRO 832 may start after the [Imager Setup] button is
clicked.Once the upgrade has started, the “disconnected” status may continue for more
Note than 2 minutes.
4. Refer to “4.2.6 Change to Local Facility Network Settings” in the installation
manual, and set the network.
Server PC will restart automatically when the restore completes without any problem.
Connection error message is displayed when the server PC is CS-2 or CS-3. Click the [Yes]
button.
• Perform the restore for the DRYPRO 832. Do not restore

Printlink5.
Caution
• If any error occurs during the restore, restart the server PC and
redo the restore.
• DRYPRO 832 may restart.In that case, start the restore after the
main unit has started up.
17-77
• Check that the serial number of DRYPRO 832 ① is same as the Serial
Number of the backup file ② in following setup restore window.
Caution
Check the serial number of the device on the label if ① and ② is different.
Refer to “ When Mistake was Made Selecting Replaced Unit (Page 17-
79)”, and recover the previous status.
If the serial number on the label is same with ① , there is a chance that
there was a mistake in selection of the backup. Select the backup file with
same serial number as above ① .
Checking the image Refer to “5.4 Checking Image Quality”, “5.5 Checking Density Linearity”, and “5.6 Creating QC
quality Pattern Base” in the installation manual, and check the image quality.
If the settings cannot be restored by restoration of V1.02 or later,

perform “5.5.3 Built-in Densitometer Calibration” in the installation
Caution manual.
Backing up setup Refer to “Chapter 6: Backing up Setup” in the installation manual to backup the setup data of
DRYPRO 832 using the MainteTool.
END
17-78
When Mistake was Made Selecting Replaced Unit

When mistake was made selecting replaced unit, reset necessary items by following procedure.
START
Caution
starts normally.
Note
Initializing network Return the Printlink5-IN network settings to the factory settings.
settings This item does not need to be set if DRYPRO 832 is used with default network
setting (IP Address: 192.168.20.161)
the facility.
Caution • IP Address: 192.168.20.179
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
desktop.
menu.
“Local Area Connection Properties” dialog is displayed.
17-79

Setting up Network Refer to “Setting Up Network” in “17.3.2 Replacing the Compact Flash (CF) (Page 17-64)”, and
setup the network.
Set the serial number 1. Check the serial number in the label on DRYPRO 832.
2. Refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)”, and set the Serial Number of
DRYPRO 832.
17-80

1. Refer to “15.20 Densitometer (Page 15-42)”, and set the film count to 0.
• “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)” is explaining the procedure to start the
DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool from Printlink5-IN. When the server PC is CS-2 or
Caution CS-3, refer to this and start the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.
occur when the film tray is empty.

Schedule However, if the Lispl-832 is connected, set the Lispl-832 in the same way.
(ELAPSED TIME,
PRINTED SHEETS)
sheets)
values.
Caution
Checking the image Refer to “5.4 Checking Image Quality”, “5.5 Checking Density Linearity”, and “5.6 Creating QC
quality Pattern Base” in the installation manual, and check the image quality.
When replacing the compact flash, always perform “5.5.3 Internal

Densitometer Correction” in the installation manual.
Caution However, if there are no densitometers in the facility, you will need to take it for
correction. When aligning with a densitometer in the facility, use the facility
densitometer internally.
Backup the setup Refer to “Chapter 6: Backing up Setup” in the installation manual to backup the setup data of
DRYPRO 832 using the MainteTool.
END
17-81
17.3.3 Replacing the DRYPRO 832
Method for replacing the DRYPRO 832 is different depending on the software version of the DRYPRO
832.
Note
• Refer to “ Replacing DRYPRO 832 (Up to V1.01) (Page 17-82)” if the software version is up to
V1.01.
• Refer to “ Replacing the DRYPRO 832 (V1.02 or Later) (Page 17-90)” if the software version is
V1.02 or later.
Replacing DRYPRO 832 (Up to V1.01)

Refer to “ Replacing the DRYPRO 832 (V1.02 or Later) (Page 17-90)” if the software version is
Note
V1.02 or later.
25)”.
Follow the procedure below to replace the DRYPRO 832.
Do not use the compact flash from the malfunctioning DRYPRO 832 in the new DRYPRO 832
main unit.
Caution
Requirements
Prepare following when replacing DRYPRO 832.

1 Replacement DRYPRO 832 (V1.01 or later) 2 Upgrading file (V1.01 or later)
START
Unpacking and Refer to “Chapter 3 Unpacking and Installation” in the Installation manual, and install the new
Installation DRYPRO 832.
Next, add supply trays or change supply tray sizes as required.
Exiting DRYPRO 832 Refer to “3.2.1 How to Exit” in the operation manual to exit the DRYPRO 832 and switch the
main unit power source breaker OFF.
Starting the the server PC Start the server PC (Printlink5-IN, CS-2, or CS-3)

Caution
17-82
Upgrading server PC Upgrade the server PC version to a later version than [V1.01R00].
However, the upgrade procedure differs depending on the server PC (Printlink5-IN or CS-2 and
CS-3).
1. Before upgrading the software, click the [Help] tab on the “Prinlink5 Maintenance
Main Window” and check the current version.
2. Double-click the file below, and exit Printlink5.

• C:￥programFiles￥KonicaMinolta￥Plnk5￥Bin￥PL5End.bat
3. Refer to “7.10 Uninstalling Printlink5-IN (Built IN)” in the installation manual to

uninstall the Printlink5-IN installed on the server PC.
17-83
4. Refer to “7.5 Installing Printlink5-IN (Built IN)” in the installation manual, and install
a version of Printlink5 later than [V1.01R00] in the server PC.
However, select “Built IN” in the “Mode select” window at installation.
During the restart a DRYPRO 832 connection error will be displayed. Click the [Yes]
button, and close the dialog box.
Note
1. Refer to “16.4 Upgrade Information (Page 16-12)” and upgrade the software.
Start the DRYPRO 832 Refer to “3.1.1 How to Start” in the operation manual to check whether the DRYPRO 832 starts
normally.
longer than normal.
Note
17-84
settings
Check that following IP Address is not the same as another IP address within
the facility.
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
1. Select [Start] - [Control Panel] - [Network Connections] from the WindowsXP
desktop.
The network connections window opens
menu.

The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” dialog box is displayed.
17-85

However, the network setup procedure differs depending on the server PC (Printlink5-IN or CS2
and CS-3).
2. Check that the factor IP address (192.168.20.161) is entered in the “IP ADDRESS”
entry field, and click the [SERVICE] button.


4. Refer to step 1 to 10 in “4.2.6 Change to Local Facility Network Settings” in the
installation manual, and change to the facility network setting.
17-86
6. Enter the new IP address that you set for the imager into the “IP ADDRESS” entry
field in the dialog box below, and click the [Update] button.


1. Refer to step 1 to step 11 of “4.2.5 Printlink5-IN Imager Output Channel Settings” in
the installation manual, and setup the imager output channel.
However, in the “Imager Output channel set” window in step 5, enter “192.168.20.161” into
the “DRYPRO 832 IP Address” entry field.
The server PC is restarted.
Server PC will restart automatically when the restore completes without any problem.
Connection error message is displayed when the server PC is CS-2 or CS-3. Click the [Yes]
button.
• Perform the restore for the DRYPRO 832. Do not restore Printlink5.
• If any error occurs during the restore, restart the server PC and redo the
Caution restore.
17-87
• DRYPRO 832 might restart. In that case, execute the restore after it has
restarted.
Caution • Check that the serial number of DRYPRO 832 ① is same as the serial
number of the backup file ② in following setup restore window.
Check the serial number of the device on the label if ① and ② is different.
Refer to “ When Mistake was Made Selecting Replaced Unit (Page 17-
79)” and execute restore.
If the serial number on the label is same with ① , there is a chance that
there was a mistake in selection of the backup. Select the backup file with
same serial number as above ① .
Set the serial number of If you restore the DRYPRO 832 main unit settings, the DRYPRO 832 serial number will be re-
the DRYPRO 832 unit written with the old number. Therefore, refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)”, and set the
serial number of the newly installed DRYPRO 832 main unit.
Data Initialize Refer to “15.21 Data Initialize (Page 15-54)”, and reset the film count and maintenance schedule.
Checking the image Refer to “5.4 Checking Image Quality”, “5.5 Checking Density Linearity”, and “5.6
quality Creating QC Pattern Base” in the installation manual, and check the image quality.
If there are no densitometers in the facility, you will need to take one for
correction.
Caution However, only perform densitometer calibration if the densitometer will be set
with the facility densitometer as the standard densitometer.
Set the logo Refer to “5.9 Logo Setup” in the installation manual to set the logo to be output on a film.
Backup the setup Refer to “Chapter 6 Backing up Setup Data” in the installation manual, and backup the setup data
for DRYPRO 832 using the MainteTool.
17-88
Creating duplicate data Refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)” and note the following numerical values.
• SERIAL NO.
• SIZE FINE TUNING (H)
• SIZE FINE TUNING (V)
• SIZE FINE TUNING (Requested size)
END
17-89
Replacing the DRYPRO 832 (V1.02 or Later)

Refer to “ Replacing DRYPRO 832 (Up to V1.01) (Page 17-82)” if the software version is up to
Note V1.01.
25)”.
Follow the procedure below to replace the DRYPRO 832.
Do not use the compact flash from the malfunctioning DRYPRO 832 in the new DRYPRO 832
main unit.
Caution
If you accidentally replaced the compact flash (before turning ON the power)
Return to original compact flash before turning ON the DRYPRO 832.
When you have turned ON the power of DRYPRO 832
After checking following message on the operation panel of DRYPRO 832, turn OFF the power
breaker directly, and return the original compact flash.
Following message is displayed 3 minutes after above message is displayed.
When above message is displayed, turn the power OFF of the DRYPRO 832 by pressing the
operation switch, then turn OFF the power breaker directly, and then return the original
compact flash.
When it has already started
After above message is completed, turn the power OFF of the DRYPRO 832 by pressing the
operation switch, then turn OFF the power breaker directly, and then return the original
compact flash.
• “INITIALIZING”
Refer to operation manual for messages displayed on the operation panel.
If there are IP Addresses “192.168.20.161” or “192.168.20.179” used in the same network

environment of the facility, you need to release these IPaddresses before the procedure.
Caution
Requirements
Prepare following when replacing DRYPRO 832.

1 Replacement DRYPRO 832 main unit 2 Upgrading file
START

Caution
17-90
Upgrade server PC Refer to “16.4 Upgrade Information (Page 16-12)”, and upgrade the version of server PC to
V1.02R00 or later.

Caution
settings
the facility.
• Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
desktop.
menu.
“Local Area Connection Properties” dialog is displayed.

The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” dialog box is displayed.
17-91

However, the network setup procedure differs depending on the server PC (Printlink5-IN or CS-2
and CS-3).
2. Enter the factory IP address (192.168.20.161) in the [IP ADDRESS] entry field, and
click the [RENEW] button.

5. It will go to next item, “Installation of main unit”.
17-92
Setting up Network When the server PC is Printlink5-IN

1. Refer to “4.2.5 Setting the Printlink5-IN Imager Output Channel” in the installation
manual, and open the “Imager Output channel set” window.
2. Enter “192.168.20.161” into the “DRYPRO 832 IP Address” entry field, and click the
[OK] button.
The [Input Channel Settings] window is displayed.

3. Click the [OK] button.
It will return to “Printlink5 Maintenance” window.

4. Click the [Exit] button.
The confirmation window is displayed.

5. Click the [OK] button.
Printlink5-IN application is restarted.
17-93
Installation of Install DRYPRO 832 with reference to the installation manual.

DRYPRO 832
main unit “4.2.4 Setting Printlink5-IN Input Channels” and “4.2.5 Setting the Printlink5-IN
Imager Output Channel” in the installation manual is not necessary.
Caution
END
17-94
17.3.4 Replacing Printlink5-IN
Method for replacing Printlink5-IN is different depending on the software version of the DRYPRO 832.
Note • Refer to “ Replacing Printlink5-IN (Up to V1.01) (Page 17-95)” if the software version is up to
V1.01.
• Refer to “ Replacing Printlink5-IN (V1.02 or Later) (Page 17-99)” if the software version is V1.02
or later.
Replacing Printlink5-IN (Up to V1.01)

Refer to “ Replacing Printlink5-IN (V1.02 or Later) (Page 17-99)” if the software version is V1.02 or
Note later.
25)”.
Follow the procedure below to replace the Printlink5-IN (server PC).
• If the Printlink5-IN (server PC) unit has a malfunction, do not restore the DRYPRO 832.
If you accidentally restore the DRYPRO 832 unit, refer to “ If You Accidentally Restored
Caution the DRYPRO 832 Main Unit (Page 17-105)”, and recover the previous status.
• Do not connect the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN until the Printlink5-IN upgrade has been
completed.
If you have connected the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN before upgrading the software,
check that the DRYPRO 832 starts normally, refer to the processing documentation from the
current version, and perform the settings again.
Requirements
Prepare following when replacing Printlink5-IN.

1 Replacement Printlink5-IN (server PC) 2 Upgrading file
3 Printlink_for_DRYPRO Installer 4 Backup file (Printlink5-IN)
(V1.01 or later)
5 DRYPRO 832 Operation Manual 6 DRYPRO 832 Installation Manual
7 DRYPRO 832 Repair Manual
START
Server PC Installation Installing a server PC.

• If the server PC is CS-2 or CS-3, refer to the CS-2 or CS-3 installation manual.
• If the server PC is a Printlink5-IN, refer to the Printlink5-IN installation manual.
17-95
Start the server PC If the power for the server PC is OFF, turn the power ON.

Caution
Install the Printlink Build IN Refer to “Chapter 7: Connecting and Setting CS-2 or CS-3” in the installation manual to install
(CS-2 and CS-3 only) the latest Printlink Build IN.
However, select “BuiltIN” in the “Mode select” window at installation.
Upgrading server PC Refer to “16.4 Upgrade Information (Page 16-12)”, and upgrade the Printlink5 software to
(Printlink5-IN only) a newer version than [V1.01R00].
Restore the setup Only when the server PC is Printlink5-IN

Refer to “16.6 Restoring Settings (Page 16-26)” to restore the setup.
Perform the restore for the Printlink5-IN. Do not restore DRYPRO 832.
If you have restored DRYPRO 832, it will be set to setting from the previous
Caution backup. Change the setting to the one with the changes made after previous
backup.
Restart the server PC Restart the server PC (Printlink5-IN, CS-2, or CS-3)
starts normally.
Note
17-96
Setting up Network When the server PC is CS-2 or CS-3

1. Refer to step 1 to 10 in “4.2.6 Changing the Facility Network Settings” in the installation
manual, and change to the facility network setting.
2. Enter the IP address set for the DRYPRO 832 in the “IP ADDRESS” entry field, and
click the [SERVICE] button.


4. Check that each setting item button is active in the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool main
window, and click the [BACK] button.
5. Click the [RENEW] button in the following dialog box.

Setup the network.
1. Refer to step 3 to step 10 in “4.2.6 Changing the Facility Network Settings” in the
installation manual, and set the Prinlink5-IN network settings.
2. Double click the Ch line assigned to DRYPRO 832 from “Imager” in the “Printlink5-IN
Maintenance” main window.
The “Imager Output channel set” window appears.
3. Check that “DRYPRO832” is selected in “Connect Imager” in “Common Output”, enter the
IP address into the “DRYPRO 832 IP Address” entry field, and click the [OK] button.
4. Refer to step 13 to step 16 in “4.2.6 Changing the Facility Network Settings” in the
installation manual, save the settings, and check that the new connection can be established.
If the buttons for each item in the maintenance menu window are not active
after 2 minutes has passed, or if the “Status” display is “Disconnected”, refer to
Caution “4.4 Checking the Connection Status” in the installation manual, and check the
connection status.
However, if the DRYPRO 832 upgrade has started, the disconnected status
may continue for more than 2 minutes.
17-97
Restart the server PC Restart the server PC (Printlink5-IN, CS-2, or CS-3)
Backup the setup Refer to “Chapter 6: Backing up Setup” in the installation manual to backup the setup
data using the MainteTool.
Check the status Check if the server PC has started successfully.
END
17-98
Replacing Printlink5-IN (V1.02 or Later)

Refer to “ Replacing Printlink5-IN (Up to V1.01) (Page 17-95)” if the software version is up to
Note V1.01.
25)”.
Follow the procedure below to replace the Printlink5-IN (server PC).
• If the Printlink5-IN (server PC) unit has a malfunction, do not restore the DRYPRO 832. If
you have restored DRYPRO 832, it will be set to setting from the previous backup. Change
Caution the setting to the one with the changes made after previous backup.
• Do not connect the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN until the Printlink5-IN upgrade has been
completed.
If you have connected the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN before upgrading the software,
check that the DRYPRO 832 starts normally. If there is a processing documentation for the
current version, refer to the processing documentation and perform the settings again. After
that, upgrade the software.
Requirements
Prepare following when replacing Printlink5-IN.
1 Replacement server PC 2 Upgrading file
(V1.02 or later)
3 Backup file (Printlink5-IN) 4 DRYPRO 832 Operation Manual

1 Replacement server PC 2 Upgrading file
(V1.02 or later)
3 Printlink_for_DRYPRO Installer 4 DRYPRO 832 Operation Manual
(V1.02 or later)
17-99

START
main unit Power source breaker OFF.
Server PC Installation Refer to Printlink5-IN operation manual, and install server PC.
Adding Memory Refer to “7.3 Adding Memory” in the installation manual, and add memory.

Caution
Install the Printlink Build Refer to “7.5 Installing Printlink5-IN (Build IN)” to install V1.02R00 or later Printlink Build IN.
IN Select “Built IN” in the “Mode select” window at installation.
starts normally.
longer than normal.
Note
17-100

2. Enter the IP address (192.168.20.161) set for the DRYPRO 832 in the [IP
ADDRESS] entry field, and click [RENEW] button.
3. Click the [SERVICE] button.


Upgrade of the DRYPRO 832 may start when the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool is
displayed.
Note Once the upgrade has started, the “disconnected” status may continue for more than 2
minutes.

installation manual, and change the facility network settings.
7. Click the [RENEW] button in the following dialog box.

17-101
Backup the setup Refer to “Chapter 6: Backing up Setup” in the installation manual to backup the setup data using
the MainteTool.
END
17-102

START
Server PC Installation Refer to Printlink5-IN operation manual, and install server PC.
Start the server PC Start the server PC (Printlink5-IN).
Do not connect the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN in powered up state until
the server PCupgrade has been completed.
Caution If you have connected the DRYPRO 832 and Printlink5-IN in powered up state
before upgrading the software, after checking following message in the
DRYPRO 832 operation panel, turn OFF the DRYPRO 832 by pressing the
operation switch, then turn OFF the power breaker directly, and then perform
the next procedure, “Upgrade of Server PC”.
• “INITIALIZING”
Refer to operation manual for messages displayed on the operation panel.
Upgrading server PC Refer to “16.4 Upgrade Information (Page 16-12)”, and upgrade the Printlink5 software to a
newer version than [V1.02R00] using the MainteTool.
If the upgrade of the server PC completes normally, the server PC will automatically restart.
If the restore of the server PC completes normally, the server PC will automatically restart.
Perform the restore for the Printlink5-IN. Do not restore DRYPRO 832.
If you have restored DRYPRO 832, it will be set to setting from the previous
Caution backup. Change the setting to the one with the changes made after previous
backup.
starts normally.
longer than normal.
Note
17-103

When facility IP address is used
Refer to step 4 to 16 in “4.2.6 Changing the Facility Network Settings” in the installation manual
and set the Printlink5-IN network setting.
When default IP address is used in the facility
Go to next procedure, “Backup the setup”.
If the restore of the Printlink5-IN was not possible, perform “4.2.4 Setting Printlink5-
IN Input Channels”, “4.2.5 Setting the Printlink5-IN Imager Output Channel”, and
Note “4.2.6 Changing the Facility Network Settings” in the installation manual.
Backup the setup Refer to “Chapter 6: Backing up Setup” in the installation manual to backup the setup data using
the MainteTool.
END
17-104
If You Accidentally Restored the DRYPRO 832 Main Unit

If you accidentally restored the DRYPRO 832 main unit, follow the procedure below, and reset the required items.
START
Start the server PC Start the server PC (Printlink5-IN, CS-2, or CS-3)

Caution
starts normally.
longer than normal.
Note

Caution • If the Lispl-832 is connected, set the Lispl-832 in the same way.

Schedule (ELAPSED However, if the Lispl-832 is connected, set the Lispl-832 in the same way.
TIME, PRINTED
SHEETS)
sheets)
values.
Caution
END
17-105
17.3.5 Replacing the MEC Board
Method for replacing MEC board is different depending on the software version of the DRYPRO 832.
Note • Refer to “ Replacing MEC Board (Up to V1.01) (Page 17-106)” if the software version is up to
V1.01.
• Refer to “ Replacing MEC Board (V1.02 or Later) (Page 17-108)” if the software version is V1.02
or later.
Replacing MEC Board (Up to V1.01)

Refer to “ Replacing MEC Board (V1.02 or Later) (Page 17-108)” if the software version is V1.02 or
Note later.
25)”.
Follow the procedure below to replace the MEC board.

Requirements
Prepare following when replacing MEC board.

1 Replacement MEC board (V1.01 or later) 2 Upgrading file
(V1.01 or later)
START
Start the server PC Start the server PC (Printlink5-IN, CS-2, or CS-3)

Caution
starts normally.
longer than normal.
Note
17-106
Checking the number of Refer to the operation manual, start the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool, and check the number of the
films films loaded currently.
Checking the time until 1. Refer to “3.1.2 How to Exit” in the operation manual, then press the operation
the completion of switch for longer than 1 second.
DRYPRO832 2. Measure the amount of time from pressing the operation switch until the DRYPRO
832 exits, and make a note of the time.
Switching the power main Refer to “3.1.2 How to Exit” in the operation manual, and switch the power source breaker OFF.
supply OFF
Replacing the MEC board Refer to “17.3.5 Replacing the MEC Board (Page 17-106)”, and replace the MEC board.
starts normally
longer than normal.
Note
If the time between pressing the operation switch and the DRYPRO 832 exiting is less than 3
minutes, the operation is complete.
If it takes more than 3 minutes, proceed to the following step.
Set the number of films Set the film count.

• If the actual film count and set film count differ, a pickup
malfunction will occur when the film tray is empty.
Caution
END
17-107
Replacing MEC Board (V1.02 or Later)

Refer to “ Replacing MEC Board (Up to V1.01) (Page 17-106)” if the software version is up to
Note V1.01.
25)”.
Follow the procedure below to replace the MEC board.

Requirements
Prepare following when replacing MEC board.

1 Replacement MEC board (V1.02 or later) 2 Upgrading file
(V1.02 or later)
START
Replace the MEC board Refer to “11.3 Replacing Main Board (Page 11-7)”, and replace the MEC board.
starts normally.
longer than normal.
Note
Selecting replaced unit Following message is displayed in the operation panel of DRYPRO 832 when the DRYPRO 832
is started, then press the [Reset/Cancel] button.
If the [Open/Enter] button is pressed by mistake (selecting CF), or the “Which
was changed? CF: enter MEC: reset” message is not displayed, the actual film
Caution count and set film count will differ, and a pickup malfunction will occur when
the film tray is empty.
Refer to “ When mistake was made selecting replaced unit (Page 17-109)”
and recover the previous status.
• Pressing the [Reset/Cancel] button may cause MEC to start initialization. In that
case, above message is displayed after completion.
Note
• Following message is displayed 3 minutes after above message is displayed.
If the message is displayed, restart the DRYPRO 832 by pressing the operation
switch.
Check the serial number 1. Check the serial number in the label on DRYPRO 832.
2. Refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)”, and check that the serial number of
DRYPRO 832 is same.
END
17-108
When mistake was made selecting replaced unit

When mistake was made selecting replaced unit, reset necessary items by following procedure.
START
Caution
starts normally.
longer than normal.
Note
Set the serial number 1. Check the serial number in the label on DRYPRO 832.
2. Refer to “15.17 Product Setup (Page 15-37)”, and set the serial number of
DRYPRO 832.
Set the number of films Set the film count.

• “15.9 Film Setup (Page 15-20)” is explaining the procedure to start the
DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool from Printlink5-IN. When the server PC is CS-2 or
Caution CS-3, refer to this and start the DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool.

Schedule
(ELAPSED TIME,
sheets)
PRINTED SHEETS)
values.
Caution
END
17-109
Chapter 18
Chapter 18 Technical Information
Technical information such as the block diagrams, wiring diagrams,
board drawings, function timing charts for the DRYPRO 832 are
contained here.
18.1 Placing Electronic Parts ...................................18-2

18.1.1 Supply Unit................................................. 18-2
18.1.2 Lispl-832 (Optional).................................... 18-3
18.1.3 Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit ................ 18-4
18.1.4 Heat Process Unit ...................................... 18-5
18.1.5 Ejection Unit ............................................... 18-6
18.1.6 Main Unit .................................................... 18-6
18.1.7 Exterior of Main Unit................................... 18-7
18.2 Placing Mechanical Parts.................................18-8
18.2.1 Supply Unit................................................. 18-8
18.2.2 Lispl-832..................................................... 18-9
18.2.3 Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit .............. 18-10
18.2.4 Exposure Unit........................................... 18-11
18.2.5 Heat Process Unit .................................... 18-12
18.2.6 Ejection Unit ............................................. 18-13
18.2.7 Main Unit .................................................. 18-13
18.3 Board Diagram...............................................18-14
18.3.1 Main Board............................................... 18-14
18.3.2 Main ScanRV, EEP Board Diagram ......... 18-15
18.3.3 LCD Unit Board Diagram ......................... 18-16
18.3.4 Operation SW Board Diagram ................. 18-16
18.3.5 STATUS LED Board Diagram .................. 18-17
18.3.6 Multiple Power Supply.............................. 18-17
18.3.7 Noise Filter ............................................... 18-18
18.3.8 MEC Board Drawing ................................ 18-19
18.4 Film Management Information .......................18-21
18.4.1 Management Information
Print Specifications................................... 18-21
18.5 Block Diagram................................................18-23
18.6 Writing Diagram .............................................18-24
18.7 Printing Operation Load Timing Chart
(Standard 1 ch) ..............................................18-29
18.8 Printing Operation Load Timing Chart
(Standard 2 ch) ..............................................18-30
18.1 Placing Electronic Parts
18.1.1 Supply Unit

Displays the placement of the electronic components of the supply unit.
No. Name Drawing Replacement

No. Procedures
1 Pickup HP sensor PS11 Page 4-20
2 Film height detection sensor PS12 Page 4-8
3 Barrier bag detection sensor PS13 Page 4-6
4 Elevating plate HP sensor PS15 Page 5-6
5 Tray detection sensor PS16 Page 5-15
18-2
18.1.2 Lispl-832 (Optional)

Displays the placement of the electronic components of the Lispl-832 (optional).

No. Procedures
1 Pickup HP sensor PS18 Page 4-20
18-3

No. Procedures
2 Film height detection sensor PS19 Page 4-8
3 Barrier bag detection sensor PS20 Page 4-6
4 Supply outlet sensor PS21 Page 6-18
5 Tray detection sensor PS22 Page 5-15
6 Elevating plate HP sensor PS24 Page 5-6
7 Elevating transport nip opening/closing HP PS25 Page 6-15
sensor
18.1.3 Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit

Displays the placement of the electronic components of the sub scan unit and the justification unit.

No. Procedures
1 Position regulation inlet sensor PS1 Page 7-15
2 V-Sync sensor PS2 Page 7-40
3 Sub Scan inlet sensor PS4 Page 7-34
4 Sub Scan Nip HP sensor PS3 Page 7-38
5 Right cover detection sensor PS8 Page 7-12
18-4
18.1.4 Heat Process Unit

Displays the placement of the electronic components of the heat process unit.

No. Procedures
1 Heat process temperature sensor TH1 - TH14 Page 9-8
2 Deodorant filter detection sensor PS5 Page 9-16
3 Internal temperature sensor TH15 Page 9-22
18-5
18.1.5 Ejection Unit

Displays the placement of the electronic components in the ejection unit.

No. Procedures
1 Densitometer Entrance sensor PS6 Page 10-3
18.1.6 Main Unit

Displays the placement of the electronic components in the main unit.

No. Procedures
1 Front cover sensor PS7 Page 11-3
18-6
18.1.7 Exterior of Main Unit

Displays the placement of the electronic components of the exterior of main unit.

No. Procedures
1 LCD board - Page 12-6
2 Status lamp - Page 12-8
3 Operation switch board SW Page 12-11
18-7
18.2 Placing Mechanical Parts
18.2.1 Supply Unit

Displays the placement of the mechanical components of the supply unit.

No. Procedures
1 Pickup transport motor PM1 Page 4-15
2 Supply elevating motor M1 Page 5-3
3 Tray lock solenoid SOL1 Page 5-10
4 Pickup HP sensor M2 Page 4-18
18-8
18.2.2 Lispl-832
Displays the placement of the mechanical components of the Lispl-832 (optional).

No. Procedures
1 Pickup transport motor PM5 Page 4-15
2 Supply elevating motor M5 Page 5-3
3 Tray lock solenoid SOL2 Page 5-10
4 Pickup HP sensor M6 Page 4-18
18-9

No. Procedures
5 Elevating transport motor PM6 Page 6-5
6 Elevating transport nip opening/closing motor M8 Page 6-13
18.2.3 Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit

Displays the placement of the mechanical components of the sub scan unit and the justification unit.

No. Procedures
1 Position regulation transport motor PM2 Page 7-19
2 Sub Scan transport motor PM3 Page 7-27
3 Sub Scan nip motor M3 Page 7-30
18-10
18.2.4 Exposure Unit

Displays the placement of the mechanical components in the Main Scan unit.

No. Procedures
1 Polygon motor M7 Page 8-3
2 Temperature control heater - Page 8-3
18-11
18.2.5 Heat Process Unit

Displays the placement of the mechanical components of the heat process unit.

No. Procedures
1 Heater H1 - H11 Page 9-8
2 Supply cooling fan FM1 Page 9-9
3 Heat process motor M4 Page 9-12
4 Heat process cooling fan 1 FM2 Page 9-14
5 Heat process cooling fan 2 FM3 Page 9-14
6 Insulation unit fan FM5 Page 9-18
7 Deodorant fan FM6 Page 9-20
18-12
18.2.6 Ejection Unit

Shows the placement of the mechanical components in the ejection unit.

No. Procedures
1 Densitometer - Page 10-3
2 Ejection motor PM4 Page 10-3
18.2.7 Main Unit

Shows the placement of the mechanical components in the main unit.

No. Procedures
1 Power supply (internal, external) cooling fan FM7 Page 11-17
2 Control cooling fan FM4 Page 11-25
18-13
18.3 Board Diagram
18.3.1 Main Board
CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3
CN7
CN1
CN2 CN8 CN10
connector Application connector Application

CN1 Power source CN2 CF
CN3 UPS CN4 LAN
CN5 MEC communication CN6 Exposure communication
CN7 Debug Board CN8 Console Output
CN10 Battery
Connectors other than those shown above are not used, and have not been packaged.
• Always turn the power of the DRYPRO 832 OFF when plugging in or pulling out a connector
• This board uses a coin type lithium battery. When disposing the batteries, always follow local
Caution
government regulations.
Also, take the following precautions concerning batteries that are removed.
(1) Do not recharge, disassemble, deform, heat, solder, or bring into contact with flame.
(2) When replacing or reusing, be careful not to install the batteries backwards.
(3) Store batteries out of the reach of young children, and immediately obtain medical
assistance if swallowed.
(4) Do not intentionally short or store or carry with metal products such as necklaces.
(5) When storing and disposing batteries, insulate both ends of the battery with tape or
other means in order to prevent contacting with other batteries or other metal products.
18-14
18.3.2 Main ScanRV, EEP Board Diagram
CN5 CN4 CN7 CN1 CN3 CN2
CN6

CN1 AC input CN2 V1 heater AC output
CN3 V2 heater AC output CN4 V3 heater AC output
CN5 V4 main heater AC output CN6 Heater control input
(from MEC)
CN7 V4 sub heater AC output
18-15
18.3.3 LCD Unit Board Diagram
connector Application
CN1 Power source input connector
Switch Application Switch Application

SW1 Calibration switch SW2 Test Print switch
SW3 Open / Enter switch SW4 Reset/Cancel switch
18.3.4 Operation SW Board Diagram
CN1
SW
connector Application
CN1 Power source input connector
Switch Application
SW1 Power Supply Switch
18-16
18.3.5 STATUS LED Board Diagram
LED1
LED2
LED Status
LED1 Lit: Cover open, jam error, other errors
(orange LED) Flashing: Maintenance of operation unit, film replacement, test print
LED2 Lit: Printing possible, calibration, filter exchange, periodic inspection, sleep
(blue LED) Flashing: Temperature high, currently printing, maintenance (Web / PC)
18.3.6 Multiple Power Supply

CN1 AC input connector CN5 Power source output connector for
（AC100V - AC240V input) MEC
CN6 Power source remote input connector CN7 Exposure unit
power source output connector
CN8 Main power source output connector CN9 Power source FAN connector
(Do not pull out)
18-17

CN10 Interlock SW
connector (unused)
• When replacing the board, always turn OFF the power source breaker, and remove the
power source plug. If the work is performed while the power plug is connected, there is a
Caution possibility of electric shock.
• To prevent electric shock, first remove CN1, and then remove the other connectors.
When connecting the connectors, always plug in the CN1 connector last.
• Always place the removed multiple power source on an insulation material.
If placed on top of a conductor such as metal, there is a possibility of shorting due to residual
voltage.
18.3.7 Noise Filter
TP1 TP3 TP4
TP5
TP2 TP6 TP7
TP Application
TP1 AC input tab L side (AC100V - AC240V input)
TP2 AC input tab N side (AC100V - AC240V input)
TP3 Heater AC output tab L side (AC100V - AC240V input)
TP4 Multiple power supply AC output tab L side (AC100V - AC240V input)
TP5 FG tab
TP6 Heater AC output tab N side (AC100V - AC240V input)
TP7 Multiple power supply AC output tab N side (AC100V - AC240V input)
• When replacing the board, always turn OFF the power supply breaker, and remove the
power supply plug.If the work is performed while the power plug is connected, there is a
Caution possibility of electric shock.
• To prevent electric shock, first remove TP1 and TP2, and then remove the other tabs.
When connecting the tabs, always plug in the TP1 and TP2 connector last.
• Always place the removed noise filter on an insulation material.
If placed on top of a conductor such as metal, there is a possibility of shorting due to
residual voltage.
18-18
18.3.8 MEC Board Drawing
CN4
CN3
CN28
CN6
CN12 CN27
SW1
CN8 SW4 SW3

SW5
SW6 SW2
SW5
SW7
CN11
CN10 CN22
CN24
CN25

CN1 DC Power supply input CN2 Power supply control I / F
CN3 CPU JTAG (unused) CN4 Communication with main CPU
CN5 LCD control I / F CN6 Communication with log PC
(unused)
CN7 Communication with heat processing CN8 Supply CH2 control output
unit EEP BOARD
CN9 Main unit sensor input CN10 FPGA JTAG (unused)
CN11 Densitometer I / F CN12 CPLD JTAG (unused)
CN13 OPERATION SW Input CN14 Supply CH2 input
CN15 Heater control output CN16 Heat process and ejection control output
CN17 Reserve sensor input (unused) CN22 Internal temperature sensor input
CN23 Supply CH1, Sub Scan input CN24 Fan control I / F
CN25 Heat process temperature sensor input CN26 Supply cooling fan control I / F
CN27 Communication with maintenance PC CN28 Supply CH1, Sub Scan control
output
18-19
Switch Application
SW1 1：OFF, 2：OFF, 3：OFF, 4：OFF, 5：OFF, 6：OFF, 7：OFF, 8：OFF
SW2 CPU reset switch (unused)
SW3 1：ON, 2：ON, 3：ON, 4：OFF
SW4 “RUN” FPGA configuration switch
• Do not change the SW settings. The device may be damaged.

• When replacing the board, always turn OFF the power source breaker, and remove the
Caution
power source plug. If the work is performed while the power plug is connected, there is a
possibility of electric shock.
18-20
18.4 Film Management Information
18.4.1 Management Information Print Specifications

Stamp writing contents
Max.
No. Item Format number of Remarks
characters
1 LUT reception “G” 1 character • “G” when the Presentation LUT data reception flag is
%1d received.
• The received LUT number (1~7) when the Presentation
LUT data reception flag is not received.
2 Contrast % 2d 2 characters Received (2011,1031) contrast value (-7~7)
3 Density % 2d 2 characters Received (2011,1030) density value (-7~7)
4 Interpolation %1d 1 character Received (2010,0080) Correction number (1~7) requested
No from flat smooth type.
5 Polarity “N” 1 character • “N” when received (2020,0020) polarity is
“P” “NORMAL” and received (0028,0004) optical
measurement construction is “MONOCHROME1”
• “P” when received (2020,0020) polarity is
“NORMAL” and received (0028,0004) optical
• “P” when received (2020,0020) polarity is
“REVERSE”, and received (0028,0004) optical
• “N” when received (2020,0020) polarity is
“REVERSE” and received (0028,0004) optical
measurement construction is “MONOCHROME2”.
6 Maximum %3d 3 characters Received (2010,0130) maximum density
density
7 Minimum %3d 3 characters Received (2010,0120) minimum density
density
8 Total number %6d 6 characters Number of films output from the server PC (count-up from
of films print end command)
9 Version %-11.11s 11 characters Version of server PC installed in Drypro 832
10 SERIAL NO. %-5.5s 5 characters Installed Drypro 832 main unit serial number
11 CH Number %-2.2s 2 characters xx part of received (2011.1060) modality ID
“xx:yyyyyyyyyyyy”
12 SCU name %-12.12s 12 characters yyyyyyyyyyyy part of received (2011.1060) modality ID
“xx:yyyyyyyyyyyy”
13 PrintIndexNo %03d 3 characters Print management information
14 Page number %03d 3 characters Page number
15 DICOM %-15.15s 15 characters Name of directory that stores DICOM received data that
Directory DCM created
16 Requested “” 1 character • (2020,0030) “ ” when requested image size is not
image size “D” received
operation “R” • (2020,0030) “D” when the requested image size is
received but the requested image size cannot be output
• (2020,0030) “R” when the requested image size is
received, and the requested image size can be output
17 Requested “000.00” 6 characters “000.00” when unspecified.
image size “Xxx.xx” Prints the specified size (e.g. “200.00”)
18-21
Max.
No. Item Format number of Remarks
characters
18 Magnification “0.000” 6 characters “0.000” when unspecified.
“Xx.xxx” “X1.000” when image is printed at specified size. Prints the
magnification when the minimizing process was performed
(e.g. “X0.988”)
• When the number of characters does not reach the maximum number for each of the items, they are
automatically shifted to the left and printed.
• Items are delimited by 1 character space.
18-22
18.5 Block Diagram
18-23
18.6 Writing Diagram
Overall Writing Diagram
Writing diagram is divided into 4 areas, Detail of each area is shown hereafter.
For detail, please refer to each area detail diagram.
18-24

Signal Assembly
V1 Main 1 Pre-heating Main 1

V1 Main 2 Pre-heating Main 2
V2 Sub F Heating Sub F
V2 Sub R Heating Sub R
V2 Main 1 Heating Main 1
V2 Main 2 Heating Main 2

V3 Sub F Slit Sub F
V3 Main Slit Main
V3 Sub R Slit Sub R
V4 Main 1 Slow Cooling Main 1
V4 Main 2 Slow Cooling Main 2 Deodorant Filter Relay Assy
LCD Relay Assy (2/2)
Deodorant Filter
Detection Sensor
Detail diagram （1/4）
V1 Main Heater 1
Pre-heating Main 1
V1 Main Heater 2
Pre-heating Main 2
V1 Sub Heater F
Front Cover Sen
V1 Sub Heater R
HPRO Thermistor
Pre-heating Unit Relay Assembly (1/2)
Supply Thermistor
V2 Sub Heater F
Heating Sub F
V2 Sub Heater R
Heating Sub R
V2 Main Heater 1
Internal Temp Sen
Heating Main 1
V2 Main Heater 2
Heating Main 2
V2 QC Sen
Heating Density Correction
Heating Unit
Sen
Main Unit
Tray Detection
V3 Sub Heater F CH1 Supply, Sub Scan Relay Assy (1/2)

Slit F
V3 Main Heater
Slit Main
V3 Sub Heater R
Slit R
Main Unit
Drawer CN
Elev HP Sen
Slit Unit
Sen
Pickup
Pickup HP
V4 Main Heater 1
Slow Cooling Main 1
V4 Main Heater 2
Slow Cooling Main 2
V4 QC Sen
Film Height
Slow Cooling Density

Light Shield
Detection Sen
Correction
V4 Sub Heater R
Supply Unit CH1 (1/2)
V4 Sub Heater F
Barrier Bag
Light Shield
Detection Sen
Cold Removal Unit Light Shield Relay Assy
V5 QC Sen Pickup Assy (1/2)

Rapid Cooling Density Correction
Rapid Cooling Unit A Column
B Column
Justification Relay Assy (1/2)
Sen
Film Detection
Densitometer Relay Assy

V-SYNC Sen
To detail diagram (2/4)

Sub Scan Inlet Sen Sub Scan Nip HP
Sub Scan Relay Assy (1/2)

Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit (1/2)
A Column
B Column
Right Cover Sen
Holder
CH2 Supply Relay Assy (1/2)
CH2 Supply Main Unit Assy (1/2)

Main Unit
Elev HP Sen
Pickup Assy (1/2)

Sen
Pickup
Pickup HP
Film Height
Light Shield
Light Shield Relay Assy

Barrier Bag
Light Shield
Detection Sen Detection Sen
Main Unit
Closing HP
Elev Trans Relay Assy (1/2)

Supply Unit CH2 (Optional) (1/2)
Land A A Column:1-179228-5(White)
Land B LCD Relay Assy (1/2) B Column:3-179228-5(Blue)
Land C Holder:3-179472-0
Sen
Main Unit
Nip Opening/ Supply Outlet
To detail
18-25
diagram (3/4)
18-26

Signal Assembly
V1 Main 1
V1 Main 2
V2 Sub F
V2 Sub R
V2 Main 1
H-DRV Power Supply Assy
V2 Main 2
V3 Sub F
V3 Main
V3 Sub R
V4 Main 1
V4 Main 2
V1 Main 1_L
V1 Main Heater 1
V1 Main 1_N
V1 Main 2_L
V1 Main 2_N V1 Main Heater 2
V1 Sub F_L V1 Sub Heater F
V1 Sub F_N
V1 Sub R_L
V1 Sub Heater R
V1 Sub R_N
V1 Heater Relay Assy

Pre-heating Unit
V2 Sub F_L
V2 Sub F_N V2 Sub Heater F
V2 Sub R_L
V2 Sub R_N V2 Sub Heater R
V2 Main 1_L
V2 Main 2_L
V2 QC Sen

Heating Unit
Inlet Assy
V3 Sub F_L
V3 Sub Heater F
V3 Sub F_N
V3 Main_L V3 Main Heater
V3 Main_N
V3 Sub R_L V3 Sub Heater R
V3 Sub R_N
Slit Unit
Densitometer Ent Sen
Densitometer Assy
V4 Main 1_L
Noise Filter Assy

V4 Main 2_L
V4 QC Sen
Ejection Unit (1/2)
V4 Sub_L
V4 Sub Heater R
V4 Sub_N V4 Sub Heater F
Noise Filter
V4 Sub Heater
Relay Assy Cold Removal Unit
V5 QC Sen
Rapid Cooling Unit

Unit
Heat Process
Power Supply Assy

Densitometer Relay Assy
Remote Signal Assembly

MEC Power Supply Assy

Multiple Power Supply
Power Supply Unit
Exposure Power
Relay Assembly 1
Land A
Control Unit
Main Power
A Column:1-179228-5 Land B
B Column:3-179228-5 Land C
Relay Assembly
Holder
To detail
diagram (4/4)

diagram (1/4)
To detail

Main Unit
Elev HP Sen
Pickup Assy (1/2)

Sen
Pickup
Pickup HP
Film Height
Light Shield
Light Shield Relay Assy

Barrier Bag
Light Shield
Detection Sen Detection Sen
Main Unit
Closing HP

Land A A Column:1-179228-5(White)
Land B LCD Relay Assy (1/2) B Column:3-179228-5(Blue)
Land C Holder:3-179472-0
Sen
Main Unit
Sen
Main Unit
Nip Opening/ Supply Outlet Tray Detection
Main Communication Assembly
Pickup Assy (2/2)
Motor
HPRO Motor
Supply Pickup
CH1 Supply, Sub Scan Relay Assy (2/2)
DC Motor
HPRO Motor Relay Assy
Motor
Pickup HP
Paper Ejection Solenoid
Ejection Motor
Supply Unit CH1 (2/2)

Lock Solenoid
Relay Post
Motor
Ejection Unit (2/2)
A Column:1-179228-1(White)
Supply Tray Supply Elev

B Column:3-179228-1(Blue)
or
Holder
Fan Relay Assy Fan Motor
Justification Relay Assy (2/2) or
Fan Motor
or
or
Position Trans Motor
DC Motor
Fan Motor/1
Sub Scan Nip Motor

HPRO Cooling FAN1 HPRO Cooling FAN2 Deodorant Fan
Relay Post
Fan Motor
or
or
Sub Scan Motor
Holder:2-179472-6
Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit (2/2)
Insulation Unit Fan
Fan Motor
or
Motor
or
Supply Pickup
Pickup Assy (2/2)

Fan
DC Motor
Control Cooling
Control Unit (2/2)
Pickup HP Motor
Holder:3-353294-2
Relay Post
Lock Solenoid
HPRO Thermistor Relay Assembly (2/2)

Fan Motor
Motor
or

Supply Tray Supply Elev
or
Supply Cooling Fan
Trans Motor
HPRO EEP Relay Assy
DC Motor
Nip Opening/
Closing Motor
HPRO Unit (2/2)
Elev Trans Relay Assy (2/2) B Column:3-179228-2(Blue)
Holder:2-179472-6

18-27

Main Communication Assembly

Justification Relay Assy (2/2)
Pickup Assy (2/2)
Pickup Assy (2/2)

Land C
Land B
Land A
Relay Post

Relay Post
DC Motor
DC Motor
DC Motor
DC Motor
Supply Pickup Pickup HP Supply Tray Supply Elev Position Trans Motor Sub Scan Nip Motor Sub Scan Motor Supply Pickup Pickup HP Motor Supply Tray Supply Elev Trans Motor Nip Opening/
Motor Lock Solenoid Motor
A Column:1-179228-5
Closing Motor
B Column:3-179228-5
Motor Motor Lock Solenoid Motor
Holder
Supply Unit CH1 (2/2) Sub Scan Unit, Justification Unit (2/2) Supply Unit CH2 (Optional) (2/2)
LD Power Assembly
Temp S
LD
To detail
Heater 2
LD
diagram (2/4)
Heater 1
LD
Control Unit
Power Supply Unit
Main Power
Relay Assembly
FG Mesh
Polygon Motor
FG Mesh
Exposure Power
Relay Assembly 1 Exposure Power Relay Assembly2
FG Mesh
Exposure Unit
18-28
18.7 Printing Operation Load Timing Chart (Standard 1 ch)
18-29
18.8 Printing Operation Load Timing Chart (Standard 2 ch)
PC Image Processing, Printing Operation

Omitted because this is the
Main Unit same as standard 1 channel
Control
Print Unit
Default Data Instructions
Supply Instructions Supply Completed Notification Exposure Instructions Exposure Completed Notification
MEC Unit
Initial operation after Film Loading

turning on main unit Omitted because this is the
same as standard 1 channel Printing Operation
Power ON
Print Start
Request
Pickup Unit
Pickup
HP motor
Pickup HP Pos
HP Sen
6092Hz 㸢 500Hz half 200ms
620ms
Pickup
Pulse Motor 䃩 500Hz 㸢 3046Hz 50mm/s half
Stop
Also perform operation Turn on position restriction sensor or start
for Tray 1 if available. deceleration at 920-ms high-speed process
Elev HP
Sen
Elev HP Sen
Raise
Up-down Plate
Operation
Correct
DC Motor
Opposite
Film Height Detection

Detection Sen
Lower
Elev Trans Unit

Nip Opening/
Closing Motor
Close
Nip Opening/
Closing Sen Open Open
Outlet Sen
3231Hz 㸢 500Hz half 200ms 3231Hz 㸢 500Hz half 200ms
5s 600ms
Trans Motor
500HZ 㸢 1616Hz 50mm/s half 100ms

1616HZ 㸢 3231Hz 100mm/s half 100ms 850ms
Justification Unit
Pos Regulation
Inlet Sen OFF
3745Hz 㸢 400Hz half 50ms 3745HZ 㸢 1236Hz 33mm/s half 200ms
t3 By film size
2s Reverse 400HZ 㸢 4000Hz half 50ms 600ms (Film length - 60)/33 - Nip 250 operation time -standby
Position Restriction time t1
Pulse Motor 䃩 * When the film is at the exit strong position,
Stop 1236 㸢 400 half 50ms Reverse 4000HZ 㸢 400Hz half 50ms set the back end of the film 60 mm in front of V-sync.
Stop 10ms 300ms Reverse 400HZ 㸢 4000Hz half 50ms 850ms 300ms 14 × 17 inch-film 430 mm
400HZ 㸢 1873Hz 50mm/s half 100ms 14 × 14 inch-film 354 mm
Reverse 400HZ 㸢 4000Hz half 50ms
11 × 14 inch-film 279 mm
Sub Scan 1873Hz 㸢 3745Hz 100mm/s half 100ms 10 × 12 inch-film 303.2 mm
Sub Scan 8 × 10 inch-film 252.8 mm
Inlet Sen OFF
3212.7HZ 㸢 500Hz half 200ms
1000ms
750ms 3212.7Hz 㸢 500Hz half 200ms
Sub Scan 25s 500HZ 㸢 3212.7Hz 33mm/s half 200ms

Pulse Motor Stop 䃩
Both Nip Position Outlet Nip Position t5 1100ms
ON Home Position Inlet Nip Position t1 0.5s t3 By film size
Sub Scan Nip
DC Motor Both Nip Position
Stop t2 165 t4 85
Measure this operation time
= Nip 50 operation time Operation Operation
ON Time
Sub Scan Time
Nip Sen
Vsic Sen OFF

Main unit remains on Heating Completed
during heating even
after the initial 1322HZ Control Gain Use "H"
operation is completed. 㩷
Heat Process 25s
Drive DC Motor 500HZ 㸢 1794Hz 32.5mm/sec half 200ms 䂥6 5521HZ 㸢 500Hz half 200ms
500HZ 㸢 1794Hz 32.5mm/sec half 200ms
25s t 1s
Ejection Motor
䃩 1794HZ 㸢 5521Hz 100mm/s half 200ms
1794HZ 㸢 500Hz half 200ms
Densitometer
Ent Sen OFF
18-30
LASER IMAGER
CODE NO.0921(UL)
0922(CE)
0921YG220D Service Manual

Konica Minolta Medical Imaging U.S.A., Inc. Konica Minolta Business Solutions
411 Newark Pompton Turnpike, Wayne, NJ 07470, U.S.A. (Canada) Ltd.
TEL. 973-633-1500 369 Britannia Road East, Mississauga,
Ontario, L4Z 2H5, Canada
TEL. 905-890-6600
EU Authorized Representative: Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic

Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic Imaging (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Europe B.V. 11F-C1 Junyao International Plaza, No.789 Manufacturer:
Frankfurtstraat 40, 1175 RH Lijnden, ZhaojiabangRoad, Shanghai, China Postcode 200032
The Netherlands TEL. 021-6422-2626
TEL. 31-20659-0260 2970 Ishikawa-machi, Hachioji-shi Tokyo 192-8505 Japan
071011YM

Drypro 832 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drypro 832 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drypro 832 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LASER IMAGER

0921YG220C Service Manual

EU Authorized Representative: Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic

Structure of This Manual

General Danger of Danger of Danger of Danger of

• Prohibition signs (indicating prohibited acts):

Prohibited Do not Do not Do not Do not No mobile Star-burst

• Symbols indicating compulsory or required acts:

Ground Remove plug from electrical outlet

Chapter 1 Safety Precautions and Warnings...................................1-1

Chapter 2 Before Starting Repair Work ...........................................2-1

Chapter 3 Basic Operations.............................................................3-1

Chapter 4 Replacing Supply Unit Loading Parts..............................4-1

Chapter 5 Replacing Tray Unit Loading Parts .................................5-1

Chapter 6 Replacing Lispl-832 (Optional) Loading Parts.................6-1

Chapter 7 Replacing Sub Scan Unit Loading Parts .........................7-1

Chapter 8 Replacing Exposure Unit ................................................8-1

Chapter 9 Replacing Loading Parts in Heat Process Unit ...............9-1

9.2.6 Replacing Internal Temperature Sensor ............................. 9-22

Chapter 10 Replacing Ejection Unit.................................................10-1

Chapter 11 Replacing Loading Parts in Main Unit ........................... 11-1

Chapter 12 Replacing Loading Parts in the Exterior of Main Unit....12-1

Chapter 13 Replacing and Cleaning Loading Parts on a Regular Basis...13-1

Chapter 14 Setting and Adjustment.................................................14-1

Chapter 15 DRYPRO 832 Utility Tool ..............................................15-1

15.11 System Setup.......................................................................15-25

Chapter 17 Troubleshooting ............................................................17-1

Chapter 18 Technical Information ...................................................18-1

1.1 Warning Labels ..................................................1-2

1.1 Warning Labels

1.1.1 Positions and Types of Warning Labels

No. Precautions/Warning Labels

2 Class 1 Laser Product

3 Caution Hot Label

4 Caution Hot (130 ℃ ) Label

No. Precautions/Warning Labels

1.2 Safety Precautions

1.2.1 Precautions Following Requirements of Laws and Regulations

Caution as to laser control

DRYPRO 832 Laser Unit Specifications

(7) EMC Statement

Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions

(8) EMC Statement

(9) EMC Statement

Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity

Recommended separation distance

d=[1.2] P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

Conducted RF 3Vrms [3]V d=[2.3] P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

(10) EMC Statement

Recommended separation distances between

1.2.2 General Precautions

Do not perform work or operation not contained in this manual.

Removing exterior covers

1.2.3 Handling Precautions

Do not remove the power plug by pulling on the power cable.

Do not put drink or foreign object on the product.